Drill Regulations

iQAST ARTILLERY
UNITED STATES ARMY

190 9
 FROM THE

UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT

THROUGH THE
SUPERINTENDENT OF DOCUMENTS

^^S.B&9i^~ /iL////o.i
g 506 Rev. Stat, prohibits the withdrawal of this book for home use.

7808
 Cornell University Library
UF453 .A5 1909
Coast artillery drill regulations. Unite

3 1924 030 759 579

olin
 Cornell University
Library
li

The original of tiiis book is in

tine Cornell University Library.

There are no known copyright restrictions in

the United States on the use of the text.

http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924030759579
COAST ARTILLERY
DRILL REGULATIONS
UNITED STATES ARMY

1909

WASHINGTON : GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFTICE : 1909

T
 Wae Department.
Document No. 343.

Office of the Chief of Coast Artillery.

2
 :

War Department,
Office of the Chief of Staff,
Washington, April I4, 1909.
The following Coast Artillery Drill Regulations liave been
approved by tlie President and are publisbed for the informa-
tion and government of the Army of the United States and
for observance by the organized militia of the United States.
By order of the Secretary of War
J. Franklin Bell,
Major-General, Chief of Staff.
 OOI^TEITTS.

Chapter I. Page.

General principles 9-11

Chapter II.

Definitions 12-28

Chapter III.

Organization 29-32

Chapter IV.
Marching maneuvers 33-36
To form the company 33-35
To march to the battery 35
To post the sections 35-36

Chapter V.

The battery— General duties 37-40

CH.iPTER YI.

Service at the emplacements 41-104

General instructions 41-43
Mortar battery 43-53
12-inch gun battery, disappearing carriages 53-67
10-inch gun battery, disappearing carriages 67-74
8-inch gun battery, disappearing carriages 74
6-inch gun battery, disappearing carriages 74r-80
12-inch gun battery, barbette carriages 81-89
10-inch gun battery, barbette carriages 89
8-inch gun battery, barbette carriages 89-90
6-inch gun-battery, pedestal mount 90-95
5-inch, 4.7-inch, and 4-inch gun battery 96
3-inch gun battery 96-100
6-pounder gun battery 100-104

Chapter VII.

Battery fire-control 105-112

Gun battery of the primary armament 105-109
Mortar battery 109-112
Battery of the intermediate armament 112
Battery of the secondary armament 112
5
6 CONTENTS.

Chapter VIII.
Page.
Bore sighting, orientation, and pointing 113-117
Bore sighting and orientation 113-1 14
Methods of pointing 114-115
Pointing tests 115-117

Chapter IX.

Fire and mine commands j 118-122

The fire command 118-120
Fire-control system of a fire command 120-121
The mine command 121-122
Fire-control system of a mine command 122

Chapter X.

The battle command 123-125

The battle command 123-125
Fire-control system of a battle command 125

Chapter XI.

The artillery district 126-129

Chapter XII.

The post 130-133

Chapter XIII.

An artillery inspection 134-135

Chapter XIV.

Target practice and salutes 136-143

Subcaliber practice 136-137
Service practice 137-139
Battery service practice 139-141
Fire command service practice 141-142
Battle command service practice 142
Modification of practice regulations 142
Reports of target practice '.
142
Salutes 143

Chapter XV
—
Night drill Searchlights 144-148
Night drill 144
Searchlights 144-148
 CONTENTS. 7

Chapter XVI.
Pagr..

Communications 149-153

Chaptee XVII.
Fire-control apparatus 154-173
Atmosphere board 154
Anemometer 154
Azimuth instrument 154-156
Barometer 156
Deflection board 156-158
Depression position finder 159-161
Mortar deflection board 161
Plotting board 161-163
Powder chart 163-164
Range board 165-170
Telescope - 170-171
Telescopic sight 171
Thermometer 171-172
Wind-component indicator 172
Wind vane 172-173

Chapter XVIII.
Care of material 174-192

Chapter XIX.

Storage and handling of explosives 193-200

General instructions 193-194
Commercial detonators 194^195
Dynamite 195-196
Explosive D 196-197
Fuses and primers 197
Gun cotton 197-199
Smokeless powder 199-200
Projectiles, filled and fused 200

Chapter XX.

Examination for gunners and for special ratings 201-207

Instruction of gunners 201-203
Qualification of rated enlisted men 203-207
 —

COAST ARTILLERY DRILL REGULATIONS, UNITED

STATES ARMY.

Chapter I.

GENERAL FRINCIPLES.
1. Coast defense comprises the military and naval disposi-
tions and operations to resist an attack by sea on a coast line.
Such attack may take the form of a naval attack, a land
attack, or a combined naval and land attack.
8. In the defense of a coast line the functions of the naval
forces are normally offensive; those of the land forces, de-
fensive. The operations of the naval forces may be and
usually are conducted at a distance from the coast line being
defended those of the land forces are confined to that coast
;

line. Such portions of the naval forces, however, as are not

included in the sea-going fleet may be assigned to assist the
military forces in the local defense of important harbors.
Vessels so assigned are designated as floating defenses, and
may include ships of the line, monitors, scouts, torpedo boats,
submarine boats, patrol boats, and picket boats.
3. The military preparations for the defense of a coast line
usually include
(1) The construction of permanent fortifications and the
provision of submarine defenses, manned by coast-artillery
troops, for the defense against naval attack of those harbors
that are of commercial or strategic Importance. For the
protection of the permanent fortifications against capture by
small raiding parties landed from an attacking fleet field
works are constructed and small bodies of mobile troops as-
signed thereto. Troops assigned to this duty are designated
as " Coast artillery supports."
(2) The assignment of troops of the mobile army for the
local defense against land attack of those harbors that are
of commercial or strategic importance, and the construction
for use in such defense of semi-permanent fortifications or
field works. Troops assigned to this duty are designated as
the " Coast guard."
(3) The mobilization and organization of troops of the
mobile army into field armies at points strategically located
with respect to the entire coast line.
9
 : : :

10 GENERAL PRIKCIPLES.

4. The permanent fortifications consist usually of works

constructed of earth and concrete with armament mounted
therein in fixed positions, together with the accessories neces-
sary for the effective service of this armament. The subma-
rine defenses consist of submarine mines, automobile torpedoes,
and marine obstructions.
5. The armament of the permanent fortifications is classi-
fied as primary, intermediate, and secondary. Guns of the
intermediate and secondary armament are called rapid-fire
guns.
6. The primary armament consists of guns of 8-inch and
and 12-inch mortars. These guns and mortars
larger caliber,
are used to attack armored vessels with shot and shell
carrying high explosives. Shell are used at the longer
ranges to penetrate thin armor, to silence the secondary
batteries, to injure vessels by racking efCect, and to demolish
the fire-control stations at more than the battle ranges of
naval ships. Shot are used at ranges where the perforation
of main armor is possible and are intended to reach the vitals
of a ship before explosion.
7. Mortars employ high-angle fire, and are used at all ranges
to attack the decks of ships with high explosive shell.
8. The intermediate armament consists of 6-inch, 5-inch, and
4.7-inch guns. This armament is used primarily to attack
unarmored vessels, but may be used eflfectively to supplement
the primary armament in the attack of armored vessels or
the secondary armament in the defense of the mine fields.
9. The secondary armament consists of 4-inch and 3-inch
guns. It is used for the defense of the mine fields and to
supplement the intermediate armament in the attack of un-
armored vessels.
10. The multiplicity of calibers is the result of gradual
development rather than of design. The typical guns of the
different classes are as follows
Primary 12-inch or larger guns, 12-inch mortars.
:

Intermediate: 6-inch guns.

Secondary 3-inch guns. :
^
11. For the effective service of the armament the following
are necessary
(o) Ammunition, sights, quadrants, loading imple-
ments.
(6) Fire-control equipment.
(c) Power and light equipment.
(d) Wireless and other methods of long-distance com-
munication.
12. The \inits of the tactical chain of coast artillery com-
mand are
The battery.
The fire —
command. The mine command.
The battle command.
The district command.
 GENERAL PRINCIPLES. 11

13. A battery Is a number of guns or mortars of the same

caliber and power, grouped with the object of concentrating
their fire upon a single target and of being directly com-
manded in action by a single individual. The term is used to
include also the emplacements in which the guns are mounted
and, in a more general sense, the personnel and accessories
required to operate it.
14. Batteries are named usually for deceased officers who
were killed in action or who were connected with the con-
struction of fortifications or the construction and service of
their armament. For example " Battery Shipp," " Battery
:

Parrot," " Battery De Russy," " Battery Barry."

15. A fire command is a group of batteries, generally not
more than four, organized for command by a single individual.
The batteries composing a fire command should be situated so
that their fire covers the same or contiguous water areas.
16. Where it can be avoided, primary, intermediate, and
secondary armaments are not grouped in the same fire com-
mand, nor are gun and mortar batteries so combined.
17. A mine command consists of the mine groups and the
rapid-fire batteries specifically assigned for their protection
which are designated for control by a single individual.
18. A battle command consists of all fire and mine com-
mands which may be controlled advantageously by one man
in the defense of a harbor. Battle, fire, and mine commands
are designated by number.
19. A district command consists of those battle commands
which are within supporting distance of one another, together
with the coast artillery supports assigned to the district. For
administrative purposes, forts not within supporting distance
may be included in the district.
20. Districts are designated by name, as " The Southern
Artillery District of New TorlJ."
 )

Chapter II.

DEFINITIONS.

21. Aiming. —Pointing the gun by means of a sight. (See

Pointing.
22. Ammunition hoist. —
The device by means of which am-
munition Is raised to the loading platform. Separate hoists
are used for projectiles and powder, or the latter is served by
hand.
23. Ammunition recess. —
The space in the parapet wall for
the temporary storage of ammunition.
24. Angle of departure. —
The angle between the line of de-
parture and the line of sight.
25. Angle of fall. —
The angle of fall is the angle which the
tangent to the trajectory at the point of impact makes with
the line of shot.
The angle of fall is often expressed as a slope; for example,
1 on 10.
26. Angle of impact. —The complement of the angle of inci-
dence.
27. Angle of incidence. —
The angle between the line of im-
pact and the normal to the surface at the point of impact.
28. Angle of position (or depression). —
The angle between
the line of sight and a horizontal plane through the axis of
the trunnions.
29. Apron. —
That portion of the superior slope of a parapet
or the interior slope of a pit, designed to protect the slopes
against blast.
30. Approaches. —
Roadways entering the battery parade.
31. Artillery engineer. —
An officer at a coast fort who has
charge of the maintenance of all power and electrical ap-
paratus.
32. Atmosphere hoard. —
A board for determining the atmos-
phere reference number. (See paragraphs 617, 749, and 750.)
33. Axis of gun. —
The central line of the bore.
34. Axis of trunnions. —
The central line of the trunnions.
35. Azimuth of a point. —
In coast artillery, the horizontal
angle measured in a clockwise direction from south to a line
from the observer to the point. For example, the azimuth of
a point B from A is the angle (measured clockwise from
the south) between the north and south line through A and
the line from A to B. The north point has an azimuth
of 180°.
36. Azimuth difference. —
The difeerence between the azi-
muths of a point as read from two other points,
12
 DEFINITIONS. 13

37. Azimuth instrument —

An iustrument for determiuing
azimuths. (See paragraphs 753 to 755, inclusive.)
38. Azimuth setter. —
The member of a mortar detachment
who lays the mortar in azimuth.
39. Base end station. —
^An observing station at either end of
a base line, designed to contain an azimuth instrument or
depression position finder. Base end stations are designated
as primary, secondary, or supplementary.
40. Base line. —
^A horizontal line the length and direction of
which have been determined. This line is used in position
finding, especially for long ranges; the stations at its ends
are called " base end stations." It is called " right " or
" left " handed, depending on whether the primary station is
to the right or left of the secondary facing the field of fire.
41. Banquette. —
The step between the truck and loading
platforms.
42. Battery. —The entire structure erected for the emplace-
ment, protection, and service of one or more guns or mortars,
together with the guns or mortars so protected. The guns
of a battery are grouped with the object of concentrating their
fire on a single target and of their being commanded directly
by a single individual.
43. Battery commander. —
The senior artillery officer present
for duty with a battery.
44. Battery commander's station. —
An observing station at
or near the battery, usually in rear of the center traverse.
45. Battery commander's walk. —
The elevated walk leading
from the battery commander's station along the rear of the
battery.
46. Battery parade. —
The area in rear of the emplacements
where the sections form.
47. Battle area. —
The area covered by the armament of a
battle command.
48. Blast slope. —
See Apron.
49. Blending. —
The process of mixing powders of the same
or different lots so as to obtain charges of uniform character-
istics.
50. Bore. The interior of a cannon forward of the front
face of the breechblock. It is composed of the powder cham-
ber, the centering slope, the forcing cone, and the rifled por-
tion called the " main bore."
51. Bore-sighting. —
In coast artillery, the process by which
the line of sight and axis of the bore prolonged are caused to
converge on a point at or beyond mid^-ange. (See para-
graph 526.)
52. Bourrelet. — ^A swell in the body of the projectile just in
rear of the head.
53. Breech. —
The mass of metal behind the plane of the
bottom of the bore.
54. Breechblock. —
The metal plug which closes the breech.
55. —
Breech mechanism. The breechblock, obturating device,
firing mechanism, and mechanism for operating the breech-
block.
14 DEFINITIONS.

56. Breech —The opening which receives the breech-

recess.
block.
Breech reenforce. —The part of the cannon in front of
57.
the breech and in rear of the trunnion band.
Bursting charge. —The charge of explosive in a projec-
58.
tile.
Caliber of gun. —The diameter of the bore in inches,
59.
measured between diametrically opposite lands. It is the
minimum diameter of the rifled portion of the gun.
60. Calibration. —
^Adjusting the range scale so that the
range reading at any jsarticular elevation of the gun will Indi-
cate the true distance to the center of impact of a group of
shots fired from that particular gun and mount at that eleva-
tion with the standard velocity and under normal atmospheric
conditions.
It is desirable to calibrate the guns of a battery under the
same atmospheric conditions, although this is not absolutely
necessary. It is absolutely necessary that uniform ammuni-
tion be used for calibration firing of all guns of a particular
battery.
When the individual guns of a battery are calibrated the
battery is calibrated, for the centers of impact of a series of
shots from each gun under normal atmospheric conditions will
coincide at the point indicated by any range setting.
When guns of a battery "shoot together" (that is, give
the same range for the same range setting), they may be
fired on the same data, but are not calibrated unless the range
under normal atmospheric conditions is that indicated by the
range setting.
It not feasible to determine by actual firing all the
is
points of a range scale, and therefore it is assumed that the
gun is calibrated when a range scale constructed from a
computed range table is adjusted on the gun so as to give
the proper setting for a mid-range.
61. Cannon. —
Artillery weapons from which projectiles are
thrown by the force of expanding powder gases.
Cannon are of three classes Guns, mortars, and howitzers.
:

Guns are long (generally 30-50 calibers), have flat tra-

jectories, and are used for low-angle fire (less than 15°), with
high velocities (2,000-3,000 f. s., about).
Mortars are short (about 10 calibers), and are used for
high-angle fire (45°-70°), with low velocities (550-1,300 f. s.,
about).
Howitzers are intermediate between guns and mortars.
The term " piece " is used when referring to a cannon of any
class.
Cannon of the United States land service are classified ac-
cording to their use into coast, siege, and field.
Cannon are made of a single piece or built up of two or
more pieces.
62.Canopy.—The projecting roof over the delivery tables
of ammunition hoists of gun batteries.
 .

DEFINITIONS. 15

63. Capital. —
The line through the gun pintle bisecting the
arc of the interior crest.
64. Carriage or mount. —
The means provided for supporting
a cannon. It includes the parts for giving elevation and direc-
tion, for taking up the recoil on discharge, and for returning
the piece to the firing position.
65. Carriage, fixed. —
A mount provided for guns and mortars
in permanent works and not designed to be moved from place
to place.
66. Carriage, movable (wheeled —
mount). ^A carriage or
mount provided with wheels for transportation of the piece
mounted thereon.
67. Carriages, coast. —Those used for coast artillery cannon.
They may be divided into four classes, depending upon the
nature of cover afCorded by the emplacements:
(a) Barbette: Where the gun remains above the parapet
for loading and firing.
(6) Disappearing: Where the gun is raised above the
parapet for firing, and recoils under cover for
loading,
(o) Masking mount: Where the gun remains above the
parapet for loading and firing but can be lowered
below the level of the crest for concealment.
(d)Casemate: Where the gun fires through a port.
If the carriage can be traversed so that the gun may be
fired in all directions it is said tohave all-round-fire (A. R. F.)
If the carriage can not be traversed so that the gun may be
fired in all directions, it is said to have limited fire (L. F.).
Rapid-fire gun carriages (except the 6-inch on disappearing
carriage) are constructed so that the gun recoils in a sleeve
and returns to the loading position immediately after firing.
Guns of the movable armament are mounted on wheeled
carriages.
68. Case I — —
Case II Case III. —(See Pointing.)
69. Casemate electrician. —
The member of a mine command
assigned to the care and operation of the mining casemate.
70. Charge. —The powder and projectile. The powder for
large cannon to include 4.7-inch guns is separate from the
projectile. For smaller calibers the projectile and powder are
not separate such ammunition is called " fixed."
;

71. Chase. — The part of the gun in front of the trunnion

band.
72. Chief of ammunition service. —
A noncommissioned offi-
cer in charge of the magazines, galleries, and service of am-
munition for a gun battery, or a mortar emplacement.
73. Chief loader. —
A noncommissioned officer of a mine com-
pany in charge of loading submarine mines.
74. Chief planter. —
^A noncommissioned officer of a mine
company in charge of the service on a mine planter.
75. Clinometer. —
An Instrupent for measuring accurately
the inclination of the axis of the bore to the horizontal.
16 DEFINITIONS.

76. Clinometer —The support for a clinometer inserted

rest.
"
in the muzzle of the gun also called bore plug."
—The coast defenses at any military
;

77. Coast artillery fort.

post and the personnel assigned thereto.
78. Coast artillery garrison. —The personnel, to Include regu-
lar coast artillery, coast artillery reserves, and coastartillery
supports, assigned to a coast artillery fort.
79. Coast artillery reserves. —
Troops of the organized militia
organized as coast artillery for the purpose of supplementing
the regular coast artillery in time of war.
80. Coast artillery supports. —
Infantry troops assigned to
coast artillery forts to support the artillery in repelling land
attacks in the immediate vicinity of the fortifications.
81. Communications. —
Means of transmitting orders and
messages through the tactical chain of command. (See Chap-
ter XVI.)
82. Computer. —A member of the fire-control section who
operates a range or deflection hoard.
83. Corrected range. —
The fictitious range which determines
the elevation to be given the gun.
84. Corridor. —
The passageway in rear of a traverse con-
necting two adjacent emplacements, at the loading platform
level.
85. Corridor wall. —
The traverse wall along the corridor.
86. —
Counterweight. The weight used in bringing a gun on a
disappearing carriage or masking parapet mount to the firing
position. The pit in the gun platform for the reception of the
counterweight of a disappearing carriage is called the counter-
weight well.
87. Cover posts. —
Positions for the members of a mortar de-
tachment at the command TAKE COVER.
88. Crane. —^A mechanical device for raising ammunition by
means of differential or other blocks.
89. Danger space. —
The horizontal distance within which a
target of a given height would be hit by a projectile. The
danger space varies with the range, the flatness of the tra-
jectory, the height of the target, and the height of the gun
above the target.
The maximum range which is all danger space is called the
" danger range."
90. Deflection. —The horizontal angle between the plane of
sight and plane of departure; it is expressed as a reference
number, and is set off on the sight deflection scale.
91. Deflection board. —
^A device for the purpose of deter-
mining the reference numbers for the deflection scale of the
sight in Cases I and II, and the azimuth correction reference
number in Case III and, for mortars, the corrected azimuth.
;

(See paragraphs 757 to 768, inclusive.)

92. Delivery table. —
The table from which ammunition is
delivered to the truck.
93. Density of loading. —
The mean density of the whole
contents of the powder chamber. It is the ratio of the weight
 DEriNITIONS. 17

of the powder charge to the weight of a volume of distilled

water (temparture of 39.2° F.) which will fill the powder
chamber. The formula for computing it is
A (density of loading) = (27.7 W) /V,
in which IF is equal to the weight of the powder in pounds
and T' the volume of the chamber in cubic inches.
94. Depression position finder. —
^An instrument to determine
the range and azimuth of a target, the ranges corresponding to
different angles of depression being indicated on the instru-
ment. (See paragraphs 769 to 779, inclusive.)
95. Deviation. — Distances measured either in the horizontal
plane at the level of the target or in a vertical plane through
the centei' of the target at right angles to the plane of direction.
If from the point of impact of a shot a perpendicular be drawn
to the plane of direction, the length of this perpendicular is
the lateral deviation, and it is plus or minus according as
the point of impact is to the right or left of the line of direc-
tion looking from the gun. The distance from the foot of
this perpendicular to the center of the target is the longitudinal
deviation. It is plus when the point of impact is beyond the
target, and minus when it is short.
96. —
Deviation at the target. If from the target a line be
drawn perpendicular to the plane of direction intersecting the
plane containing the line of shot, the length of this perpendicu-
lar is the " deviation at the target."
97. Deviation, absolute. —
The distance measured in a
straight line from the center of the target to the point of
impact.
98. Deviation, mean lateral. —
The arithmetical mean of the
lateral deviations of the points of Impact of a series of shots.
99. Deviation, mean longitudinal. —
The arithmetical mean
of the longitudinal deviations of the points of impact of a
series of shots.
100. Deviation, range. —
The difference between the range to
the target and the range to the point of impact.
101. Directing point. —
^A point at or near the battery for
which relocation is made at the plotting room. It is the point
over which the gun center of the plotting board is adjusted.
When the pintle center of a gun is taken as the directing
point, such gun is called the " directing gun."
102. Displacement of any point. —
The horizontal distance in
yards of that point from the directing point.
—
103. Drift. The divergence of the projectile from the plane
of departure due to the rotation of the projectile, its ballistic
character, and the resistance of the air. It is generally in the
direction of rotation, except for extreme elevations of high-
angle fire, in which case it may be opposite to the original
direction of rotation. For the United States service rifled
guns it is to the right. It may be expressed either in yards or
angular measure.
82615—09 2
 : — :

18 DEFINITIONS.

104. Elevation. —
A general term to denote the inclination in
a vertical plane given to the axis of the gun in pointing; the
angle between the axis of the gun and the line of sight is
the sight elevation the angle between the axis of the gun and
;

the horizontal is the quadrant elevation.

105. Elevation setter. —
The member of a mortar detachment
who lays the mortar in elevation.
106. Emplacement. —
That part of the battery pertaining to
the position, protection, and service of one gun, mortar, or
group of mortars.
107. Emplacement hook. —
A book containing all necessary
data concerning the battery.
108. Energy of the projectile. —
The energy stored up in the
projectile by the force of the expanding gases generated by
the explosion of the powder charge. It is expressed usually
in foot-tons. The formula for computing it is
^=1^1-7(4480^),
in which W
the weight of the projectile in pounds, 1" its
is
velocity in feet per second, and g the acceleration due to
gravity (mean value 32.10).
109. Equalizing pipe. —
A pipe connecting corresponding ends
of two recoil cylinders for the purpose of equalizing the pres-
sure therein.
110. Exterior crest. —
The line of intersection of the superior
and exterior slopes.
111. Exterior slope. —The outer slope of the battery.
112. Field of fire. —The area covered by the armament of a
battery.
113. Fire area. —The area covered by the armament of a
fire command.
114. Fire-control. — Fire-control the exercise of those tac-
is
tical functions which determine
(o) The objective of Are.
(6) The volume and concentration of fire.
(c) The accuracy of fire.
The term " fire-control system " includes the means em-
ployed in fire-control, the scheme of its installation, and the
method of its use.
The material as installed, which is employed in the fire-con-
trol of a battery or district, is called the " fire-control installa-
tion " for that battery or district. Installations are either
standard or provisional.
115. Fire-control material may be classified under the fol-
lowing heads
(a) Instruments for the observation and location of
targets.
Instruments for the determination of firing data.
(h)
(c) Communications.
The personnel employed in fire-control is called the " flre-
control personnel."
 : .

DEFINITIONS. 19

116. The fire-control stations for the coast artillery service

and the conventional signs and abbreviations therefor are as
follows

station.
Abbrevia-
Sign.
tion.

Battle commander's station C

Primary station of a

Secondary station of
fire

a
command

fire command
F'

F"
®
Supplementary station of a fire command F'"

Primary station of a battery B'

Secondary station of a battery B"

Supplementary station of a battery B"'
[53
Emergency station

Primary station of
of

a mine
a battery

command
E
M'
©
Secondary station of a mine com m and M"

Supplementary station of a mine command. . M"'

Double primary station of a mine command.. M'-M'

Double secondary station of a mine command M"-M" M"|-M"

I I

Separate observing room O

Separate plotting room

Battery commander's station

P

B.C.
®
Meteorological station Met.
\u\

Tide station T

Searchlight S

Post telephone switchboard P. S. B.

Signal station ss

Wireless station ws
20 DEFINITIONS.

117. Tiring interval. —The interval of time between con-

secutive shots from the same gun or mortar in continuous
firing.
118. Fixed light.— A
searchlight used to Iceep the outer
limit of the battle area illuminated.
119. Forcing cone. —
The part of the bore immediately in
front of the centering slope. It is formed by cutting away
the lands so as to decrease their height uniformly from front
to rear.
120. From battery. —
The position of a gun when withdrawn
from its firing position.
121. Gallery. —
Any passageway covered overhead and at the
sides.
122. —
Gas check. The essential mechanical features of an
obturator which enable it to prevent the escape of gas.
123. General defense plan. —
Scheme of defense formulated
prior to an attack. A variety of these plans, based on the
character of attack to be expected, should be prepared and
issued to the command.
124. Groove. —
See Eifling.
125. Gun commander. —
A noncommissioned officer who com-
mands a gun section. The rated gun commanders authorized
by law when assigned in command of mortar pits are called
"pit commanders;" of ammunition sections, "chiefs of ammu-
nition service."
126. Gun company. —A
company assigned to the service of
direct-fire guns only.
127. Gun differences. —
Differences in range and azimuth
to the target from the gun and from the directing point, due
to gun displacement.
128. Gun displacement. —
The displacement of the pintle cen-
ter of the gun.
129. Gun platform. —
That part of the battery upon which
the gun carriage rests.
130. Gun pointer. —
The member of a gun section who con-
trols the aiming of a gun or laying it in azimuth (Case III),
or the chief of a mortar detachment who supervises the load-
ing and laying of a mortar.
131. Hoist room. —
The room in the battery containing the
receiving table of the ammunition hoist.
132. Hoop. —
A cylindrical forging superposed upon the
jacket or other hooiis.
133. Identification of a target. —
The act or process of recog-
nizing a target which has been designated.
134. Illuminating light. —
A searchlight whose primary func-
tion is to follow a target that has been assigned to a Are
command.
135. In battery. —The position of a gun when ready for
firing.
In commission.— The term to indicate those batteries
136.
to which personnel is assigned.
137. Indication of a target. —
Any method employed to
designate a target.
 DEFINITIONS. 21

138. In service. —The term to indicate those batteries to

which personnel is assigned and at which dally drillsare held.
139. Interior crest. —The line of intersection of the interior
slope with the superior slope. If there be no Interior slope,
it isthe line of intersection of the interior wall and superior
slope.
140. Interior slope. —
The inner slope of a parapet connecting
the interior wall and superior slope.
141. Interior wall. —
The inner parapet wall.
142. Jacket.—A cylindrical forging, generally extending
from the breech of a cannon to a plane beyond the trunnions.
143. Jump, angle of. —
The angle between the line of de-
parture and the axis of the bore when the piece is pointed.
In determining the sight or quadrant elevation to be used, this
angle must be applied as a correction to the angle of departure
given In the range table this correction differs for different
;

guns, carriages, and ranges, and may be determined by

experiment.
144. lands. —See Rifling.
145. Land front. —
Those portions of the defenses which are
provided to repel an attack from the land area in rear of or
on the flank of permanent seacoast works.
146. laying. —Pointing the gun without the use of a sight.
(See Pointing.)
147. Line of departure. —
The direction of axis of the bore
when the projectile leaves the muzzle.
148. Line of direction. —
The line from the gun to the center
of the target at the instant the shot strikes.
149. Line of impact. —
The line tangent to the trajectory at
the point of impact.
150. Line of shot. —
The line from the gun to the point of
impact.
151. Line of sight. —
The straight line passing through the
sights of the piece; at the instant of firing this line passes
through the target.
152. Loading platform. —
That surface upon which the can-
noneers stand while loading the piece.
153. Loading position. —
^At gun batteries; breech closed, can-
noneers at posts for inspection, projectile and powder charges
on truck near delivery table.
At mortar batteries mortars horizontal, breech closed,
;

cannoneers, except Xo. 6, at posts for inspection, projectiles on

trucks about 10 feet in rear of mortars, powder at entrance
to pit. No. 6 is at the entrance to the powder magazine.
154. Loading tray. —A
device used to protect the breech re-
cess while loading.
155. Location of a target. —
The determination of its range
and azimuth from some given point.
Having the location of a target from one point, the process
by which its range and azimuth from some other point are
determined without further observation is called " relocation."
156. Machine guns. —
Guns of one or more barrels using
fixed ammunition and provided with mechanism for continu-
 —

22 DEFINITIONS.

ous loading and firing. The mechanism may be operated by

man power or by the force of recoil.
Guns in which the force of recoil is used to operate the
breech block are termed " semi-automatic." When this force
is used also to load and fire the guns, they are termed
" automatic."
157. Magazines. — Rooms for the storage of powder, primers,
fuses, etc.
158. Manning party. —
The personnel assigned to the service
of any specific element of the defense.
159. Manning table. —A
list of the names of those who con-
stitute a manning party, with the particular post to which
each is assigned.
160. Meteorological message. —
The message sent to fire com-
manders by a meteorological observer. It includes the barom-
eter and thermometer readings, the atmosphere reference
number, and the velocity and azimuth of the wind.
161. Mine (submarine). —
A case containing a charge of ex-
plosive and appliances for firing it, to be fixed in position
beneath the surface of the water.
162. Mine company. —
Company assigned to the service of
submarine mines.
163. Mine field.— Area of water in which submarine mines
are planted.
164. Mortar company. —
^A company assigned to the service
of mortars.
165. Muzzle.— The front end of a cannon.
166. Muzzle velocity. —
The velocity of the projectile as it
leaves the muzzle.
167. Observer. — A member of the fire-control section who is
in charge of and uses an observing Instrument.
168. Observing interval. —
The time in seconds between two
consecutive observations on a target.
169. Observing station. —
A position constructed in a favor-
able place for observing the field of fire.
170. Obturator. — Any device for preventing the escape of
gas. Obturation is the process of preventing the escape of gas.
171. Occult.— To shut ofi! the beam of a searchlight.
172. Orders of fire.
First. Unrestricted fire. —
When the only limitation im-
posed by the fire commander upon the action of a
battery is the assignment of a target the fire is
said to be unrestricted. This is the normal fire
action of a battery.
—
Second. Restricted fire. When the range at which to
fire, the number of shots, the firiiif; interval, or any
other limitation except as to target, is imposed
upon the action of a battery, the fire is said to be
restricted.
In unrestricted fire, and also in restricted flre when the rate
is not specified, the fire should be as rapid as possible.
173. Orientation. —The process of adjusting an instrument,
gun, or mortar in azimuth.
 — —

DEFINITIONS. 23

174. Orientation table. —

^A table showing tlie azimuths and
distances of various points in the harbor.
175. Parados. —
A structure in rear of a battery for protec-
tion against fire from the rear. It may have interior, superior,
and exterior slopes.
176. Parade slope. —
The rear slope or wall of an emplace-
ment.
177. Parapet. —
That part of a battery which gives protection
to the armament and personnel from front fire.
178. Pit. —
That part of a mortar emplacement designed for
mounting one or more mortars, usually four.
179. Pit commander. —A
noncommissioned officer (gun com-
mander) in charge of a mortar pit.
180. Plane of departure. —
The vertical plane containing the
line of departure.
181. Plane of direction. —
The vertical plane containing the
line of direction.
182. Plane of sight. —The vertical plane containing the line
of sight.
183. Plotter. —A
member of the fire-control section in charge
of the plotting.
184. Plotting board. —A board for the purpose of plotting
the track of a ship and, in connection with range and deflection
boards, determining the corrected data for firing. (See para-
graphs 782 to 791, inclusive.)
185. Plotting room. —
^A room in which the plotting detach-
ment works.
186. Pointing. —
The operation of giving the direction and
elevation necessary to hit the target. When the sight is
used it is called " aiming ;" when the sight is not used, it is
called " laying."
There are three cases of pointing
Case I. When direction and elevation are both given by
the sight.
Case When direction is given by the sight, and eleva-
II.
by the range scale on the carriage.
tion
Case III. When direction is given liy the azimuth scale
and elevation by quadrant or by the range scale on the
carriage.
187. Point of fall. —
^The point where the trajectory pierces
the horizontal plane through the muzzle of the gun.
188. Point of impact. — The point where the shot strikes.
189. Position fi.nder. — An instrument for locating a target.
The position finding system used, in our service includes
(1) The horizontal base system, which employs azimuth
reading instruments in stations at the ends of a
base line, and a plotting board.
(2) The D. P. F. system, which employs a depression
position finder and a plotting board.
(3) The emergency system, which ordinarily employs a
self-contained instrument located at the battery,
with or without a plotting board.
24 DEFINITIONS.

190. Powder chamber. —

The portion of the bore for the re-
ception of the powder charge. It is composed of the main
chamber and a conical part (the centering slope), which unites
the chamber with the forcing cone. The centering slope serves
to bring the axis of the projectile to the axis of the bore.
191. Powder chute. —
^An Inclined shaft for returning car-
tridges or dummies to the magazine.
192. Powder hoist. —
A device for raising powder to the
loading platform.
193. Powder hoist well. —
The shaft through which the pow-
der hoist operates.
194. Predicted point. —
The point located on the plotting
board at which it is estimated a target will arrive at the end
of an assumed interval of time. This interval of time is
called the " predicting interval."
195. Predicted time. —
The time at which a target should
reach the predicted point.
196. Predicter. —
An accessory of the mortar plotting board
used to locate the position of the predicted and set-forward
points.
197. Primary station. —
See base end station.
198. Primer. —
^A small tube containing materials which are
ignited readily by friction, by percussion, or by an electric
current. It is used to ignite the powder charge.
199. Priming charges. —
Small charges of black powder in
the ends of powder sections necessary for the ignition of
smokeless powder.
200. Quadrant. ^An— instrument for giving quadrant ele-
vation.
201. Quadrant elevation. —The angle between the horizontal
and the axis of the bore when the piece is pointed.
202. Ramp. —
An inclined plane serving as a means of com-
munication from one level to another.
203. Range. — In
a limited sense, the horizontal distance
from the gun to the target. In a general sense it is applied
to horizontal distances between position iinder and target,
position finder and splash, gun and splash, etc.
The range of a shot is the horizontal distance from the
center of the gun to the point where the projectile first strikes.
204. Range-azimuth table. —A
table of ranges and the cor-
responding azimuths from a gun to points in the center of the
main ship channel or channels. It is kept at the gun and
used for firing without the use of range-finding apparatus.
205. Range board. —
A device for determining the range cor-
rections which must be made for wind, atmosphere" tide,
velocity, and travel of target during the observing interval
and time of flight. (For nomenclature, adjustment, and use,
see paragraphs 797 to 815, inclusive.)
206. Range difference. —
The difference in range of a point
—
from any other two points as the difference between the
ranges of a target from two guns of a battery.
207. Range finder. —
Au instrument for determining ranges.
 DEFINITIONS. 25

208. Range —The member of the fire-control section

keeper.
who operates a time-range board.
209. Range —The
officer. in immediate charge of
officer all
or a part of the flre-control section.
210. Range —The member of the gun section who
setter.
lays the gun for range.
211. Rapid-fire gun. — single-barrel breech-loading gun
^A
provided with breech mechanism, mounting, and facilities for
loading, aiming, and firing with great rapidity. The breech
mechanism is operated by a single motion of the handle or
lever. The smaller calibers use fixed ammunition.
212. Ready. —
At gun batteries, a signal given to indicate
to the gun pointer that the piece is ready to be fired. At
mortar batteries, a signal given to the battery commander
that the mortars are ready to be fired.
213. Rear slope. —
The slope to the parade in rear of the
battery.
214. Receiving table. —
The hoist table on which ammunition
is placed preparatory to raising.
215. Recoil. —
The backward movement of the gun on firing.
Counter recoil is the return of the gun in battery.
216. Recoil cylinder. —
The hydraulic cylinder for controlling
the recoil.
217. Reference number. —
An arbitrary number used to avoid
" plus " and " minus," " right " and " left " in data for firing.
218. Relay. —
The command given when mortars are not to
be fired as laid, but are to be fired on the next data furnished.
219. Reserve table. —A
table In a sheltered position for re-
serve ammunition.
220. Restricted fire. —
See orders of fire.
221. Rifling. —
Helical grooves cut in the surface of the bore
for the purpose of giving a rotary motion to the projectile.
The rib of metal between two adjacent grooves is called a
" land."
222. Rimbases. —
The masses of metal uniting the trunnions
with the trunnion band.
223. Round. —
One shot from each piece of a battery.
224. Roving light. —
A searchlight, the primary function of
which Is the detection of vessels in or approaching the battle
area.
225. Salvo. —
A round fired simultaneously from a mortar pit
or battery, or from a gun battery.
226. Salvo point. —
A selected point at which fire is to be
concentrated.
227. Salvo table. —
A table giving ranges and azimuths of
salvo points.
228. Searchlight area. —
The area of land or water illumi-
nated by a searchlight.
229. Searchlight range. —
The maximum distance at which a
target can be illuminated sufiieiently for range finding and
identification purposes.
230. Secondary station. —
See base end station.
26 DEFINITIONS.

231. Serving table.— A table for keeping a supply of project-

iles convenient to the breech during loading. It is usually
mounted on wheels.
232. Set-forward point.—A point on the course of a target in
advance of the predicted point, located by laying ofC from the
predicted point a distance equal to the travel of the target in
the time of flight.
233. Shell room.— ^A room for the storage of projectiles.
—
234. Shell tracer. An attachment to the projectile enabling
its flight to be followed. Both day and night tracers may be
used.
235. Shot gallery.—A gallery for the storage of projectiles.
236. Shot hoist. —A device for raising projectiles from the
lioistroom to the loading or truck platform.
237. Shot hoist well. — The shaft through which the project-
ilehoist operates.
238. Sight. —An instrument by which the gun pointer gives
the gun the proper direction for firing. Sights are of two
classes, open and telescopic the former consists of two points
;

which are brought into line with the target by the unaided
eye; the latter uses the magnifying power of the telescope
and is the standard sight. (See paragraph 821.)
239. Sight elevation. — The angle between the line of sight
and the axis of the bore when the piece is pointed.
240. Striking angle. — The angle which the line of impact
makes with the horizontal plane. It is equal to the angular
depression of the point of impact plus the angle between the
line of impact and the line of shot.
241. Striking velocity. —The velocity of the projectile at the
point of impact.
242. Superior slope. —The top slope of a parapet or traverse.
243. Supplementary station. —
See base end station.
244. Swell of the muzzle. — The enlargement of the exterior
of the gun at the muzzle.
245. Tactical command. —Command at drill and during ac-
tion.
246. Tactical responsibility. —
Responsibility for all matters
affecting the efficiency of a tactical command.
247. Targ. —The piece of metal used to indicate the intersec-
tion of the arms on the plotting board.
248. —
Target. The object at which guris or mortars are
'

pointed.
249. Telescopic sight.— See paragraph 821.
250. Throttling bar. — A bar in the recoil cylinder to regu-
late the size of the orifice through which the oil escapes from
one side of the piston head to the other.
251. T-I bell. — A bell to indicate the observing interval.
252. Time-range board. — A board to show range at any in-
stant. It is placed on the emplacement wall and operated on
data from the plotting room.
253. Tracking. — The processes by which successive positions
of a moving target are plotted on a chart. It includes the
 )

DEFINITIONS. 27

observations by the observers at the position-finding instru-

ments, plotting the results of these observations on the plot-
ting board, and tracing thereon the plotted track of the target.

<
Q_

254. Trajectory.— The curve described by the center of grav-

ity of the projectile in passing from the muzzle of the gun to
the point of impact. ( See fig. 1.
—
255. Travel of projectile. The distance from the base of the
projectile in its seat to the muzzle of the gun.
28 DEFINITIONS.

256. .Travel of target. —

The distance passed over by the tar-
get in the time of flight. It is also used to express the dis-
tance passed over by the target in an observing interval.
257. Traverse. —
The structure protecting the armament and
personnel from flank fire.
258. Traversing indicator. —
^A device used by gun pointers
to control the traversing of a gun without command.
259. Trial shots. —
Shots flred before practice or action to
—
determine for guns, the muzzle velocity to be used; for
mortars, the range and deflection corrections to be applied.
260. Trolley. —Amechanical device for transporting pro-
jectiles on horizontally suspended tracks.
261. Truck platform. —
If the ammunition trucks run on a
different surface from that of the loading platform, this sur-
face is called the " truck platform,"
262. Truck recess. —
The spaces in the parapet wall for the
storage of ammunition trucks.
263. Trunnions. —The cylinders which rest in bearing sur-
faces of the carriage called " trunnion beds." Their axis is
perpendicular to the axis of the bore and ordinarily in the
same plane they connect the gun with the carriage and trans-
;

mit the force of recoil from one to the other. The faces of
the trunnions are the end planes perpendicular to their axis.
264. Trunnion band. —
The hoop of which the trunnions form
a part.
265. Tube. —The inner portion of a built-up gun extending
usually from the breech to the muzzle.
266. Twist of rifling. —
The inclination of the grooves to the
axis of the gun at any point. When this inclination is con-
stant the twist is uniform when it increases from the breech
;

to the muzzle it is increasing. Twist is generally expressed

in turns per caliber, e. g., one turn in 40 calibers, meaning that
the projectile makes one complete revolution in passing over a
length of bore equal to 40 calibers.
267. Unrestricted Are. —
See Orders of fire.
268. Vent. —
A small channel leading from the exterior to
the powder chamber for ignition of the powder charge.
269. Water front. —
That portion of the defenses bearing
upon the navigable water areas that may be open to an enemy.
270. Wind component indicator. —
^A device for determining
the reference numbers corresponding to the transverse and
longitudinal components of the wind. ( See paragraphs 824 to

828, inclusive.)
271. Zone. —In mortar firing, the area in which projectiles
fall for a given chiirge of powder, when the elevation is varied
between the minimum and maximum.
It is also used with reference to other portions of the de-
fensive area, as " outer defense zone," " inner defense zone,"
etc.
 Bfittle commander.

Searchlight Oommimii'iition
nthcer. officer.

Fire commander (guns). Fire commander (gnni) Kire commander (mortars). Mine (.-ommander.

Communication ComiuuniCBition t'ommunication

officer. officer, i
officer.

Assistant ("oniniuiiicttlion liattery roinnmndcr. Mine

Battery commander. Battery commander. Battery commander. Battery cAmmauder. Battery commander. Batterv commander. mini' conimander. officer. field
otlicer.

Range Kmplacement Range Kmplaceraent RHUge Kmplacement Range Kinplaceuient As-sistant, liangi' KiiiiiUu-emi'iit l':mpla(-'ement Assistunt Range Kmplarement Kmplacement Range Kmplacement
officer. officer. officer. officer. officer. officer. officer. <iffiot'r. hattery commander, offict-r. ottii*er. officer. battery commander, officer. (tfficer. officer. officer. officer.

82615—09. (To face page 29.)

 —

Chapter III.

ORGANIZATION.
272. The coast artillery tactical commands require manning
parties for
Battle commanders' stations.
Fire and mine commanders' stations.
Battery commanders' stations.
Observing stations.
Plotting rooms.
Jlining casemates.
Loading rooms.
Mine planters.
Searchlight stations.
Power stations.
Signal stations.
Meteorological stations.
Tide stations.
Emplacements.
These parties are furnished by the coast artillery personnel
(officers, noncommissioned staff officers, and enlisted members
of the companies).
273. The officers necessary for a typical battle command
and their relations to each other are shown by the diagram.
274. The assignment of field officers as battle commanders,
Are commanders, and mine commanders, and of staff officers
or other officers as searchlight officers and communication
officers is made by the district commander.
275. Officers other than
staff officers shall not be detailed as
communication such details will reduce the number
officers if
of officers present with a battery to less than that required by
its manning table. If no officer is available, a suitable non-
commissioned officer may be designated to act as communica-
tion officer.
276. In case no field officer is available for assignment as
fireor mine commander the senior officer of the organizations
assigned to that fire or mine command acts as fire or mine
commander.
277. The senior officer of the organization or organizations
assigned to a battery is the battery commander.
29
 ——— :

30 ORGANIZATION.

278. The district commander assigns companies to particu-

lar batteries in accordance witli tlie assignment to calibers by
tlie T\'ar Department.
279. Jline commanders assign tbe oiBcers of the companies
of the mine command in accordance with their special fitness.
280. Battery commanders assign the officers of their bat-
teries in accordance with their special fitness.
281. In the case of target practice or other work by battery
required to be under the supervision of a fire or mine com-
mander, some officer other than the battery commander, pref-
erably the post commander or other field officer, should per-
form the function of fire or mine commander in the particular
case.
282. When two or more companies are assigned to one bat-
tery, officers not designated as range or emplacement officers,
or detailed for duty In battle or fire commanders' stations,
may be put in charge of emergency stations, ammunition serv-
ice, or distant observing stations, as may be considered most
advantageous by the battery commander.
In general, the officer next junior to the battery commander
should be assigned to a station or duty which will permit of
his succeeding to command without delay or confusion. When
the plotting room is adjacent to the B. C. station, the battery
commander may assign both lieutenants as emplacement
officers.
283. The enlisted personnel of companies is divided into
sections, detachments, and details, as follows
A gun company into
Fire-control section, gun sections, ammunition section,
and reserve section.
Fire-control section into observing detachment and plot-
ting detachment. Observing detachment into details
for the various observing stations and plotting de-
;

tachment into plotting board detail, computing detail,

and communication detail.
Gun section into gun details for the seri-ice of the piece.
Ammunition section into projectile and powder details.
A mortar company Into
Fire-control section, pit sections, ammunition sections,
and I'eserve section.
Fire-control section into observing detachment and plot-
ting detachment. Observing detachment into details
for the various observing stations; plotting detach-
ment into plotting board detail, computing detail,
and communication detail.
Pit section into mortar detachments (normally four).
Mortar detachment into various details for service of
the piece.
Ammunition section into projectile and powder details.
A mine company into
Fire-control and power section, planting and loading
section, gun sections, ammunition section, and reserve
section.
 — ———— ——

OEGAXIZATIOX. 31

A —
mine company into Continued.
Fire-control and power section into observing detach-
ment, plotting detachment, and power detachment.
Observing detachment Into details for the various ob-
serving stations; plotting detachment into plotting
board detail and communication detail power de-
;

tachment into casemate detail and searchlight detail.

Planting and loading section into planting detachments
and loading detachments. Planting detachments into
planter details and small boat details. Loading de-
tachment into loading-room detail, explosive detail,
and cable detail.
Gun gun details for the service of the
sections into
pieces. Ammunition section into projectile and pow-
der details.
284. Certain men may be assigned to planting and loading
sections and also to gun sections, as, in general, the service of
the latter will not take place simultaneously with that of the
former.
285. The senior noncommissioned officer of each section, de-
tachment, and detail is its chief. Each chief commands his
own subdivision whenever it acts separately and is responsible
for its drill, its efflcieney, and the condition of the material to
which it is assigned.
286. A
permanent manning table of the forces for the arma-
ment and its accessories shall be made out as follows and
always kept up to date:
In each artillery district
(a) For the signal stations.
(6) For the district boats.
In each post
(o) For the meteorological station.
•
(&) For the tide station.
In each battle command
(a) For the battle commander's station.
(6) For the searchlights of the battle command.
In each fire command
(a) For the fire commander's station.
(6) For the power stations.
(c) For the illuminating lights of the fire command.
In each mine command
(a) For the flre-control stations.
(6) For the power, casemate, and searchlight stations.
In each company assigned to a gun battery
(a) For the fire-control stations.
(6) For each gun.
(c) For the ammunition section.
((?) For the reserve section.
In each company assigned to a mortar battery
(o) For the flre-control stations.
(6) For each pit.
(c) For each ammunition section.
(d) For the reserve section.
 —

32 ORGANIZATION.

In each company assigned to the mine defense

(o) For tlie flre-control and power stations.
(6) For the planting and loading section,
(c) For the rapid-fire guns.
id) For the reserve section.
287. On request of battle and fire commanders the enlisted
members of manning parties for battle and Are commanders'
stations are detailed from post headquarters.
288. In obedience to instructions from the mine commander,
the enlisted members of the manning parties for mine com-
mand stations are assigned by commanders of the companies
assigned to the mine defense.
289. Company commanders must keep two men trained for
each position for which they furnish details in the manning
party of the battle and fire commanders' stations and two men
for each position in the fire-control section of the battery.
290. Commanders of mine companies must keep two men
trained for each position for which they furnish details In the
fire-control and power sections.
291. Members of companies assigned to manning parties for
battle, fire, and mine commanders' stations are carried on
company manning tables in the sections to which their duties
pertain.
292. Rated enlisted men of a mine command or a battery
are appointed from duly qualified candidates by the district
commander upon recommendation of company commanders
approved by the mine or battery commander.
293. Rated enlisted men for battle or fire command stations
are appointed from duly qualified candidates by the district
commander on recommendation of the battle or fire com-
mander.
 Chapter IV.

MARCHING MANETTVEKS.
TO FOBS! THE COMPANY.

—
294. For artillery drill. Tlie company commander or officer
designated by him supervises the formation and the other offi-
cers proceed directly to their stations.
295. The company is formed by sections in two ranks facing
to the front the sections are arranged from right to left in the
;

order named in paragraph 283. At the sound of the assembly

the first sergeant takes post about 6 paces in front of the posi-
tion at which the center of the company is to rest, faces it,
and commands FALL IN. At the command FALL IN the
chiefs of section take post facing the company, 3 paces from
and opposite the center of the space to be occupied by their
sections, and supervise the formation.
296. The sections fall in in two ranks with interviils of 2
paces between sections and 4 inches between files in each
section. The distance between ranks is 40 inches; the dis-
tance from the rear rank to the line of file closers is 2 paces.
Detachments and details form from right to left in the order
named in paragraph 283 and in the drill for each piece. Each
chief of detachment or detail, if the section is not divided
into detachments, indicates the position for the right of his
detachment or detail and falls in on the right of the first
front rank file of the detachment or detail ; the unnum-
bered members fall in on his left in the front and rear
ranks and the numbered members on their left, odd numbers
in the rear rank. Mechanics and musicians take post in the
line of file closers behind the sections to which they are as-
signed in the manning table, at the command FALL IN. When
practicable, mechanics may be sent to the emplacements before
the company is formed.
297. When the company has formed the first sergeant com-
mands CALL EOLLS. The chiefs of section call the rolls and
face about. The first sergeant then commands REPORT. Each
chief of section salutes, reports " section present" (or
names of unauthorized absentees) and takes his place in the
line of file closers opposite the center of his section and 2
paces in rear of it. The first sergeant does not return the
salutes of the chiefs of section.
298. After receiving the reports of the chiefs of section the
first sergeant faces about, salutes, and reports to the company
commander, who will have taken his place 12 paces in front
of the center of the company while it is forming. The com-
2*^
82615—09 3
34 MARCHING MANEUVERS.

pany commander salutes and directs the first sergeant to take

his post or to replace unauthorized absentees by members
from the reserve section. After replacing the absentees the
first sergeant takes his post in the line of file closers, 2 paces
in rear of the second file from the right of the right section,
and the company commander directs any subdivisions whose
stations are at a distance from that of the main part of the
company to proceed directly to their stations under the com-
mand of their chiefs. Then he marches the remainder of
the company to its station (gun battery, mortar battery, or
mine- work station). The chief of the right detachment is the
right guide; vi^hen moving by the left flank the noncommis-
sioned officer in the file closers nearest to the flank acts as
guide, taking post in front of the front-rank men of the left file
of the left section as soon as the company is faced to the left.
If the formation is under arms, the files fall in with the pieces
at " Order." The chiefs of section salute and report with
their pieces at " Order " and move to their posts with their
pieces at " Trail," coming to " Order " upon halting.
299. The first sergeant takes his place and receives the re-
ports with his piece at " Order " he then conies to " Right
;

shoulder," commands PORT ARMS, OPEN CHAMBER, CLOSE

CHAMBER, ORDER ARMS, faces about, salutes, and reports to
the company commander. The company commander salutes
and gives the first sergeant Instructions or directs him to take
his post. The first sergeant proceeds to his post at " Right
shoulder," and on halting comes to " Order."
The company commander draws saber after his instructions
to the first sergeant.
300. Officers do not wear their side arms to formation unless
enlisted men form under arms.
—
301. For roll calls. The formation is as prescribed in para-
graphs 295 to 298, Inclusive, except that the company com-
mander takes post facing the front 3 paces in front "of the
center of the company after the report of the first sergeant,
who takes post in the line of file closers in rear of the second
file of the right section. If no officer is present at the roll
call, the first sergeant takes post 2 paces to the right of the
right section. Any oflicers present at the formation in addi-
tion to the company commander take post, as soon as the first
sergeant reports, in rear of the sections to which assigned in
the manning table and on the right of the chiefs of section.
302. Prior to each roll call the first sergeant posts the names
of authorized absentees, and for drill the names of the substi-
tutes from the reserve section the substitutes fall in with the
;

sections to which assigned temporarily. The chiefs of section

prepare their rolls in conformity with the information posted.
303. For infantry maneuvers.— The formation is as pre-
scribed in paragraph 295, except that the company commander
directs the first sergeant, when the latter reports, to form as
infantry, whereupon the first sergeant faces about and com-
 MARCHING MANEUVERS. 35

mands AS INFANTRY, FORK. At the second command the

company forms as prescribed in Infantry Drill Regulations,
except that squad leaders do not report and that sergeants and
corporals may be placed as Nos. 1 and 4 of the front rank
when the reduced strength of the company makes it advisable.
As soon as the company is formed properly the first sergeant
faces about, salutes, and reports to the company commander,
" Sir, the company is formed." The company commander
returns the salute and the first sergeant takes post. The com-
pany commander draws saber, if under arms, and takes his
post facing to the front 3 paces in front of the center of the
company.
304. For all marching maneuvers other than marching to the
battery, Infantry Drill Kegulations shall be followed.

TO MAECH TO THE BATTERY.

305. The oflScer in charge of the formation marches the com-
pany by the flank and takes his post by the leading guide.
Unless the distance to be marched is short he commands TAKE
DISTANCE, MARCH. The leading file continues the march,
the others mark time, and each resumes the full step when it
has a distance of 40 inches.
306. To close to facing distance, the command is CLOSE,
UARCH. At this command the leading file marks time, the
others close successively to facing distance, and resume the
march, or halt, at the commands FULL STEP, MARCH, or
COMPANY, HALT. The commands for taking distance and
closingwhen the company Is at a halt are the same as above
and executed in the same way.

TO POST THE SECTIONS.

307. When arriving near the battery or mine work station

the officer In charge commands SECTIONS, POSTS, falls out,
supervises the posting of the sections, and takes his station.
Bach chief of section marches his section to a point near its
station, halts it, and commands DETAILS, POSTS. The mem-
bers of the detachments and details fall out, obtain any imple-
ments and equipments which must be taken from the store-
room, and take their posts.
308. Each chief of section determines whether or not all
apparatus and material to be served by his section is in order,
and reports to the officer directly over him, " Sir, in
order," or reports any defects he is unable to remedy without
delay. As soon as the chiefs of section have reported, the offi-
cers report to the battery commander, who then reports to the
fire commander's station, " Battery in order," or reports
defects he is unable to remedy without delay.
309. After all batteries of a fire command have reported the
fire commander reports to the battle commander.
36 MARCHIDSTG MANEUVERS.

310. Members of the manning parties for fire and battle-

command stations report individually at their stations. After
the range officers of the mine command have reported to the
mine commander the latter reports to the battle commander.
311. A battle smaller command may be manned
command or a
by sounding call to arms. In this case each member of the
command proceeds as rapidly as possible directly to his post.
312. To dismiss the battle, fire, or mine command, the com-
mander commands CLOSE STATION. His station, if manned,
is closed. The order is transmitted to the lower units. The
battery commanders command BATTERY SISMISSED; range
officers command CLOSE STATION; emplacement officers com-
mand DISMISSES; officers see that everything for which they
are responsible is in order. All stations are closed, equip-
ments replaced, the company formed under supervision of an
officer, and marched by him to the company parade and
dismissed.
313. Subdivisions from remote stations are marched to the
company parade and dismissed by their chiefs.
 —

Chapteb v.

THE BATTERY— BENERAL DUTIES.

314. The battery commander keeps a record of the daily
attendance at artillery drill and instruction, with names of
absentees, reasons, and authority for such absence.
315. The battery commander is responsible
First. That the personnel of his battery is efficient in
drill, in practice, and in action.
Second. That the equipment and fire-control installa-
tion provided for his battery are in serviceable con-
dition and that no permanent modifications are
made therein without proper authority.
Third. That the officers and men of his battery are
instructed In the care, preservation, and use of
artillery material as prescribed in these regula-
tions and in orders.
Fourth. That the records are kept as prescribed in
these regulations and in orders.
Fifth. That the prescribed reports are rendered.
The battery commander shall make every effort to keep his
battery supplied with the proper equipment, implements, and
reserve ammunition.
316. The battery commander is authorized to modify the
manual of the piece as prescribed in these regulations to such
extent as may seem to him advantageous, provided that the
officers and men are first well instructed in the prescribed
drill, and provided that the precautions for safety, paragraphs
647 to 658, inclusive, paragraphs 684, 685, and 687, and para-
graphs 693 to 695, inclusive, shall be strictly adhered to at all
times. He is authorized to make temporary modifications or
changes in the fire-control installation as may seem to him
advantageous, provided that such modifications or changes do
not prohibit the prompt return of the installation to its
original condition. Permanent changes in the provisional
installations may be made upon the approval of the district
commander, who shall report such changes to the War De-
partment. Permanent changes in the standard installation
shall be made only upon authority of the War Department.
The battery commander is encouraged to improvise devices
and methods which in his opinion will simplify the fire-control
system or increase the efiiciency of his command, and with the
approval of the district commander is authorized to test such
devices or methods at target practice. When the result is
favorable to the device or method, the test shall be made the
37
38 THE BATTERY —GENERAL DUTIES.
subject of a detailed report, accompanied by drawings and
models of any device used. The assistance of the ijroper staff
officers of the post or district should, upon application, be
given to battery commanders for the purpose of making tem-
porary changes in fire-control installations or in constructing
simple devices in accordance with their ideas, provided that
no unauthorized expenditure of funds be involved. This para-
graph shall not be taken as authority for increasing the load
upon any fortification plant without authority of the War
Department.
317. The period of indoor instruction is utilized for the in-
struction of gunner candidates, but this should not be per-
mitted to interfere with keeping plotting-room details and
telephone operators in practice. The duty of keeping the
members of plotting-room details for fire and battle com-
manders' stations in practice during the period of indoor in-
struction devolves upon battery commanders.
318. Battery commanders make a complete inspection of
their batteries weekly, weather permitting. This inspection
includes a test of the fire-control system, using a moving target
for vessel tracking when practicable.
319. In battle command or fire command drill or action
the battery commander's exercise of fire-control is limited by
orders which come to him from higher commanders. When
BATTERY COMMANDER'S ACTION is ordered he exercises
Independent fire-control and fights his battery in accordance
with his own judgment.
320. In case of emergency battery commanders act without
waiting for orders.
321. The battery commander goes wherever his presence is
necessary, but upon quitting his station he leaves instructions
as to where he may be found.
322. Prior to drill, practice, or action the battery commander
receives the reports of the emplacement officers and the range
officer and reports to the fire commander, " Battery in
order," or reports defects he is unable to remedy without delay.
323. In case of breakdown of the lines of communication
from either of the base-end stations the battery commander
gives orders for the use of the other as a secondary with the
B. C. station as a primary, his observer operating the B. C.
instrument; in case of the loss of communication with both
stations he gives orders for the emergency system to be used,
transferring his station to the emergency station if necessary.
324. The emplacement officer is in charge of one or more em-
placements. He is responsible to the battery commander for
the condition of the emplacement material and for the effi-
ciency of its service.
Before drill, practice, or action he makes a careful inspec-
tion of the material under his charge.
Having completed the inspection and having received the
reports of the chiefs of section, he reports to the battery com-
mander, "Sir, No. (or Pit ) in order," or reports
defects he is unable to remedy without delay.
 THE BATTERY —GENERAL DUTIES. 39

At the conclusion of the exercises for the day he commands

DISMISSES, inspects the emplacement, and reports to the bat-
tery commander.
325. The range officer is in charge of the fire-control service
of the battery and his station is at the battery plotting room.
He is responsible to the battery commander for the condition of
the flre-control material and for the efiBciency of its service.
Before drill, practice, or action he makes a careful inspec-
tion of the equipment of his station, verifying the adjustments
of the plotting board and of other apparatus.
Having completed the inspection and having received the re-
ports of the chiefs of detail, he reports to the battery com-
mander, " Sir, fire-control stations in order," or reports defects
he is unable to remedy without delay.
At the conclusion of the exercises for the day he directs that
the stations be closed. Inspects his station, and reports to the
battery commander, handing him all records pertaining to the
day's work at his station.
326. Observers are selected on account of their special apti-
tude, and must understand thoroughly the use of their instru-
ments and have a knowledge of the general features of war
ships in order to be qualified for their duties. Each observer
is responsible for the care and adjustment of his instrument
and for the security and police of his station at all times, and
reports to the range officer deficiencies, defects, or accidental
damages as soon as they are known. With the type installa-
tion, 1909,each observer at the base end stations wears a head
receiver and breast transmitter bridged on a line (observer's
line) to the B. C. station, for the purpose of communicating
with this station while he is observnig.
327. In order to select observers who are to work at the
ends of the same horizontal base line, two instruments should
be set up as near together as practicable and oriented care-
fully. Theobservers, using these instruments, track a moving
target. Every fifteen seconds a bell is struck three times or
READY, TAKE called, and the readings of the t\80 instru-
ments compared.
328. The maximum distance within 12,000 yards at which
the depression position finder may be expected to give suffi-
ciently accurate ranges under favorable conditions is a dis-
tance equal to SCO yards for every 10 feet of height of the
instrument above the water. tJp to this distance the average
error of the instrument should be within three-fourths of 1
per cent of the range.
329. Arrangements should be made so that observers
may compare frequently the ranges to moving objects as de-
termined by a horizontal base, with the readings of the
D. P. F. This comparison should be made during the progress
of the observations by calling aloud both results. If the plot-
ting board is not at the primary station, the H. B. range can
be sent there by telephone.
330. At least once a month during the outdoor season
D. P. F. observers shall be tested as to their proficiency at
40 THE BATTERY —GENERAL DUTIES.
A.

ranges within ttie maximum for height of instrument as

above described. The test should be conducted so as to deter-
mine the relative ability of various observers to read quickly
and accurately ranges to fixed and moving objects.
331. Bach reader reads and transmits the azimuth or azi-
muth and range to the plotting room.
332. The plotter is responsible for the adjustment and oper-
ation of the plotting board.
333. Each member of the flre-control section on reaching
his station examines the instrument or other material to
which he is assigned, makes the prescribed tests and adjust-
ments, and reports defects, if any, to his chief of detail.
334. Each gun of a gun battery is commanded by a gun
commander and each pit of a mortar battery by a pit com-
mander, who are responsible to the emplacement officers for
the condition of the material and the efficiency of the person-
nel of their commands. They supervise the gun cleaning and
require the mechanics to keep pieces and carriages painted
and to fill the grease cups at least once each week. They
supervise the service of the guns and mortars and take sta-
tion at the most convenient places for this purpose.
335. A gun pointer is assigned to each gun and mortar in
commission and is responsible for the condition and adjust-
ment of the sight and sight standard or the quadrant. At
mortar batteries he is also responsible for the condition of the
piece, and superintends the drill of the detachment.
336. One mechanic, or acting mechanic, is assigned, under
the gun commander, to each 8-inch, 10-inch, and 12-inch gun
emplacement, to each mortar emplacement, and to each battery
of the smaller armament in commission. He is in immediate
charge of all small stores and supplies at the emplacement or
battery to which assigned.
 Chaptee VI.

SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.

GENEKAL INSTRUCTIONS.

337. The service of the piece should proceed with as few-

orders as possible, and aside from the necessary orders and
instructions no talking of any kind should be permitted.
338. The instructor should place himself where he can be
seen and heard by all. His explanations should be given with
life, in a distinct voice, the tone of which should not be
monotonous. He should train the gun commanders and gun
pointers in giving commands, which should be quick and clear,
but not louder than necessary.
339. The instructor should avoid uncommon expressions,
long explanations, and details of manufacture. He should
require each man to take the position he is to occupy at any
stage of the drill, and when necessary illustrate in detail how
every operation should be performed.
340. Endeavor should be made to interest the men in their
work and to train them on such a system that they will learn
their duties thoroughly, with as little weariness to themselves
and as quickly as possible. It is desirable to get them, from
the beginning, to drill with precision and without unnecessary
noise.
341. As soon as possible actual loading with dummy ammu-
nition and pointing the gun as for service are practiced.
342. It is not necessary to proceed in the exact order in
which the drill is written. The instructor should use discre-
tion in adopting a system by which the details of the drill can
be taught readily.
343. All changes of position of cannoneers in serving the
piece are executed at a run.
344. At the command TAKE COVER, given at any time, all
numbers not designated to remain at their posts move at a
run to some designated place under cover. As a rule this
command Is given in mortar batteries only.
345. At the command STAND FAST, the cannoneers halt until
the previous command is repeated.
When one number makes a mistake the command STAND
FAST should be given and the error pointed out.
346. Adrill primer or a fired standard primer is used always
at drill.
347. Primers are inserted while the breech is fully open.
348. Service primers are adjusted in manufacture to require
a pull of about 25 pounds to start the wire to the rear, and
about 40 to 45 pounds to pull the teeth through the com-
pressed friction pellet and explode it.

41
 : —

42 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.

349. Tile lanyard should be pulled from a position as near
the rear of the gun as possible, since pulling it from the side
will cause a variable part of the pull to be absorbed by fric-
tion in the firing leaf. A strong, quick pull ^not a jerk —
from one man, with as short a lanyard as practicable, should
be used. When a long lanyard is used, the slack causes the
force to be applied to the primer slowly, and this increases the
chances for a misfire. The quicker the pull the better for
firing the primer, but when a man attempts to pull by a jerk
he uses his arms only, losing the assistance of his body, and
the strength of his pull is less. If a primer can not be dis-
charged by one man, it should be rejected and another used.
350. Obturating primers are constructed so that when a
primer is pulled and fails to fire, the primer wire is free to
move forward without causing the composition to ignite. As
an extra precaution, however, to prevent any attempt to use
again a primer that has failed, the primer wire, immediately
after ejection, should be bent around the primer through an
angle of about 180°.
351. With guns where the mechanism permits, the lanyard
may remain hooked to the firing leaf during drill, practice, or
action.
352. Constant inspection of the safety pin on the firing leaf
of the breech mechanisms in which combination primers are
used should be made, since if the safety pin should be broken
by harsh treatment and the pull upon the lanyard be upward
by about 10° the primer probably would be ejected at the
instant of firing and might injure the cannoneer firing the
piece.
353. Signals.— The commands or signals, ELEVATE, DE-
PRESS, RIGHT, or LEFT, given in pointing, always refer to
the direction of motion of the muzzle.
—
ELEVATE. Raise either hand to the height of the head,
fingers pointing upward.
DEPRESS.—Raise either hand to the height of the head,
fingers pointing downward.
—
RIGHT or LEFT. Alotion with either hand, fingers pointing
In the desired direction.
CLAMP or HALT. —Raise either hand to a horizontal posi-
tion, fingers closed.
READY.—Raise either arm vertically to its full extent, fin-
gers extended.
Signals with whistles or bugles are authorized also.
354. The battery commander takes his place at the B. C.
station, receives the reports of the fire-control and emplace-
ment sections and conducts battery drill.
355. To load and fire. —
The battery commander indicates the
target, designates the kind of projectile to be used, and com-
mands or signals
(a) No. , Fire shots. Commence firing; or
(6) Fire rounds (or salvos), Commence firing'; or
(c) Commence firing.
 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS. 43

Commands (o), (&), or (c) may be preceded by the com-

mand NO. (or BATTERY) , LOAD, when the piece is to
be loaded but not flred, in which case disappearing guns are
held from battery until the command COMMENCE FIRING.
The command FIRE ROUNDS (or SALVOS), COM-
MENCE FIRING, or NO. FIRE
. SHOTS, COM-
MENCE FIRING, signifies that rounds (or salvos) or
shots are to be fired; after firing the prescribed number of
rounds (or salvos) or shots the details take posts (bringing
the piece to the loading position at mortar batteries), open
the breechblock, and clean the block and breech recess.
The command (c), COMMENCE FIRING, signifies that the
firing is to be taken up at once and is to be continuous when ;

a salvo or shot has been fired, the details load and fire without
further command until the command CEASE FIRING.
356. At the conclusion of drill, practice, or action, the bat-
tery commander commands BATTERY DISMISSED.

MORTAR BATTERY.
357. Each emplacement is in charge of an emplacement offi-
cer and is manned by a pit section (53 enlisted men), con-
sisting of a pit commander (a noncommissioned officer) and
four mortar detachments; and an ammunition section (ap-
proximately 31 enlisted men), consisting of a chief of ammu-
nition service (a noncommissioned ofllcer), and such noncom-
missioned officers and privates as the location of the galleries
and magazines and facilities for serving ammunition require.
Each mortar detachment consists of a gun pointer, an azimuth
setter (a noncommissioned officer or private), an elevation
setter (a noncommissioned officer or private), and 10 privates.
358. The emplacement officer receives the reports of the pit
commander and the chief of ammunition service, tests the elec-
trical firing circuit, and reports to the battery commander,
" Sir, pitA (or B) in order," or reports defects he is not able
to remedy without delay.
He sees that the orders of the battery commander are exe-
cuted, repeating them when necessary. He provides himself
with a stop watch, observes the progress of the loading, and if
it is apparent that either one or two pieces will not be laid in
time he commands NO. or NOS. AND
TAKE COVER. If it is apparent that more than two pieces
'

will not be laid in time, he commands RELAY and reports to

the battery commander. When two or more pieces are laid
and all detachments have taken cover, he closes the safety
switch and reports or signals A (or B) PIT READY to the
battery commander.
Should circumstances arise after he has reported or sig-
naled PIT READY to the battery commander that in his opin-
ion would make it unsafe to fiue, he breaks the firing circuit
(or causes lanyards to be quitted when firing by lanyard) and
reports to the battery commander.
44 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.

359. The pit commander is in cliarge of the pit, and in the

absence of the emplacement officer is in charge of the entire
emplacement, in which case he performs the duties prescribed
for the emplacement officer.
On the arrival of the section at the emplacement he com-
mands DETACHMENTS POSTS, and supervises the procuring of
implements and equipments. When detachments have taken
posts he commands EXAMINE GUN, makes a general inspec-
tion of the pit, accompanied by a mechanic with an oiler. He
receives the report of the gun pointers and reports, " Sir, pit
in order," or reports to the emplacement officer defects he
is not able to remedy without delay. He superintends the re-
moval of the old primer and the inserting of a new one or the
opening of the breech after a misfire, as prescribed in para-
graphs 650 and 651.
At the command DISMISSED of the emplacement officer he
commands SECURE PIECES, FORM SECTION. He supervises
the replacing of equipments and implements, sees that the
pieces are secured, and then forms his section on the battery
parade.
360. The gun ^pointer commands the mortar detachment and
is directly responsible for the condition of the piece and the
drill of the detachment. At the command DETACHMENTS
POSTS he marches the detachment to the piece and commands
POSTS. He supervises the procuring of implements and equip-
ments. At the command EXAMINE GUN he makes a careful
inspection of the piece and reports to the pit commander, " No
——— in order," or reports defects he is unable to remedy
without delay. He supervises the service of the piece, taking
position on the end of the rammer when the projectile is being
launched. He gives the command ELEVATE as soon as the
rotation of the block has begun, and when the piece is laid for
elevation commands CLAMP. He verifies the laying of the
piece both in azimuth and elevation, and is the last of his
detachment to take cover. If his detachment is directed to
take cover before the piece is laid, he cuts it out of the firing
circuit by opening the proper switch. He causes No. 2 to quit
the lanyard when firing by lanyard.
He observes the muzzle of his mortar when a salvo is fired,
and in case of a misfire calls out, " No. misfire."
46 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.
361. 12-inch mortar {carriage model 1896).
Details. At command POSTS.
Azimuth setter The azimuth setter takes
(noncomm iss ioned post at the traversing cranks,
officer or private). facing the mortar.
Elevation setter The elevation setter takes
(noncommissioned post at the quadrant, facing
officer or private).
Breech detail, No. 1 procures a wiper or
Nos. 1,2, and 3; No. cotton waste and a can con-
lis chief of detail. taining synovial oil and a
sponge. He places the can
convenient tol;he breech, and
takes post one yard to the
rear and right of the breech
facing it.
No. 2 procures a wiper or
cotton waste and the long lan-
yard which he coils with the
hook on top and places con-
venient to the breech. He
takes post one yard to the
rear and left of the breech,
facing it.
No. 3 procures the primer
pouch and the holder contain-
ing punch and drill. He pro-
cures the bore and chamber
sponge and places it on the
rack or prop and takes post to
the right of the breech, facing
No. 1.
At command EXAMINE
GVN.
The azimuth setter exam-
ines theazimuth index for
adjustment by observing the
mark made on the racer
when the piece was last ori-
ented, and examines and
tests the traversing mechan-
ism.
The elevation setter exam-
ines the quadrant and tests
the elevating mechanism,
assisted by No. 6.
Nos. 1 and 2 remove the
breech cover and place it at
the designated place.
No. 1 examines the breech
mechanism, breechblock,
breech recess, chamber, and
bore. If thecnamberorbore
needs sponging he calls for
the sponge and sponges, as-
sistedby Nos. 2, 3 and 4.
.
No. 2 examines the breech
recess and gas-check seat,
cleans and oils them, exam-
ines the long lanyard, and
assists in sponging.
No. 3 examines the safety
lanyard device, firing at-
tachment, vent, and short
lanyard. He clears the vent
and cleans primer seat. He
assists in sponging.
 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS. 47

361. 1^-inch mortar [carriage model 1896).

At command LOAD or COM-

MENCE FIRING.
48 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.

361. 12-inch mortar {carriage model 1896) —Continued.

Details.
 SERVICE AT THE EJIPLACEMENTS. 49

361. 12-inch mortar {carriage model 1896) —Continued.

LOAD or COM-
At command
MENCE FIRING.
50 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.
361. 12-inch mortar (carriage model 1896) —Continued.
Details. At command POSTS.
At command EXAMIK^
GFN.

Truck details, Nos. 7 and 8 bring out a Nos. 7 and 8, 9 and 10, ex-
Nos. 7, 8, 9, and 10. loaded truck and run it to a amine the trucks and clean
point about 10 feet in rear of and oil them.
the breech, No. 7 on the right
and No. 8 on the left.
Nos. 9 and 10 run an empty
truck alongside the delivery
table in tne shot gallery, No.
9 on the right and No. 10 on
the left.
 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS. 51

361. 12-inch mortar (carriage model 1896) —Continued.

At command LOAD or COM-
HEirCE FIBII7G.
 "

52 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.

Notes on the drill.

362. The posts of the detachment for inspection are as given

above.
363. At the command TAKE COVEE the detachments take
-the positions indicated in the diagram.
364. The cover post for No. 4 is the same as his regular
post, and the detachment forms on him at the command TAKE
COVER. He does not quit the rammer except at the command
UNLOAD or when directed to bring up the sponge or extractor,
in which cases he places the rammer on the rack or prop.
After replacing the sponge or extractor, he takes the rammer
again and resumes his post.
365. When powder is not served from the rear of the pit, the
cover post of No. 6 is near the entrance of the gallery from
which powder is served.
366. In taking cover, the details proceed to their posts as
rapidly as possible, but avoid interfering with those whose
duties at the piece have not been completed.
367. Detachments at posts or cover posts stand at attention
unless REST Is ordered.
368. The service of the mortar is conducted habitually as
though a salvo had just been flred (pieces elevated and de-
tachments at cover post), but in case the command COM-
MENCE FIRING or LOAD is given when the detachments are
at their posts and the pieces in the loading position. No. 6
proceeds at a run to the point designated for receipt of the
powder charge.
369. To open breech. —The mortar should be clamped in a
horizontal position. No. 1 releases the rotating crank by pull-
ing on the wing nut and then turns the rotating crank contra-
clockwise, as indicated by the " open " arrow, until the crank
brings up short in a vertical position. No. 2 turns the trans-
lating crank briskly contra-clockwise until the shoulders of
the grooves strike against the ends of the rails, when the
block stops short and the shock frees the tray latch from its
catch. If preferred, No. 1 may perform both operations.
Nos. 1 and 2 then swing the tray and block to the right until
the securing latch engages in the catch.
370. To close breech. —No. 2 releases the securing latch from
its catch, and, assisted by No. 1, swings the tray and block to
the left uutil the tray abuts against and is latclieil to the face
of the breech. No. 2 then turns the translating crank clockwise
until the breech block is translated completely. No. 1 turns
the rotating crank clockwise as indicated tiy the " close
arrow until it brings up short aud is secured by its catch.
371. With a Hxed target, mortars are fired when ready.
With a moving target, they are fired when the target reaches
a predicted position. When mortars are equipped for firing
by electricity, they are fired by the emplacement olBcer at the
signal of the liattery commander.
372. Mortars are fired by lanyard if the electrical firing cir-
cuit is not installed or is out of order. When the lanyard is
 n
a
A
tlj3 a
No. 4 No. 3 No. 2 No. 1

E.S. A.S. E.S. A.S. E.S. A.S. E.S. A.S.

2 12 12 12 1

4 3 4 3 4
6 5 6 5 6

E. S.::^EIevation Setter

A. S.^Azimuth Setter
 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS. 53

used, the emplacement officer commands FIRE at the firing

signal of the battery commander.

Ammunition service.

373. The chief of ammunition service is in command of the

ammunition section and in charge of the galleries and maga-
zines for each emplacement.
He is responsible for the condition of the projectiles, trol-
leys, delivery tables, and for the police of the galleries and
magazines.
On the arrival of his section at the emplacements he com-
mands : DETAILS, POSTS.
When the details are posted he makes an inspection of the
trolleys, magazines, and galleries and reports to the emplace-
ment officer, " Sir,
ammunition service in order," or reports
defects he is unable to remedy without delay.
He is responsible that all truclis nre loaded and delivery
tables filled with projectiles at the beginning of an action.
During drill or action he supervises the service of ammunition.
At the command DISMISSED of the emplacement officer he
commands SECURE MAGAZINES, FORM SECTIONS. He sees
that all his apparatus is in order, doors locked, and super-
vises the formation of his section.
374. The projectile detail transfers projectiles from the re-
serve supply to the delivery tables, and one man is stationed
at each delivery table to assist the truck details in loading
the empty trucks.
375. One or more men of the powder detail (depending on
the location of the powder magazine) are assigned for the
service of powder to each mortar. The charges are brought
out as soon as the zone is announced and delivered to the
Nos. 6 of the mortar detachments as soon as they are ready
to receive them.

12-INCH GTjN battery, DISAPPEARING CARRIAGE.

376. The emplacements are in charge of an emplacement

officer,or in case officers are available for such assignments
each emplacement is in charge of an emplacement officer.
Each gun is manned liy a gun section (22 enlisted men), con-
sisting of a gun commander (noncommissioned officer), a gun
pointer (noncommissioned officer or private), a range setter
(a noncommissioned officer or private), a chief of breech de-
tail (a noncommissioned officer or private), and 18 privates.
The ammunition section consists of a chief of ammunition
service (noncommissioned officer) and details for each gun of
the battery, each to consist of such noncommissioned officers
and privates as the installation for the service of ammunition
requires (for a two-gun battery, approximately 30 men).
377. The emplacement officer receives the report of the gun
commander, and the chief of ammunition service tests the
54 SERVICE AT THE BMPI^CEMENTS.
electrical firing circuit, if installed, and reports to the battery
commander, " Sir, No. In order," or reports defects he
is unable to remedy without delay. He sees that the orders
of the battery commander are executed, repeating them when
necessary. He observes the operation of loading and gives
special attention to the record on the time-range board and to
the laying of the piece for elevation.
378. The gun commander is in charge of the gun, and in the
absence of the emplacement officer is in charge of the entire
emplacement. On arrival of the section at the emplacement
he gives the command DETAILS POSTS, and supervises the
procuring of the implements and equipments by the various
details. When the details have talieu posts he commands
EXAMINE GUN. He makes a general inspection of the gun
and carriage, paying especial attention to the throttling valve,
the recoil cylinders, and the oiling of the various bearings. In
this inspection he is accompanied by the mechanic, with an
oiler. He reports to the emplacement officer, " Sir, No.
in order," or reports defects he is unable to remedy without
delay.
He superintends the removal of the old primer and the in-
serting of a new one and the opening of the breech after a
misfire, as prescribed in paragraphs 650 and 651.
During the loading he supervises the work of the gun de-
tails. When the gun is fuliy in battery he commands READY
to the gun pointer.
At the command DISMISSED of the emplacement oflicer he
commands SECURE PIECE, FORM SECTION. He supervises
the replacing of equipments and implements, sees that the
piece is secured, and then forms his section on the battery
parade.
56 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.
379. 12-mch gun {disappearing carriage.)

Details.
 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS. 57

379. 12-inch gun {disappearing carriage).

At command LOAD or COMMENCE FIRING.

58 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.
379. IZ-inch gun {disappearing carriage) —Continued.
Details.
 SEEVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS. 59

379. l^^nch gun {disappearing carriage) — Continued.

At command LOAD or COMMENCE FIRING.
60 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.
379. 12-inch gun {disappearing carriage) —Continued.
Details.
 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS. 61

379. 12-inch gun (disappearing carriage) —Continued.

At command LOAD or COMMENCE FIRING. At command UNLOAB.

Nos. 11 and 12 run out a loaded shot truck, No. Nos. 11 and 12 push a truck
12 adjusting the truck to the prober height in ac- into position at trie breech to
cordance with the position of the piece upon recoil. receive the dummy powder
The truck is run forward so that the tray enters sections and dummy project-
the breech recess squarely. As the truck brings ile, steady the truck until the
up against the face of the breech No. 12 sets the dummy powder sections and
brake. No. 11 then steps to the right side of the dummy projectile have been
truck and No. 12 to the left, each picking up a withdrawn, then return the
section of the powder charge. As soon as the truck to the loading position.
rammer is withdrawn after seating the projectile,
No. 12 throws the first section of the charge on to
the truck and into the breech recess as far as pos-
sible. No. 11 places a section of the charge in rear
of the one thrown in by No. 12. No. 12 then steps
back to the handle of the shot truck and No. 11
picks up the other section of powder charge from
the right powder tray and, when the rammer is
withdrawn, places it on the truck behind the sec-
tion thrown into the breech recess by No. 12.
Nos. 11 and 12 then return to the shot truck han-
dles. As soon as the last two sections of the pow-
der charge have been rammed, Nos. 11 and 12
withdraw the shot truck, run it back to the hoist,
and turn it over to the hoist detail. Then they
take posts behind a loaded truck and stand by
for the next shot.

Nos. 13, 14, and 15 receive the empty truck after No duties.
each shot, load it, and run it out conveniently for
Nos. 11 and 12.
 ;

62 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.

Notes on the drill.

380. The service of the piece as given above is for an em-

placement with the ammunition hoist on the left side and a
gun with an 1895 breech mechanism. If the hoist is on the
right side of the emplacement, Nos. 1 and 4 are on the left
side of the rammer staff in ramming the projectile. If the
gun has an 1888 breech mechanism, the duties of the breech
detail differ in the following respects: No. 1 assists in open-
ing the breechblock, oils the threads, and assists in closing
breech; No. 17 performs the duties in ramming, prescribed
above for No. 1, and assists on the translating crank, if neces-
sary. The chief of breech detail does not unhook the lanyard
as the piece recoils.
381. To open breech, model 1888 mechanism. —
No. 2 releases
the rotating crank by turning the wing nut of the catch to
the left and then turns the rotating crank clockwise, as indi-
cated by the " open " arrow, until it brings up short in a hori-
zontal position and is secured by its catch. No. 1 turns the
translating crank briskly contraclockwise. When the shoul-
ders of the grooves strike against the ends of the rails, the
block stops short and the shock frees the tray latch from its
catch; No. 1 swings the tray and block to the right until the
securing latch engages in the catch.
383. To close hreeoh. —
No. 2 releases the securing latch from
its catch No. 1 swings the tray and block around to the left
;

smartly No 2 seizes the handle of the tray and continues the

;

swinging of the block until the tray abuts against and is

latched to the face of the breech then he turns the translat-
;

ing crank clockwise until the breech is translated completely

No. 1 releases the rotating crank by turning the wing nut
and turns the rotating crank contraclockwise, as indicated by
the " close " arrow, until it brings up short in a vertical posi-
tion and is secured by its catch. If the loading tray is used,
No. 2 removes it, releases the securing latch, places the load-
ing tray on the loading platform, and then seizes the tray
handle.
383. To open breech, model 1895 mechanism. —
The chief of
breech detail unhooks the lanyard from the eye of the firing
leaf; No. 17 turns the crank continuously in a clockwise direc-
tion until the tray comes to rest against the hinge plate and
the securing latch catches.
384. To close breech. —
No. 1 releases the securing latch and
turns the ci-ank in a contraclockwise direction until the pro-
jecting shoulder on the rotating lug striking the gear prevents
further motion. The latch should be released before the truck
is withdrawn from the breecli, holding the breechblock open
by the operating crank until time to close it.
385. To load and fire. —
The service of the piece at drill is
conducted habitually as though a shot had just been fired.
Before the command LOAD or COMMENCE FIEING is given
the cannoneers are posted in the positions they would occupy
 ;

SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS. 63

immediately after firing, No. 3 well back to the right and rear
of the breech, with the lanyard extended; the chief of breech
detail about 4 feet in rear of the breech ; No. 17 on the right
of the piece near the operating crank the truck at the loading
;

position Nos. 1, 4, 9, and 16 on the right of the rammer, Nos.

;

10 and 18 on the left Nos. 9, 10, 16, and 18 take hold as far
;

to the rear as possible without interfering with each other;

No. 4 takes hold about the center; No. 1 takes hold about 4
feet from the head, so as to guide it against the base of the
projectile. At the command LOAD or COMMENCE FIRING
the breech is opened and No. 2 wipes any residue from the
breech recess and then takes his place on the rammer just in
front of No. 10. Nos. 11 and 12 run up the truck as it passes
;

the rammer detail the head of the rammer is placed against

the base of the projectile by No. 1, and the men on the rammer
follow the truck, all taking a firm hold on the stafC with both
hands. As soon as the truck brings up against the face of the
breech No. 12 sets the brake, and the men on the rammer run
forward and seat the projectile with one motion and with the
greatest possible force. The chief of breech detail notes if the
projectile is seated; if not, he commands HOME EAM, and the
men, all working together, heave on the rammer until the pro-
jectile is pushed home. As soon as the brake of the shot
truck is set Nos. 11 and 12 step to the right and left of the
truck, respectively, and each picks up one sectiou of the
powder charge. As soon as the projectile is seated Nos. 1, 2,
9, and 10 quit the rammer; No. 1 steps to the right side of
the piece and prepares to close breech; No. 2 steps to the
left of the truck and picks up a section of the powder charge
Nos. 9 and 10 run to the tripping bars and take hold of them,
ready to trip; Nos. 4, 16, and 18 withdraw the rammer until
the head is near the rear of the truck. As soon as the rammer
is withdrawn No. 12 throws in the first section of the powder
charge and No. 11 places the second section on the truck
behind the first; Nos. 4, 16, and 18 ram these two sections
well into the chamber; No. 12 steps back to the truck handle
and No. 2 steps close to the breech with the third section of
powder; No. 11 picks up the fourth section. As soon as the
rammer is withdrawn after ramming the first two sections
No. 2 throws in the third section of powder and No. 11 places
the fourth section on the truck Nos. 4, 16, and 18 ram these
;

sections, then withdraw the rammer and carry it to the rear

of the platform, standing by for the next loading. Nos. 11
and 12 remove the truck, take it back to the ammunition hoist,
turn It over to the hoist detail, and take post at a loaded
truck. During the loading No. 3 coils the long lanyard and
serves the vent; No. 17 cleans and oils the threads of the
breechblock and then stands ready to assist in closing breech.
As soon as the truck Is withdrawn the breech is closed by
No. 1. The chief of breech detail commands IN BATTERY
as the breechblock Is being translated, and as soon as the
82615—09 5
64 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.

rotation begins he hoolcs the lanyard to the eye of the firing

leaf and commands TRIP. No. 3 steps back to the right
and rear, letting the long lanyard uncoil. Nos. 9 and 10 raise
the tripping levers to the stop, then return to the rammer at a
run and take post for the next loading.
386. The elevating and traversing details remain at their
posts throughout the service of the piece. The elevating detail
keeps the gun laid continuously in elevation. As soon as the
truck is withdrawn from the breech the gun pointer directs the
traversing of the piece so that the gun will be pointed at the
target by the time it is fully in battery. The gun pointer flres
by closing his firing key or gives the command FIRE, at the
command READY of the gun commander, or as soon thereafter
as he isable to point the piece properly. No. 3 pulls the lan-
yard with a strong, quick pull at the command FIRE of the
gun pointer. As soon as the gun recoils the chief of breech
detail springs in and unhooks the safety lanyard, the block is
opened, and the operations described above are repeated.
387. The firing attachment is constructed so that the breech
must be closed entirely before the leaf can be operated there-
;

fore when practicable the lanyard should be hooked to the

firing leaf before the breech is closed completely. In some
cases, as with the 1888 breech mechanism, the lanyard can be
left hooked to the eye of the firing leaf throughout the drill
without interfering with the operation of opening and closing
breech; the length of the safety lanyard, if used, should not
be longer thau will permit of this. With the 1895 mechan-
ism, if the lanyard is left hooked, it is liable to be caught
in the mechanism; therefore it should be unhooked as soon
as the piece recoils within reach and hooked during the trans-
lation or rotation of the breech block. No. 3 should test the
firing attachment by pulling on the leaf between shots to make
sure it is functioning properly. After inserting the primer
No. 3 must be careful to lower the slide of the firing attach-
ment completely down; otherwise the primer may be blown
back, endangering the lives of those in the rear and permitting
the escape of powder gas, with consequent erosion of the vent.
388. With the 1895 breech mechanism it is convenient to
fasten a wire around the piece back of the elevating band
with a loop in which the safety lanyard may be hooked dur-
ing the loading. The chief of breech detail after unhooking
the lanyard swings it over the teeth of the breech mechanism
and hooks it In the loop of the wire. Thus it is kept from
being caught in the mechanism and is convenient to the chief
of breech detail when the time comes to hook it again.
389. The breech detail should be taught to open breech
promptly. The operation should begin as soon as the piece
recoils within reach. A well-trained detail should have the
breech nearly opened by the time the piece settles.
390. Experience has shown that an appreciable interval
elapses between the command TRIP and the time the gun starts
in battery. In normal fire action where the firing Is as rapid
 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS. 65

as possible the command TEIP may be given just as the

TDreechblock begins to rotate. However, this command must
not be given before the block is fully translated, as translation
becomes difficult frequertly, especially during sustained firing.
391. The rammer detail and the truck detail should be
trained in their duties with the piece at different notches so
as to secure uniformity in seating projectiles and rapidity in
adjusting shot trucks under all conditions.
392. Prior to practice or action shot trucks should be ad-
justed to the highest point to which H is anticipated the gun
will recoil, since the adjustment is made downward more
easily and rapidly than upward.
393. The range setter must keep the piece laid continuously
for range. If an observation Is lost or the rate of change
Indicates an error he looks at the time-range board and con-
trols the setting in accordance with the information indicated
thereon. Many guns change in elevation during recoil; in
such cases the range setter should return the piece to the
proper elevation and take up the time range relation as
j)romptly as possible.
394. In withdrawing a dummy projectile care should be
taken to draw it back on the truck and against the stop
gently.
395. If the gunfails to go in battery completely, the gun
commander orders Nos. 9, 10, 16, and 18 to use the pinch
bars; these are engaged in the notches on the chassis and the
gun is forced into battery. However, battery commanders
should observe such defects at dally drill and have the same
remedied before practice or action.
396. Care should be taken by Nos. 2, 11, and 12 that the
sections of powder charges, when thrown on the truck in
loading, are lined up properly and placed so that when
rammed they will not jam in the breech recess.
397. When trucks are not provided with brakes Nos. 11 and
12 chock the wheels as soon as the truck reaches the breech.
398. For carriages provided with electric motors the gun
pointer operates the traversing controller and the range setter
the elevating and retracting controller.
399. When traversing by electricity the traversing cranks
are left on and Nos. 7 and 8 stand by to spring to their posts
on orders from the gun pointer in case of failure of the elec-
tric power.
400. The range setter operates the maneuver lever and is
jesponsible that it is never left untended. In changing its
setting he must be careful to mesh the gears properly.
401. The members of the gun section should be trained to
work together with the utmost celerity and precision and
without interfering with one another. When they become pro-
ficient the interval between the commands LOAD and TRIP
should not exceed twenty to twenty-five seconds, as a rule,
with service charge, the charge on a truck and the breech
 ;

66 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.

closed at the command LOAD; with dummy ammunition tMs

time should be about fiveseconds less.
402. To retract the gun. —
To bring the gun from the firing
FROM
to the loading position the gun commander commands
BATTERY, HEAVE, HALT, CAST OFF. At the first command
Nos. 7 and 8 go to the retraction cranks. No. 7 releases the
retaining pawl and turns the speed crank to permit the pull-
ing out of the ropes. Nos. 9 and 10 mount on the gun levers
and place the ends of the ropes on the hooks, receiving them
from Nos. 17 and 4, who mount on the chassis to assist. Nos.
1 and 2 pull out the ropes and pass the ends to Nos. 17 and 4
No. 7 takes in the slack. Nos. 7, 8, 9, and 10 take positions at
the retraction cranks, and at the sijcond command turn them.
Nos. 3, 4, 6, and 17 relieve Nos. 7, 8, 9, and 10 when directed
by the gun commander. Odd numbers work on the right side
of the carriage, even numbers on the left. When the gun has
reached the loading position the command HALT is given. At
the command CAST OFF No. 7 lets out enough slack to enable
Nos. 1 and 2 to take the rope ends off the hooks. In retract-
ing the gun by electric power the range setter operates the
controller. At the first command he sets the maneuver lever
for retracting and lets out slack to permit the cables to be
pulled out. At the second command he operates the retracting
motor, taking care that the gun levers do not strike the recoil
buffers. At the third command he stops the motor, lets out
enough slack for the removal of the ends of the ropes, sets the
index to off and tliroivs the idler out of gear for retraction. To
prevent injury to the ropes by reverse winding in letting out
slack, the chief of breech detail takes a position where he can
see one of the drums and stops the unwinding before the last
turn of the rope is off the drum. To prevent injury to the
ropes by winding across the grooves in taking up slack. No. 1
watches the right drum and No. 2 the left until the ropes are
taut; if either rope fails to wind in the proper groove the
man on that side calls HALT; whereupon the winding is
stopped and the rope adjusted, by No. 9 if on the right drum,
by No. 10 if on the left. In retracting, the ropes should be
under equal tension. Slight adjustments may be made by
twisting one of the ropes, but appreciable differences in lengths
must be adjusted at the drums.
Ammunition service.

403. The chief of ammunition service is in charge of the

ammunition section and of the galleries and magazines of the
battery.
Heis responsible for the condition of the projectiles, trol-
leys, and hoists and for the police of the galleries and maga-
zines. On the arrival of his section at the emplacement he
commands DETAILS, POSTS. When the details are posted he
makes an Inspection of the trolleys, hoists, magazines, and
galleries and reports to the emplacement officer, " Sir, ammu-
 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS. 67

nition service, No. in order," or reports defects lie is

unable to remedy without delay. During drill or action lie
supervises tbe service of ammunition.
At the command DISMISSED of the emplacement officer he
commands SECURE MAGAZINES, FORM SECTION. He sees
that all his apparatus is in order, doors locljed, and supervises
the formation of his section.
404. The projectile details for each emplacement are as-
signed to the hoists and trolleys as the installation requires
and transfer projectiles to the delivery tables as ordered.
405. The powder details for each emplacement are assigned
for the service of powder as the installation requires. When
no separate powder hoists are installed powder sections are
carried to the loading platforms by members of the powder
details. .

10-INCH GUN BATTERY, DISAPPEARING CAERIAQE.

406. The organization at the emplacement and the duties of

the officers, gun commander, and mechanics are the same as
prescribed for a 12-inch gun battery, disappearing carriage.
407. The gun section consists of 18 enlisted men, and the
ammunition section approximately 22 enlisted men for a two-
gun battery.
68 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.
408. 10-inch gun {disappearing carriage).

Details.
 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS. 69
408. 10-inch gun {disappearing carriage).

At command LOAD or COMMENCE FIBING.

70 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.
408. 104nch gun (disappearing carriage) —Continued.
Details.
 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS. 71

408. 10-inch gun {disappearing carriage) —Continued.

At command LOAD or COMMENCE FIRING.

72 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.
408. 10-inch gun {disappearing carriage) — Continued.
Details.
 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS. 73

408. 10-inch gun {disappearing carriage) — Continued.

At command LOAD or COMMENCE FIRING.

74 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.
Notes on the drill.

409. Paragraphs 381, 382, 384, 386 to 394, inclusive, 396 to

401, inclusive, and 403 to 405, inclusive, apply to the drill for
this gun.
410. Paragraphs 385 and 395 apply to the drill for this gun
except reference to Nos. 16 and 18.
411. Paragraphs 383 and 402 apply to the drill for this gun
except that No. 3 performs the duties prescribed for No. 17,
and that the retraction crank is manned by Nos. 7 and 8, who
are relieved by Nos. 9 and 10 when directed by the gun com-
mander.

8-INCH GUN BATTEBY, DISAPPEAKING CAKEIAGE.

412. The organization

at the emplacement and the duties of
the gun commanders, and mechanics are as prescribed
officers,
for a 12-inch gun battery, disappearing carriage.
413. The gun section consists of 17 enlisted men, and the
ammunition section of approximately 20 enlisted men for a
two-gun battery.
414. The drill is the same as that prescribed for a lO-inch
gun battery, except that the chief of breech detail is omitted
and his duties are performed by No. 1, and except that refer-
ence to the second section of the powder charge is omitted.
415. The notes on the drill for the 10-inch gun apply to this
gun also.

0-INCH GUN BATTERY, DISAPPEARING CARRIAGE.

416. The organization at the emplacements is similar to

that for a 12-inch gun battery disappearing carriage.
417. The duties of the officers and chiefs of sections are
similar to those prescribed for a 12-inch gun battery disap-
pearing carriage.
418. The emplacements are in charge of an emplacement
officer, or officers when there are more than two emplacemnts,
and each gun is manned by a gun section (12 enlisted men),
consisting of a gun commander (a noncommissioned officer),
a gun pointer (a noncommissioned officer or private), a range
setter (a noncommissioned officer or private), and 9 privates.
The ammunition section (approximately 7 enlisted men for
each emplacement) consists of a chief of ammunition service
(a noncommissioned officer) and details for each gun of the
battery, each detail to consist of such noncommissioned officers
and privates as the Installation requires.
76 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.

419. 6-inch gun {disappearing carriage).

Details.
 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS. 77

419. 6-mch gun {disappearing carriage).

At connnand LOAD or COMMENCE FIRING.

78 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.
419. 6-inch gun (disappearing carriage) —Continued.

Details.
 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS. , 79

419. 6-inch gun (disappearing carriage) —Continued.

At oonunand LOAD or COUUENCE FIRING. At cammand TTNLOAD.

Nos. 7 and 8 alternate in bringing up powder No. 7 (or No. 8) receives the
charges and passing them to No. 2. dummy powder charge from
No. 2.

No. 9 raises the tripping levers at the command No duties.

TRIP of No. 1, and if firing by electricity closes
the safety switch while the piece is going into
battery.

82615—09-
80 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.
Notes on the drill.

420. To load and fire.— As the piece recoils from battery

No. 1 seizes tlie handle of the breech lever as soon as he can
reach it, opens the breech and wipes off the block, oiling the
threads if necessary. No. 5 picks up a projectile from the
serving table and launches it on the tray as soon as the
breech is opened, and No. 4 rams it home and withdraws the
rammer with life. No. 6 keeps the projectiles piled properly
on the serving table and keeps the serving table in a position
convenient to the breech. No. 2, who has received a powder
charge from No. 7 (or 8), steps close to the breech, and Im-
mediately after the rammer Is withdrawn inserts the powder
charge. No. 1 grasps the handle of the lever while the charge
is being Inserted, closes the breech with one motion, and
commands TRIP. No. 9 raises the tripping lever, and when
the gun is nearly in battery closes the safety switch, if firing
by electricity. No. 3 serves the vent while the breech Is
opened, being careful to keep the lanyard clear of the mechan-
ism if firing by lanyard. The gun commander commands
READY when the gun is in battery. The gun pointer follows
the target continuously during loading, and the range setter
keeps it laid continuously for range. The gun pointer closes
the firing key or commands TIRE at the command READY of
the gun commander, or as soon thereafter as the gup is
pointed. No. 3 pulls the lanyard at the command FIRE.
421. To retract the gun.— To bring the gun from the firing
to the loading position the gun commander commands FROM
BATTERY, HEAVE, HALT, CAST OFF. At the first command
No. 9 goes to the retraction crank and operates the pawl and
speed crank to permit the pulling out of the ropes. Nos. 5
and 6 mount on the carriage and place the loops of the ropes
on the hooks. Nos. 1 and 2 pull out the the ropes and pass
the ends to Nos. 5 and 6. No. 9 takes in the slack. Nos. T
and 8 take positions at the retraction crank and at the second
command turn the crank. Nos. .5 and 6 relieve Nos. 7 and 8
when directed by the gun commander. When the gun has
reached the loading position the command HALT is given.
At the command CAST OFF, No. 9 lets out enough slack to
enable Nos. ] and 2 to take the loops off the hooks. To pre-
vent injury to the ropes the same precautions are observed
as with the 12-inch gun, paragraph 402.
422. Additional numbers 10 and 11 should be supplied when
difficulty is experienced in keeping the supply of ammunition
up to the maximum speed of loading.
423. A well-trained section should be able to maintain a
rate of fire of six shots per minute.
424. In the service of ammunition the projectile detail de-
livers the projectiles to the serving table, and the powder
details secure the charges and deliver them to Nos. 7 and 8
of the gun section at the edge of the loading platform.
 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS. 81

12-INCH GUN KATTERY, BARBETTE CARRIAGE.

485. The organization at the emplacements Is the same as

that for a 12-lnch gun battery, disappearing carriage.
426. Each gun is manned by a gun section (22 enlisted
men), consisting of a gun commander (a noncommissioned offi-
cer), a gun pointer (a noncommissioned officer or private),
a range setter (a noncommissioned officer or private), a chief
of breech detail (a noncommissioned officer or private), and
18 privates.
427. The ammunition section (approximately 30 enlisted
men) consists of a chief of ammunition service (a noncom-
missioned officer) and details for each gun of the battery,
each detail to consist of such noncommissioned officers and
privates as the installation requires.
428. The duties of the officers and chiefs of section are
similar to those prescribed for a 12-inch gun battery, disap-
pearing carriage.
 .

82 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.

429. 12-itich gun (harhette carriage)

Details.
 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS. 83

429. 12~inch gun {barbette carriage).

At command LOAD or COMMEKCE FIRING. At conunand UNLOAD.

The gun pointer sets llie deflection received and No duties.

directs the traversing so as to follow the target con-
tinuously. He fires the piece or gives the com-
mand FIRE as soon after the command READY
as the piece is pointed. He endeavors to locate
the position of the splash of his shot and corrects
his deflection if necessary.

The range setter calls the deflection to the gun The range setter directs
pointer. He directs the work of Nos. 5 and 6, re- the piece to be given a de-
quiring the piece to be given a depression 1° 15' pression of l** 15'.
as soon as fired and to be elevated during the
operation of closing the breech. He calls "Range
set " as soon as the range is set properly, and there-
after directs the elevation or depression of the
piece so that it will be laid continuously in eleva-
tion. He watches the time-range board and
checks the laying of the piece with the informa-
tion shown thereon.

The chief of breech detail commands RAM

as The chief of breech detail
soon as the projectile is in position, and after it supervises.
has been launched into the chamber he com- No. 1 passes the first and
mands HOME RAM. He assists in ramming the third dummy sections of
projectile and the sections of powder, and passes powder to No. 10 and assists
the lanyard to No. 4. He hooks the safety lan- m withdrawing the dummy
yard during the rotation of the breechblock. He projectile.
steps to the side of the platform clear of the recoil No. 2 inserts the loading
and after firing unhooks the lanyard. tray, passes the second and
No. 1 receives the rammer and places its head fourth dummy sections of
against the base of the projectile, assists in ram- powder to No. 17, assists in
ming the projectile, puts in the second and fourth withdrawing the dummy
sections of the powder charge, closes breech projectile and assists inswing-
(1895 mechanism), and during firing steps to the ing the loaded shot tray
side of the platform clear of the recoil. clear of the platform.
No. 2 wipes any residue from the gas-check seat No. 3 opens breech, re-
and breech recess, inserts the loading tray as soon moves the primer, and as-
as the breech is open, swings the projectile into sists in withdrawing the
position takes his place on the rammer, and assists
, dummy projectile.
in ramming. He inserts the first and third sec-
tions of the powder charge, pushing them into
the chamber as far as possible, and removes the
loading tray. During firing he steps to the side
of the platform clear of the recoil.
No. 3 opens breech (1895 mechanism) inserts the
,

primer, and lowers the leaf of the firing device

completely down and steps clear of the recoil. As
soon as the breech is opened after the piece is fired
he removes the old primer, clears the vent, and
cleans the primer seat.
84 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.
429. 124nch gun {barbette carriage) — Continued.
Details.
 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS. 85

429. t2-inch gun {barbette carriage) — Continued.

At commaiid X.OAB or COMMEWCE FIRING. At command UNLOAD.

No. 4 mounts on the loading platform and No. 4 receives the extractor
assists in ramming the projectile, wipes off the from No. .6, mounts on the
breechblock and oils the threads, dismounts, platform, pulls hack the
takes the end of the lanyard, and pulls it at the dummy powder sections, as-
command FIKE. sists in withdrawing the
No. 16 holds the rammer so that it may he dummy projectile, and re-
seized by No. 1. He mounts on the loading plat^ turns the extractor to No. 16.
form, assists in ramming the projectile and the No. 16 mounts on the plat-
powder section, then dismounts, taking the ram- form, assists in withdrawing
m.er with him. the dummy projectile, dis-
mountSj and receives the
extractor from No. 4.

Nos. 5 and 6 elevate and depress the piece under Nos. 5 and 6 depress the
direction of the range setter. by the range
piece as directed

Nos. 7 and 8 traverse the piece under direction of No duties.

the gim pointer.
If firing by electricity. No. 8 closes the safety
switch as the piece is being elevated.

No. 9 hooks the hoist tackle to a shot tray, com- No. 9 swings the shot tray
mands HOIST, steadies the projectile as it rises, to its position at the breech,
mounts the steps with it, commands HALT assists in swinging it clear of
when the projectile is at the height of the breech. the carriage, and commands
He assists in swinging the projectile around to the LOWER at the proper time.
breech and swings the shot tray clear of the load-
ing platformafter the projectile has been rammed.
He commands LOWER, guides the shot tray on
to the truck and unhooks the tackle. He directs
the work of the hoist detail so as to have a pro-
jectile hoisted to the proper height by the time the
piece is fired.
86 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.
429. 12-inch gun {barbette carriage) —Continued.
Details.
 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS. 87

429. 12-inch gun {barbette carriage) —Continued.

At command LOAD or COMMENCE FIRING.
88 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.
Notes on the drill.

430. —
To open and close breech. The operations of opening
and closing breech are as prescribed in the drill for the 12-lnch
gun on disappearing carriage, except that the breech must not
be opened until the piece laas been given a depression of
1° 15' when open the breechblock must be swung to the left
;

about halfway before the piece can be elevated.

—
431. To load and fire. The service of the piece at drill is
conducted habitually as though a shot had just been fired.
Before the command LOAD or COMMENCE FIRING is given
the cannoneers are posted in the positions they would occupy
immediately after firing. Those who remain on the loading
platform are posted at the sides of the platform clear of the
recoil. No. 4 is well back to the right and rear of the gun
platform with the lanyard extended. No. 9 is on the loading
platform by the hoisting tackle, on which are suspended a tray
and projectile at the height necessary for loading. At the
command LOAD or COMMENCE FIRING the piece is de-
pressed rapidly. The chief of breech detail springs in and
unhooks the lanyard, then steps back to the rammer staff;
No. 3 opens breech. While the breech is being opened Nos.
9 and 2 swing the projectile to its position at the breech;
No. 4 tosses the long lanyard over the right rail of the loading
platform and mounts on the platform. No. 1 receives the
rammer from No. 16, who mounts on the platform, and the
chief of breech detail, Nos. 1, 4, and 16, stand ready to ram.
As soon as the projectile is at the breech, No. 1 places the
head of the rammer against the base of the projectile, No. 2
springs back to the rammer, and the chief of breech detail
gives the command RAM; the chief of breech detail and No.
1 working on the right of the rammer stafC and Nos. 2, 4, and
16 working on the left, launch the projectile into the chamber.
All then take a firm hold of the staff as far to the rear as pos-
sible and the chief of breech detail commands HOME RAM,
when the projectile is seated with the greatest possible force.
Then Nos. 1, 2, and 4 quit the rammer, which is drawn back
by the chief of breech detail and No. 16. No. 9, who has
steadied the shot tray during the ramming, swings it out of
the way as promptly as possible and commands LOWER.
No. 2 receives a section of powder from a member of the
powder detail. Inserts it in the chamber, and pushes it as far
in as possible. No. 1 receives a powder section from a mem-
ber of the powder detail and places it in the loading tray
behind the section Inserted by No. 2; the chief of breech
detail and No. 16 ram these sections. The same is done with
the third and fourth powder .sections. No. 16 dismounts from
the loading platform with the rammer, and the breech is
closed. The chief of breech detail hooks the lanyard to the
eye of the firing leaf while the breech is being closed and
passes the other end to No. 4, who has dismounted from the
 — —

SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS. 89

loading platform. He commands ELEVATE as soon as the

block has started to rotate. No. 3 serves the vent while the
piece is being loaded. The gun pointer directs the traversing
so as to follow the target continuously. The range setter
supervises the depressing and elevating of the piece and calls
" range set " when the piece is laid for range thereafter he
;

keeps it laid continuously for range. The gun commander

notes that the breech is closed, that No. 4 is ready to pull the
lanyard, or that the safety switch is closed and that " range
set " has been given. Then he commands READY. The gun
pointer commands FIRE or fires by closing his firing key at
the command READY of the gun commander or as soon there-
after as the piece is pointed.
432. The lanyard should be unhooked after each shot. It
will be found convenient to have a hook on the ratling at the
right side of the loading platform in which the lanyard may
be hooked between rounds.
433. Every effort should be made in drill to train men to
seat the projectile at the command RAM; when this can be
done, HOME RAM is omitted.

Ammunition service.

434. The personnel and duties of the ammunition section

are the same as for the 12-inch gun battery, disappearing
carriage.

10-INCH GUN BATTERY, BARBETTE CARRIAGE.

435. The organization at the emplacements is the same as

that for the 12-inch gun battery, disappearing carriage.
436. The duties of the members of the gun section (22 en-
listed men) are the same as those prescribed for the 12-inch
gun (barbette) section, except that
No. 16 does not mount upon the loading platform, but passes
the rammer to and receives it from No. 1.
The projectile is seated with one motion at the command
RAM.
437. The ammunition section (approximately 22 enlisted
men) is smaller than that of 12-inch gun battery by 8
members.

8-INCH GUN EATTEEY, BARBETTE CARRIAGE.

438. The organization at the emplacements is the same as

that for the 12-inch gun battery, disappearing carriage.
439. The duties of the members of the gun section (18 en-
listed men) are similar to those given for the 12-inch gun
(barbette) section, except that
There is no chief of breech detail, and his duties are per-
formed by Nos. 1 and 2 in addition to those prescribed.
90 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.

The powder sections are inserted and pushed into the cham-
ber by hand.
No. 1 pulls the lanyard at the command FIRE from a posi-
tion on the loading platform to the right and rear of the
breech.
Nos. 16, 17, and 18 are omitted.
No. 15 is assigned to the hoist tackle detail.
440. The ammunition section (approximately 22 enlisted
men) is the same as that for the 10-inch gun.
6-INCH GUN BATTEBY, PEDESTAL MOUNT.

441. The organization at the emplacements is the same as

that for a 6-inch gun battery, disappearing carriage.
442. The duties of the officers and chiefs of section are
similar to those prescribed for a 6-inch gun battery, disappear-
ing carriage.
443. The emplacements are in charge of an emplacement
officer, or officers when there are more than two emplacements,
and each gun Is manned by a gun section (11 enlisted men),
consisting of a gun commander (a noncommissioned officer), a
gun pointer (a noncommissioned officer or private), a range
setter (a noncommissioned officer or private), and 8 privates.
444. The ammunition section (approximately 7 enlisted men
for each emplacement), consists of a chief of ammunition serv-
ice (a noncommissioned officer), and details for each gun of
the battery, each detail to consist of such noncommissioned
officers and privates as the installation requires.
92 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.
445. 6-inch gun {pedestal mount).

Details.
 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS. 93

445. 6-inch gun {pedestal mount).

At command LOAD or COMMENCE FIRING.

94 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.
446. 6-inch gun (pedestal mount) —Continued.
Details.
 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS. 95

44S. 6-inch gun {pedestal mount) —Continued.

At command LOAD or COMMENCE FIRING. At command UNLAOD.

No. up a projectile from the serving table

5 picks No. 5 removes the dummy
and launches it on the loading tray as soon as the projectile from the loading
breech opened.
is tray and places it on the serv-
No. 6 arranges the projectiles on the serving table ing table.
and keeps the table convenient to the breech. No. 6. No duties.

Nos. 7 and 8 alternate in bringing up powder No. 7 (or No. 8) receives the
charges and passing them to No. 2. dummy powder charge from
No.2.

82615—09-
 96 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.
5-lNCH GUN BATTERY, -l.T-INCH GUN BATTERY, AND 4-INCH GUN
BATTERY.
t

446. The organization at the emplacements is the same as

that for a 6-inch gun battery.
447. The duties of the officers and chiefs of section are
similar to those prescribed for a 6-inch gun battery.
448. The service at the emplacements of the 5-inch gun bat-
tery, 4.7-inch gun battery, and 4-inch gun battery is similar to
that described for the 6-inch gun battery (pedestal mount) or
the 3-inch gun battery, depending upon the character of ammu-
nition used; the sections and details are arranged along the
lines indicated in the drill of the 6-inch gun or 3-inch gun, as
may be most applicable.
3-INCH GUN EATTEEY.

449. The organization at the emplacements is the same as

that for a 6-inch gun battery.
450. The duties of the officers and chiefs of section are
similar to those prescribed for a 6-inch gun battery.
451. The emplacements are in charge of an emplacement
officer, or officers when there are more than two emplacements,
and each gun is manned by a gun section (6 enlisted men),
consisting of a gun commander (a noncommissioned officer), a
gun pointer (a noncommissioned officer or private), a range
setter (a noncommissioned officer or private), and 3 privates.
The ammunition section (approximately 7 enlisted men for
each emplacement) consists of a chief of ammunition service
(a noncommissioned officer) and details for each gun of the
battery, each detail to consist of such noncommissioned officers
and privates as the installation requires.
98 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.

452. 3-inch gun.

Details.
 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS. 99

453. S-inch gun.

At command LOAD or COMMENCE FIRING.

100 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.

Notes on the drill.

453. All cartridges should be tried in the chamber before

using. Those which do not fit accurately must be rejected.
454. If a cartridge jams, attempt must not be made to drive
it home by forcing the block ;it should be withdrawn and
another substituted.
455. If a cartridge case is extracted with difficulty, feel for
a burr around the edge of the chamber, and if one is found,
file it smooth.
456. With guns on masking parapet mounts. No. 3 pro-
cures the ratchet lever at the command POSTS, places it on
the shaft, and at the command RAISE GTTN mans the ratchet
lever, assisted by the range setter, who clamps the pivot
socket. The same numbers lower the gun when the drill is
dismissed.
457. The ammunition section keeps the serving table at each
gun supplied with ammunition.

6-pounder gun battery.

458. The personnel assigned to 6-pounder batteries is in

charge of an officer, who acts as battery commander.
459. There are no range or ammunition sections. Each gun
is manned by a gun section ^ enlisted men), consisting of a
gun commander (a noncommissioned officer), a gun pointer
(a noncommissioned officer or private), and 6 privates.
460. The duties of the battery commander, chiefs of sec-
tion, and gun pointers are similar to those for the 3-inch gun.
The battery commander indicates the target and estimates the
range, and the gun pointers set their sights accordingly.
Range corrections are made on orders of the battery com-
mander from observation of fire. Deflection corrections are
made by the gun pointers as prescribed for larger guns.
102 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.
461. 6-pounder gun.

Details.
 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS. 103

461. 6-pounder gun.

At command LOAD or COMMENCE FIRING.

 :

104 SERVICE AT THE EMPLACEMENTS.

Notes on the drill.

462. To load and fire. —The

gun commtuider repeats the
indication of the target and the range and commands WITH :

(such projectile), COMMENCE FIRING.

He repeats the command CEASE FIRING.
463. After the first round the projectile is named only when
a different kind is ordered, and the gun is loaded without
command immediately after it is fired.
464. There no ammunition section, and the gun com-
is
mander is in charge of the magazine, except when two or
more guns are supplied from the same service magazine, in
which case an additional noncommissioned officer Is placed in
charge of it.
465. During hostilities the ammunition boxes are kept filled
with ammunition for use in an emergency.
When this ammunition is used No. 2 takes it from the left
box or receives it from No. 1, who takes it from the right box.
466. If a cartridge jams and will not go home with the force
due to swinging the breechblock smartly, never attempt to
drive it home by forcing the block withdraw the cartridge
;

and try another.

with difficulty, feel for
467. If a cartridge case is extracted
a burr around the edge of the chamber, and if one is found
file it smooth.
468. If the gun is to be fired in a temporary emplacement,
an anchorage should be improvised and made as substantial
as possible in order that the recoil may be controlled suffi-
ciently to enable the gun pointer to remain against the shoul-
der piece, use the short lanyard, and thus secure the maxi-
mum rate of aimed fire.
469.Whenever the gun is not anchored securely the long
lanyard is used, the spade turned down, and Nos. 1, 2, and 4
step clear of the recoil outside the wheels before the gun is fired.
470. When the telescopic sight is used No. 4 takes the place
of the gun pointer at the shoulder piece and the gun pointer
operates the clamps, directing No. 4 in elevating and traversing.
471. If No. 3 has difficulty in giving direction by the hand-
spike, the gun pointer directs Nos. 1 and 2 to assist by work-
ing on the wheels.
472. Serving tables should be Improvised convenient to the
piece, or the boxes of ammunition may be placed in a con-
venient and sheltered place.
473. With the 6-pounder gun having American Ordnance
Company drop breechblock mechanism and parapet mount,
the organization of the personnel and the drill are the same
as in paragraphs 458 to 472, inclusive, with the following
modifications
No. 2 opens and closes breech instead of No. 1.
No. 1 operates the elevating handwheel under the direction
of the gun pointer.
Omit all references to the shoulder piece, the long lanyard,
the clamps, and the threads of the breechblock and breech
recess.
 : : : :

Chapter VII.
BATTERY FIRE-CONTROl.
474. The following methods of using the firfc-control in-
stallation of a battery are based on the type installation, 1909.
The general features of the methods are applicable, as a rule,
to the standard systems already installed and to the provi-
sional systems

GUN BATTERY OP THE PRIMAEY ARMAMENT.

Manning details.

475. Battery commander's station

Battery commander.
Battery commander's observers.
Telephone operator for F' telephone.
Musician.
476. Plotting room
Range officer.
Plotter.
No. 1, assistant i^lotter.
No. 2, arm setter.
No. 3, arm setter.
No. 4, range-correction computer.
No. deflection computer.
5,
No. operator for telautograph or alternative means
6,
for transmittting information to guns.
Xo. 7, operator for communicating with emergency
station.
477. Observing stations (for each) :

Observer.
Reader.
478. Emergency station
Observer.
Assistant observer.
479. Emplacements (for each) :

Range keeper (who operates the time-range board).

Indication and identification of a target.

480. The battery commander having identified a target indi-

cated to him from the fire commander's station by description,
place in line, or otherwise, it must be indicated to and identi-
fied by the observers at B' and B" and the gun pointers.
The battery commander, using the observer's line, commands
105
106 BATTERY HEE-CONTROL.

TARGET. The observers reply B' and B", respectively. The

battery commander adds a description of the target and at
night gives the designation of the searchlight covering it,
makes sure that it is correctly identified by the observers,
designates the point for observation, and then commands
TEACK.
481. In addition to a description, the target may have been
indicated by the fire commander by the azimuth and range
of a predicted point relocated for the B. C. station, in which
case the battery commander transmits the azimuth to the guns
and the range and azimuth to the plotter the latter locates
;

the point on the plotting board by means of the gun arm

(range correction scale set to normal) the arm setters bring
;

the B' and B" arms to the point and read and transmit the
azimuths to the readers at B' and B", who set the observing
instruments accordingly. The battery commander in the
meantime sets his instrument to the predicted azimuth re-
ceived from the fire commander and describes the target to
the observers. The fire commander's observer calls " now,"
when the target crosses the vertical wire of his instrument;
this message is transmitted to the battery commander, who
repeats " now " to the observers. Both observers having re-
ported to the battery commander " on target," he designates
the point of observation and commands TRACK.
482. With the vertical base system targets are Indicated and
identified by the same commands and means except that the
description, azimuth, and range are sent only to the station
(B' or B") at which the D. P. F. is to be used.
483. If, after the command TRACK, the battery commander
has reason to believe that there is a possibility of confusion of
targets on account of the number in the field or other reason,
he commands B' (or B") DESCRIBE. The B' (or B") ob-
server, without ceasing to track, describes the target, giving
details in addition to those furnished him by the battery
commander in indicating it. When B' (or B") has con-
firmed the identification of the target to the satisfaction of
the battery commander, the latter repeats back " on target
B' " (or B"), and then commands B" (or B')D£SCRIBE,
until the identification is confirmed.
484. The battery commander may have the gun arm azi-
muth called to him from the plotting room for checking with
his observing instrument.
485. The target is indicated to the guns immediately after
it has been identified by the observers. The battery com-
mander sets his azimuth instrument ahead of the target and
transmits the reading with a description of the target to the
guns. With the sights set to normal the guns are laid at this
azimuth. The battery commander or his assistant calls " now "
when the target crosses the vertical wire of the B. 0. instru-
ment. The gun pointer calls "on target" or "lost." If the
gun pointer fails to identify the target at the first trial, the
 :

BATTERY FIRE-CONTROL. 107

operation is repeated with more detailed description. Identi-

fication may be confirmed in tlie same manner as for observers.
486. Targets are indicated to and identified by tlie emer-
gency station in tlie same manner, tlie range ofiicer or No. 7
using tlie speaking tube or megaphone as means of communi-
cation for this purpose.

Horizontal iase system.

487. The command TRACK having been given by the battery

commander, each observer follows the target, keeping the ver-
tical wire accurately on the designated point, and stops pre-
cisely on the third stroke of the bell. The reader at each sta-
tion calls out the azimuth. When for any reason the observing
interval Is not indicated by bell the stop watch is used for the
purpose and the commands READY, TAKE are given by the
battery commander's observer over the observer's line. The
tracking continues until CEASE TRACKING, VERTICAL BASE
(or other system) is ordered.
488. Xo. 2 wears a head telephone on line from B'. He sets
the primary arm to the azimuth received from B' and calls
" set."
489. No. 3 wears a head telephone on line from B". He
sets the secondary arm to the azimuth received from B" and
calls " set."
490. The plotter wears a head set on the line to the guns.
He places one side of the targ against the graduated edge of
the secondary arm and slides it along the arm until the ver-
tical front edge is exactly at the intersection of the primary
and secondary arms; then he brings the gun arm against the
targ and calls over the gun line the range indicated on the
arm and plots the position of the target. He sends to the guns
the deflection called by No. 5 in Case II or the corrected
azimuth called by No. 1 in Case III.
491. No. 1, at the first setting of the gun arm, turns the
outer scale of the hundredths dial of the gun arm until the
zero is opposite the pointer and sets the disk of the degree
tally so that the 15 of the scale Is opposite the pointer. At
every subsequent setting of the gun arm he calls out the refer-
ence number corresponding to the angular travel of the target,
reading the degrees from the degree tally scale and the hun-
dredths from the outer scale of the hundredths dial. He then
resets both scales as prescribed above.
He operates the wind-component indicator and sets the target
arm to the azimuth of the gun arm after each setting of the
latter.
When Case III is used he calls oft the corrected azimuth at
every setting of the gun arm except the first two.
492. No. 4 operates the range board and sets the correction
slide for the gun arm to the range-board reading.
493. Whenever under extreme conditions the index reading
is beyond the limits of the correction scale on the gun arm the
following will apply
 ;

108 BATTERY FIEE-CONTROL.

For a range-board reading between 2,500 and 3,500, substract

1,000 from the reading, set ttie arm accordingly, and add 1,000
yards to the range; for a reading over 3,500, subtract 2,000
and add 2,000 yards to the range; for a reading between 500
and 1,500, add 1,000 and subtract 1,000 yards from the range
for a reading less than 500, add 2,000 and subtract 2,000 from
the range. No. 4 calls to the plotter the number of yards the
latter must add to or subtract from the range.
494. No. 5 operates the deflection board, calls off the sight
deflection in Cases I and II and in Case III applies the result-
ant correction to the azimuth correction scale of the gun arm
whenever it differs from the previous correction by .05 or
more.
495. No. 6 transmits to the guns the corrected range an-
nounced by the plotter.
496. No. 7 keeps a record of the ranges received from the
emergency station and calls these ranges to the plotter when
the emergency system is used.
497. The time-interval bells shall be cut off frequently and
observations taken from a watch or clock in the plotting room
or B. C. station, " ready, take," being called over the line to
the observers.

Auxiliary horizontal-'base system (B. G. to B', B", or B'").

498. When the failure of communications or damage to either
B' or B" renders it necessary the battery commander or the
range officer may command B' (or B") AUXILIARY BASE,
TRACK.
499. The battery commander's observer acts as observer and
reader at the B. C. instrument, and the tracking continues
with as little delay as possible, the B. C. station becoming the
primary and B' (or B") the secondary station. The gun arm
is laid at the azimuth received from the B. C. station, using
the diagonal scale azimuth circle; its intersection with the
primary (or secondary) arm marks the position of the target.

Vertical-hase system.

500. The battery commander orders the vertical-base system

and the range officer commands B' (or B") VERTICAL BASE,
TRACK, and throws the switches so as to bring both arm set-
ters' telephones in multiple with the reader's telephone in the
station ordered. The B" (or B') arm is laid aside. The
observer at B' (or B") follows the target, stopping the instru-
ment with the horizontal wire on the water line and the ver-
tical wire on the designated part of the target, at the last
stroke of the bell. The reader transmits the azimuth and the
range to the arm setters. The tracking is continued in this
manner until CEASE TRACKING, HORIZONTAL BASE (or
other system) is ordered. Both arm setters hear azimuth and
range. If B' is sending information, No. 2, on hearing the
azimuth, sets the primary arm; No. 3 notes the range and
 ;

BATTERY FIRE-CONTROL. 109

calls it to the plotter as soon as No. 2 calls " set." If B" is

sending information, No. 3 sets the secondary arm and No. 2
calls the range. The plotter places the targ against the arm
at the range called by the arm setter, and the remaining opera-
tions are as prescribed for the horizontal-base system.
501. Where instruments for both horizontal and vertical
base systems are installed practice in the use of each shall be
held frequently. Special attention shall be given to practice
in changing from one system to the other a well-drilled range
;

section should make the change without confusion or loss of an

observation.
Emergency system.

502. When it is desired to use the emergency system, or

when failure of communications or damage to B' or B" ren-
ders it necessary, the battery commander orders emergency
system and the range officer commands EMERGENCY SYS-
TEM, TRACK. The assistant observer at the emergency sta-
tion transmits the ranges to No. 7, who repeats them to the
plotter; the battery commander's observer (at B. C. ) follows
the target with his instrument and calls the azimuth to No. 2,
who sets the gun arm, using the diagonal scale azimuth circle
and calls " set." The plotting proceeds as prescribed for the
vertical-base system except that no duties are required of No 3.
In case damage to the B. C. station renders it necessary, the
battery commander's observer transfers the azimuth instru-
ment (unless one is already there) to the pier mount in the
emergency station, levels and orients it as quickly as possible
he observes and reads the azimuth of the target at each bell.
These azimuths are transmitted by the assistant to the plot-
ting room in advance of the ranges read from the emergency
Instrument.
503. In case of damage to the plotting room, ranges as read
from the emergency instrument may be megaphoned or called
through the speaking tubes directly to the gun platforms.
504. All targets assigned to the battery should be tracked
by the emergency detail. The observer at the emergency
range finder sends the range at each observation to the plot-
ting room, where it is recorded by No. 7 for the information of
the range officer. When EMERGENCY SYSTEM is ordered
the ranges are repeated to the plotter.

MORTAB BATTEET.
planning details.
505. B. C. station:
Battery commander.
Assistant battery commander.
Battery commander's observer.
Telephone operator for the F' telephone.
Azimuth keeper (who operates time-azimuth board).
Musician,
 : :

110 BATTERY FIEE-CONTEOL.

506. Plotting room

Range officer.
Plotter.
No. 1, assistant plotter.
No. 2, arm setter.
No. 3, arm setter.
No. 4, azimutli computer.
No. 5, operator of device for indicating data to the
pits.
507. Observing stations (for each) :

Observer.
Reader.
508. Emergency station
Observer.
Assistant observer.

Indication and identification of a target.

509. The methods of indication and identiflcation are the

same as those prescribed for the fire-control system of a gun
battery of the primary armament, except that targets are not
indicated to, or identified by, the gun pointers.

Horizontal-'base system.

510.The command TRACK having been given, the target is

means of the primary and secondary arms from azi-
plotted by
muths taken simultaneously from B' and B" in the same
manner as prescribed for a gun battery of the primary
armament.
Predicting and firing.

511. The
firing interval should not exceed one minute for
mortars on carriages, models 1896. The predicting interval is
not necessarily equal to the firing interval and is ordinarily
taken as one minute. With sufliciently well-trained personnel
the firing interval may be reduced to thirty seconds and one-
minute predictions made every thirty seconds. In the follow-
ing description both firing and predicting intervals are as-
sumed to be one minute. For convenience of explanation the
observations on which predictions are to be made are desig-
nated as " time 1," " time 2," etc. If, for example, the first
observation on the target is taken at time 4, the first predic-
tion may be made and the salvo or shot fired at
at time 5
time 6. The zone should be indicated before time 5; to do
this the plotter, after the last intermediate observation before
time 5, estimates the position at which the target will be plot-
ted at time 5 and also the approximate location of the pre-
dicted and set-forward points, brings up the mortar arm, calls
out the zone, and notes for his own use the time of fiight a ;

well-instructed plotter should be able to make this estimate

without material error in the time. As soon as the position
of the target is plotted from the observations taken at time 5
the plotter applies the predicter, holding it at an angle of about
 BATTERY FIHE-CONTEOL. Ill

45° witli the board, the ten-second pointers to the side toward
which the target is moving, and marks the predicted and set-
forward points. Then he lays the predictor to one side, brings
the graduated edge of the mortar arm to the set-forward point,
and calls out the elevation. No. 1 reads the azimuth of the
set-forward point to No. 4, who sets it on the mortar deflec-
tion board and sends the corrected azimuth to the battery or
calls it to No. 5, as the equipment of the station requires.
Should an arbitrary correction be shown necessary by the ob-
servation of the preceding shot or salvo, the batterv commander
directs FIRE RIGHT (or LEFT) HUNDREDTHS, and
No. 4 moves the arbitrary correction pointer to the right (or
left) along the deflection scale the distance ordered, this opera-
tion preceding the determination of the corrected azimuth of
the set-forward point. The plotter next brings the graduated
"
edge of the mortar arm to the predicted point and calls " set;
then No. 1 transmits the azimuth of the predicted point to the
battery commander's observer, who sets the battery com-
mander's instrument to this azimuth. The pit being ready,
the signal for flring is given when the target crosses the
vertical wire of the instrument, providing the time of crossing
indicates that no considerable error has been made in predic-
tion. This is a matter for the exercise of judgment by the
battery commander or his assistant, but, in general, if the time
of crossing varies more than five seconds from the predicted
time the command RELAY should be given to the pits.
512. Allowance may be made in the time of flring by the offi-
cer at the battery commander's instrument for small observed
deflection errors, but if these errors are considerable correction
should be made on the mortar deflection board.
513. The required data having been transmitted, the plotter
notes the travel during the last minute, estimates the position
of the next predicted and set-forward points, brings up the
mortar arm, reads the zone number, and estimates the time
of flight for the next shot or salvo. The tracking is then
resumed.
514. If the firing interval is one minute, intermediate ob-
servations need not be plotted after the first prediction.
515. If the battery commander's station is also the primary
station, the primary arm, instead of the mortar arm, is brought
to the predicted point, and No. 2 reads and transmits to the
battery commander's observer the azimuth of the predicted
point.
516. When the flring interval can be reduced to forty-flve or
thirty seconds, predictions for one minute ahead may be made
every forty-five or thirty seconds.

The auxiliary hori::oiital-hase system— The vertical-base

system — The emergency system.
517. The auxiliary horizontal-base system, the vertical-base
system, and the emergency system are used under the same
conditions and in the same manner as provided for a gun
82615—09 8
 :

112 BATTERY FIRE-CONTROL.

battery of the primary armament, so far as the location of the

track of the target on the plotting board is concerned. Pre-
dicting and firing are as prescribed in the preceding paragraph.

BATTEBY OF THE INTEEMEDIATE ABMAMENT.

518. The methods of using the fire-control .system of a bat-

tery of the intermediate armament conform to the methods for
a battery of either the primary or secondary armament, de-
I)ending upon the equipment.

BATTEBY OF THE SECONDAKY AEMAMENT.

manning details.

519. Range-finding station

Observer.
Reader (with range finders having outside scales).
Telephone operator.
Operator of device for exhibiting ranges.

Range-finding system.

520. If ranges are not posted at the range-finding station

the operator of the device for exhibiting ranges is stationed
at a convenient point visible from the gun and ranges are
transmitted to him by the reader through a speaking tube, by
megaphone or by other means.
521. A target having been indicated by the fire, mine, or
battery commander, it is tracked without further orders until
CEASE FIRING or CHANGE TARGET is ordered. The observer
follows the target. Ranges, as corrected by observation of
fire, are posted at approximately regular intervals, the inter-
vals being as short as is consistent with accurate readings.
522. Wind and drift corrections, obtained from the abridged
table, are combined with the travel as determined by the gun
pointers, for the first defiection. Thereafter each gun pointer
corrects for defiection errors by moving the vertical cross wire
in the direction and the approximate amount of the observed
error.
523. For rapidity and convenience of ideutification of tar-
gets azimuths to every 5 degrees may be stenciled on the front
walls of the emplacements of rapid-fire guns.
524. Range corrections bailed on observation of fire are made
by the battery commander only.
525. Corrections for powder are determined by trial shots.
Since batteries of the secondary armament are not provided
with range boards, velocity corrections may be applied by shift-
ing the range scale or pointer on the gun carriage; or they
may be applied by the operator who sets the device for exhibit-
ing ranges in the same manner as corrections from the observa-
tion of fire are applied.
 : :

Chapter VIII.
BORE SIGHTING, ORIENTATION, AND POINTING.
BORE SIGHTING AND ORIENTATION.

526. Bore sighting. —

Guns sliould be bore sighted frequently
in order to check the adjustment of the sight standard and
to correct it If necessary. The process Is as follows : Place
a bore sight in the breech and a thread in the vertical diameter
of the muzzle. Sight through the bore sight and bring the
muzzle thread on a well-defined point of an object at or
beyond the mean range for the piece. If a bore sight is not
available the vent or a thread in the vertical diameter of
the breech may be used. With the sight in adjustment on
the sight bracket and the vertical wire set at normal, adjust
the sight standard until the vertical wire of the sight is
brought on the point.
527. The azimuth indices of the guns of a battery are set
so that when the guns are aimed at a point near the main
channel about mid-range from the battery the azimuth reading
is the same for each this to be the correct azimuth from
;

the directing point or gun. In the event of there being two

channels of equal importance a point at mid-range and midwiiy
between the channels should be taken. By this means the
azimuth differences due to gun displacement may be disre-
garded and in Case III the guns laid at the azimuth of the
target from the directing point or gun.
528. In gun batteries of the primary armament range differ-
ences are stenciled on the base ring or on the step of the
loading platform so that the proper correction for the gun
displacement Is the number nearest an index marked on the
carriage near the elevation scale.
529. The orientation of mortars should be tested frequently
and the setting of the azimuth indices corrected if necessary.
Two convenient methods are as follows
First. Having established two iutervisible monuments in
rear of the pits, and having determined .-xccurately the azimuth
of the line joining them, proceed as follows
Adjust a transit, set it up over a monument from which
the pit may be seen, take a reading on the other monument
and record It take a reading on a point in the pit and record
;

it. Move the transit to this point in the pit and backsight
on the monument record the reading.
;

Stretch strings across the vertical diameters of the breech

and muzzle point the mortar and the transit so that the axis
;

113
114 BORE SIGHTING, ORIENTATION, AND POINTING.

of tbe mortar and line of collimation of the transit coincide;

record the reading of the transit.
From the readings taken the azimuth of the mortar may be
computed and the index set.
The string across the breech may be omitted In which case
;

the axis of the mortar is fixed bj^ the muzzle string and vent,
the mortar being pointed at the transit when this is being done.
It must be remembered in calculating the azimuth that the
mortar is pointing in the opposite direction from the transit.
Second. By using the B. C. instrument in connection with
the transit when they are intervlsible, the transit being at
any point on the parapet from which it can be sighted into
the pit.
Adjust the transit. Set it up so that it can be sighted on
the mortar and B. C. instrument ; sight on the latter and
record the reading. Sight the B. 0. instrument on the transit
and record the reading. Point the mortar and transit so that
the axis of the mortar coincides with the line of collimation
of the transit and record the transit reading. From the read-
ings the mortar azimuth may be computed and the index set.
The correct setting of the index should be Indicated by a
tool mark on the racer.
530. The adjustment of quadrants attached to mortars
should be tested frequently and corrected by using a clino-
meter or a standard quadrant known to be In adjustment.

METHODS OF POINTING.

531. Case I.—This method of pointing is used only with

rapid-fire guns where means for laying in elevation by quad-
rant have not been provided.
Direction and elevation are given by the sight.
The gun pointer adjusts the sight in its seat and sets the
elevation and deflection scales for the indicated range and
deflection, respectively. He keeps the line of sight as nearly
as possible on the designated point of the target and the piece
is flred as soon after the command READY as it is aimed
accurately.
In firing a series of shots he observes the splashes if pos-
sible and, when necessary, changes the setting of his sight to
correct for the observed defiections. He changes the elevation
to correspond to the changing range of the target or on orders
from the battery commander.
With two gun pointers, one controls the elevation and the
other the direction.
532. Case II.— This is the normal method of pointing all
guns. Direction is given by the sight and elevation by an
elevation or range scale attached to the carriage. For guns
of the primary armament ranges corrected for the time of
the next bell are received at the gun every fifteen seconds.
The range setter follows continuously in elevation, regulating
the speed of the elevating handwheel so that the index indicates
 BORE SIGHTING, ORIENTATION, AND POINTING. 115

the correct range at tlie third stroke of the bell. By noting

the time-range relation the range setter should be able to per-
form this operation so that the gun is laid continuously in
elevation.
The gun pointer sets his sight to the deflection ordered and
traverses or directs the traversing detail so as to keep the
vertical wire continuously on the designated part of the target,
except for disappearing carriages for a few seconds while the
truck is at the breech. If he is on the target he iires or gives
the command FIRE at the command READY of the gun com-
mander if not. as soon thereafter as the gun is pointed. When
;

possible to observe the fall of his own shot he corrects the

deflection by moving the vertical wire the amount and in the
direction of the observed error unless otherwise ordered by
the battery commander.
533. Case III.— This method of pointing is used exclusively
for mortars. Its use for guns is auxiliary and is limited to
batteries where the prevalence of fog or other local conditions
render it necessary in the opinion of the district commander
to prepare to fire at a target obscured from the guns.
Direction is given by the azimuth circle and elevation by
the elevation scale or by quadrant.
With guns the range setter proceeds as in Case II.
Corrected azimuths for the next bell are received at the
guns every fifteen seconds, and the gun pointer directs the
traversing detail so that the gun azimuth is continuously that
of the set forward point, except with guns on disappearing
carriages for the few seconds the truclc is at the breech.
Immediately after the withdrawal of the truck the speed of
traversing is increased slightly so as to compensate for the
delay. By using a stop watch and noting the approximate
time-azimuth relation the gun pointer should be able to keep
the piece trained continuously in azimuth without material
error at the time of firing. The gun pointer commands FIRE
at the command READY of the gun commander or as soon
thereafter as he is satisfied that the piece is laid properly.
If for any reason the gun pointer can not follow continuously
he may set to the azimuth received and fire on the next bell.

POINTING TESTS.

534. At least once each week a pointing test shall be made

at gun batteries of the primary armament. In order to
simplify the keeping of records, an assumed deflection for
wind and drift may be used during the test. This deflection
should be changed frequently during the drill so that gun
pointers may not know the reading that should be obtained
at the end of the time of flight. To accomplish this the
platen of the deflection board is set for the assumed deflection,
and the setting is not changed so long as the same assumed
deflection is used.
A noncommissioned ofl5cer uses a stop watch and a time-
of-flight table. The gun pointer sets his sight at the de-
116 BORE SIGHTING, ORIENTATION, AND POINTING.

iaectlon receivedfrom the plotting room, which is that obtained

from the deflection board by combining the correction for
angular travel during the time of flight with the assumed
deflection for wind and drift. With guns on nondisappearing
carriages he directs the traversing so as to follow the target
continuously, keeping the vertical wire on the designated
point ; with guns on disappearing carriages he waits until
the truclv has been withdrawn from the breech before the
piece is traversed. In each case he gives the command FIRE
as soon after the command READY as he is on the target;
traversing is stopped and then he follows the target with the
vertical wire. The noncommissioned oflicer with the stop
watch starts it at the command FIRE; commands HALT and
stops the watch at the expiration of the time of flight. The
gun pointer stops following wth the vertical wire at the com-
mand HAIT, when the reading of the deflection scale should
be the same as the assumed deflection for wind and drift.
If not, the difference is the error in predicting and pointing.
—
Example. Assumed deflection, 3.65 deflection sent to gun
;

pointer, 3.20 reading of the deflection scale at end of time of

;

flight, 3.60. 3.65—3.60=0.05, the error.

535. The excellence of the gun pointer's work is determined,
first, by the accuracy of his pointing; second, by the prompt-
ness with which he is able to give the command FIRE after
the piece is ready.
536. For each trial, records are kept of the time from LOAD
to FIRE, the range to the target, the time from READY to
FIRE, and the deflection error one copy is forwarded to
;

the post commander and one copy posted on the bulletin board
of the company.
537. With disappearing guns it is important that the gun
pointer be trained to get on the target in the time necessary
to close the breech plus the tripping interval, so that in prac-
tice or action he can flre as soon as the gun is in battery.
When the gun is not tripped, the command READY should not
be given until the end of the tripping interval.
538. Once each week the following test shall be made at
mortar batteries. The battery commander is assisted by an
officer, or noncommissioned oflicer, equipped with a stop watch
and a time-of-flight table. The azimuth of a predicted
point and the corresponding time of flight are sent to the
battery commander, who sets his instrument to the azi-
muth of the predicted point, the vertical wire at normal. As
the target passes the vertical wire of his Instrument, he com-
mands FIRE, and follows the target by turning the disk
crank. The assistant starts the stop watch at the command
FIRE and calls " halt " at the expiration of the time of flight.
The battery commander ceases tracking and the assistant
records the reading of the instrument.
The difference between this reading and the azimuth of
the set-forward point as determined from the plotting board
is the error in prediction.
 BORE SIGHTING, ORIENTATION, AND POINTING. 117

—
Example. Time of flight, 461; seconds azimuth of pre-
;

dicted point, 217.40°;azimutli of set-forward point, 214.49° ;

reading of the azimuth instrument, 214.59° error in pre-

;

diction, 0.10°.
539. Records of this test are made. One copy is forwarded
to the post commander and one copy posted on the company
bulletin board.
540. Rapid-fire gun batteries shall have frequent drills at
pointing and simulating fire at moving objects. Immediately
before the simulated firing begins the gun pointer makes a
deflection correction for the movement of the target during
the time of flight. To do this he sets the index of deflec-
tion scale at normal, traverses the gun until the line of sight
is a little In front of some point of the target and stops
traversing; when the selected point comes on the line of
sight he keeps it there during the time of flight by turning
the deflection screw. Then he observes the reading of the
deflection scale and sets the vertical wire an equal distance
on the opposite side of the normal.
The time of flight to the nearest second is given by the gun
commander, and the gun pointer measures time by counting.
The gun pointer sets the sight for elevation and follows the
tai'get, keeping the gun pointed continuously as far as prac-
ticable.
 Chaptek IX.

FIKE AND MINE COM-MANDS.

THE FIRE COMMAND.
541. The fire commander is responsible to the battle com-
mander for the tactical efficiency of his fire command.
542. The fire commander is both an administrative and
tactical commander. His administrative duties are confined
to those affecting the tactical efficiency of his command. In
general, he exercises his administrative duties verbally or
informally.
General orders to his fire command are issued only from
post headquarters.
543. All communications to or from post headquarters affect-
ing his fire command are referred to him for his information
and remark. He has no office of record for information con-
;

cerning his fire command he consults the records of post

headquarters.
His tactical responsibility relates to the condition of the
material and to the effleiency of the personnel of his command.
He is responsible that the post commander Is Informed as to
any deficiency of equipment or supplies.
On days of battery drill for his fire command he visits the
batteries of his command, and on days of indoor Instruction
he visits the companies assigned to his fire command during the
instruction hour.
He requires a thorough knowledge of the installation,
equipment, system of fire control, and drill on the part of the
officers of his command, and encourages efforts for the im-
provement thereof.
He should familiarize himself with any modifications or
changes requested or made by battery commanders, and when-
ever he is satisfied from an observation of their use in daily
drill that they give reasonable promise of increased efficiency
he should recommend their use in target practice and indorse
on the report of the battery commander his opinion of the
advantages or disadvantages in the changes or modifications
proposed.
He exercises supervision of battery target practice as pre-
scribed in orders.
At night drill or action he controls the particular search-
lights assigned as illuminating lights for his fire area, and
is responsible to the battle commander for their efficient use.
118
 : :

FIRE AND MINE COMMANDS. 119

In battle command drill or in action he takes up promptly

the attack of the targets assigned to him by the battle com-
mander.
When ordered by the battle commander to assume the exer-
cise of independent fire action, or whenever for any reason
the battle commander's station is not manned, he fights the
batteries of his command in accordance with his own judgment.
He orders " BATTERY COMMANDER'S ACTION " whenever, in
his opinion, the progress of the attack renders such action
advisable, provided " FIRE COMMANDER'S ACTION " has been
ordered previously by the battle commander, or provided emer-
gency renders it necessary.
544. In exercising fire-control the fire commander determines
the order of fire unless this has been prescribed by the battle
commander.
545. To order unrestricted fire, the fire commander assigns
certain targets to certain batteries and commands COMMENCE
FIRING.
To order restricted fire, he may give any of the following
commands
BATTERY , FIRE WHEN IN RANGE (or AT
YARDS). This requires the battery to commence firing as
soon as the assigned target is in range, or at the indicated
range.
BATTERY , FIRE ONE SHOT; COMMENCE FIRING.
This restricts the fire to a single shot from one gun.
BATTERY , FIRE ONE
(or more) ROUNDS; COM-
MENCE FIRING. This restricts the fire to a certain number
of rounds, consisting of one shot from each gun of the battery.
BATTERY , FIRE AT INTERVAL; COM-
MENCE FIRING. This command fixes the rate of fire.
BATTERY FIRE ON SALVO POINT NO.
,
.

This directs the battery commander to fire a salvo at each

vessel as it passes the designated salvo point.
BATTERY , BATTERY COMMANDER'S ACTION.
This places the action of a battery entirely in the hands of its
commander.
commands which may be given are as follows
Additional
FIRE AT SHIPS IN ORDER IN COLUMN; COMMENCE
FIRING. This requires that the vessels be fired upon in order
in column beginning with the leading ship, continuing the
fire until the ship is out of action, and then changing to the
CHANGE TARGET is given. FIRE
next or until the command
AT SHIPS IN ORDER IN LINE FROM RIGHT (or LEFT);
COMMENCE FIRING, is the corresponding command when the
ships are in line.
PREPARE FOR ACTION. This requires that the guns be
prepared for loading and the battery held ready for action.
CEASE FIRING. This requires that the battery stop firing
instantly.
 :

120 FIRE AND MINE COMMANDS.

CHANGE TARGET. TMs requires tliat the battery change

target according to instructions.
TARGET OUT OF ACTION. Tliis indicates tliat a certain
vessel is considered out of action, and that it is no longer to
be fired upon.
At night the target may be indicated by the command,
TARGET IN NO. . For example BATTERY DE RUSSY,
:

TARGET IN NO. 1, FIRE TWO ROUNDS, COMMENCE FIRING.

This requires that Battery Be Russy fire two rounds at the
target illuminated by Searchlight No. 1.
At the conclusion of drill practice or action, the fire com-
mander commands CLOSE STATION.
546. The fire commander should have the assistance of a
communication oflacer, who has charge of the system of com-
munications and the fire commander's manning party. In
case an oflicer is not available, a noncommissioned officer may
be assigned to this duty.
547. To prepare for drill or action the communication offi-
cer inspects the equipment of the station, verifies the adjust-
ment of the position-finding instrument, receives the reports of
the chiefs of detail, and reports to the fire commander: " Sir,
fire-command stations in order," or I'eports defects he is un-
able to remedy without delay. His special duty is to trans-
mit the orders of the fire commander to the battery com-
manders.
548. Each member of the manning party on reaching his
station examines the instrument to which he is assigned,
makes the prescribed tests and adjustments, and reports to
his chief of detail. On completion of the examination each
chief of detail at the primary and secondary stations reports
to the communication officer: "Sir, F' (or F") in order," or
reports defects he is unable to remedy without delay.
549. The senior chief of detail at each station is in charge
of the station. When the command CLOSE STATION is re-
ceived he sees that the instruments are secured and covered,
that the switches controlling the electric circuits are left open,
and that the windows are closed and fastened securely.
The duties of the members of the details are similar to those
prescribed for the corresponding members of the fire-control
section of a gun battery.
550. On days of battery drill the details are instructed in
use of their equipment and exercised in vessel tracking.

FIBE-CONTEOL SYSTEM OF A EIRE COMMAND.

Manning parties.

551. Primary station

Fire commander.
Communication officer.
Electrician-sergeant.
Observer.
 :

FIEE AXD MIXE COMMANDS. 121

551. Primary station —

Continued.
Reader.
Operator for the searcbligbt controller.
Operator for eacli telephone.
Plotter and assistant plotter, and two arm setters,
when plotting board is used.
Orderly.
552. Secondary station
Observer.
Reader.
Indication of a target.

553. The commander indicates the target to the ob-

fire
server at F"in the manner prescribed in paragraphs 480
to 483, inclusive.
554. Atarget is indicated to a battery commander by its
description and general location. In addition, it may be
tracked for two or three observations and its predicted posi-
tion for a convenient interval ahead located. This predicted
position is relocated for the battery by means of the panto-
graph attachment of the F' plotting board, when provided,
and the relocated range and azimuth sent to the battery com-
mander's station. The fire commander's instrument is set to
the predicted azimuth and " now " called over the telephone as
the target crosses the vertical wire.
555. If it be desired to concentrate the fire of two or more
batteries on the same target and but one fire command is
in action, the fire commander having put one battery on as
prescribed above may command BATTERY (or BAT-
TERIES and ) TARGET UNDER FIRE, COM-
MENCE FIRING. This method should not be followed if
more than one fire command is in action, since a battery
commander might mistake the target.
THE MINE COMMAND.

556. The mine commander is in direct command of the

elements of the mine defense during drill and action. His
station is at the mine primary, which is connected by tele-
phone to the battle commander's station. He bears the same
relation to the battle commander as do the fire commanders
and his duties are similar to theirs.
557. The mine commander Is responsible that the property
ofiBcer requests for all material and apparatus necessary to
carry out the approved scheme for mining the harbor he is ;

responsible, further, that the property officer keeps this

material and apparatus in proper condition for immediate
service.
558. The senior company officer of the mine command is the
property officer and obtains from the artillery engineer all
necessary material and apparatus for the mine defense. He
has direct charge of the storeroom, cable tanks, loading room.
 : : : :

122 FIRE AND MINE COMMANDS.

wharves, boats, boathouses, and mining casemate. All person-
nel of the mine command are subject to his orders lor service
in connection with caring for or operating any of this material.

FIRE-CONTEOL SYSTEM OF A MINE COMMAND.

Manning parties.

559. Primary station :

Mine commander.
Assistant mine commander.
Observer.
Reader.
Searchlight operator.
Operator for each telephone.
Plotter and tvs'O arm setters.
Orderly.
560. Double primary station
Double the above except mine commander and
orderly.
561. Secondary station
Observer.
Reader.
562. Doul)le secondary station
Double the above.
563. Casemate
Tvco casemate electricians.
Operator for each telephone.
564. The methods of operating the fire-control system are
similar to those used for gun fire-control. Such slight modi-
fications as are necessary will suggest themselves in service.
 Chapter X.
THE BATTLE COMMAND.
565. The battle commander is a tactical commander only.
566. Responsibility for the sufficiency and condition of the
material of the battle command devolves upon the command-
ing officers of the districts and posts in which it is located.
567. The battle commander is responsible to the district
commander for the tactical efhciency of the command in battle
command exercise, at drill, at practice, or in action.
He commands the fire action from his station, from which
the whole battle area and the approaches thereto should be
visible.
He must have a full knowledge of the nature and position of
the mines and obstructions in his battle area.
He is incommunication with each fire and mine command
of his battle command and with the headquarters of the dis-
trict commander.
He is informed by the district commander of the defensive
dispositions made to protect the flanks and rear of his com-
mand in case of an attack by a landing party, and his duties
in connection therewith.
By a careful study of his battle area and consideration of
the location and strength of his fire and mine commands he
prepares plans of defense to be used against the forms of
attack liable to be adopted by an enemy. While It is not
practicable to anticipate all the conditions that will arise dur-
ing an engagement nor all methods of attack that might be
adopted by an enemy of initiative and resource, there are
certain forms of attack which may be anticipated and for
which a single command from the battle commander will be
sufficient to start all or part of the units of his command to
defeat the object of the enemy, leaving the battle commander
free to observe the progress of the engagement and determine
at comparative leisure how best to inflict the greatest injury
upon the enemy while preventing the object of the attack.
For example, if the attack is a reconnaissance in force to de-
termine the strength and location of the batteries of the de-
fense, the batteries to be used by the defense, and those to
be masked ha\'ing been decided upon in advance, a single
command, as FIRST GENERAL DEFENSE PLAN sent to the
fire commanders and by them transmitted to the battery com-
manders, will be sufficient to start the designated Ijatteries
flring and notify the battery commanders of other batteries
that they are to hold their fire in reserve until special orders
to the contrary are given.
123
124 THE BATTLE COMMAND.

Should the attack take the form of an attempt to run by,

the following plan of defense might be adopted All guns and
:

mortars to be concentrated on the leading vessel until CHANGE

is given, when all gun batteries change to the second vessel and
the mortars to the last vessel in the attacking column since,
;

if the first vessel has been put out of action by the concen-
trated fire of the battle command, it will be reasonable to
suppose that the gun Are alone will be sutficient to complete the
confusion at the head of the column and efforts to disable and
confuse the rear should be made with a view to preventing the
retreat of the enemy. A single command, as SECOND GEN-
ERAL DEFENSE PLAN, would be sufl3cient to put this plan of
defense in operation.
568. Only the most general directions can be laid down, and
each battle commander must decide upon and prepare the
plans best suited to his battle area.
569. Each battle command drill should open by drill at one
of the defense plans in order that all units of the command
may be thoroughly conversant with their duties. The latter
portion of the drill should be devoted to the assignment of
special targets to fire commands to simulate an action to which
no general defense plan applies.
570. A communication officer has charge of the battle com-
mander's station. To prepare for drill or action, he inspects
the equipment, except that pertaining to the searchlight sys-
tem, verifies the ad.iustment of the position finder, receives the
reports of the chiefs of detail, and reports to the battle com-
mander, " Sir, station in order," or reports defects that he is
unable to remedy without delay. He has charge of the
communications to the fire and mine commanders' stations
during drill, practice, or action, transmits orders of the battle
commander to and receives communications from such stations.
571. The searchlight officer has charge of the searchlight
service and of the manning party assigned thereto during drill,
practice, or action. His station is at the battle commander's
station or within speaking distance of the battle commander.
He is responsible to the battle commander for the tactical ef-
ficiency of the searchlight service and for prompt reports of
defects in equipment to the artillery engineer.
572. Lights intended primarily for the mine service remain
ordinarily under the control of the mine commander, but when
the battle commander deems it necessary to use a mine-field
light for searching, such light is under control of the search-
light officer temporarily.
573. Prior to drill or action the searchlight officer Inspects
his equipment, receives the reports of his assistants, and re-
ports to the battle commander, " Sir, searchlight system in
order," or reports defects that he is unable to remedy without
delay. His special duty is to maintain a thorough watch and
search of the battle area.
574. Each member of the battle commander's details on
reaching his station e.xamiues the instrument to which he is
 THE BATTLE COMMAND. 125

assigned, makes tlie prescribed tests and adjustments, and re-

ports to tlie communication officer, " Sir, in order," or
reports defects lie is unable to remedy without delay.

FIEE-CONTKOL SYSTEM OF A BATTLE COMMAND.

Munning party.

575. Battle commander.

Communication officer.
Searctiliglit officer.
Master electrician.
Observer.
Reader.
Operator for each telephone.
Operator for each searchlight controller.
Orderlies.
Indication of a target.

576. During the day the battle commander need Indicate the
target in a general way only, no attempt being made to give
the exact location of the ship or ships by range and azimuth.
If two or more squadrons enter the battle area, a particular
one may be indicated to the fire commander by its relative
position.
When the squadrons are in different well-known channels
they may be indicated as the squadron or vessels in
channel.
When the attacking ships are in well-defined column they
may be indicated by their position in the column.
577. Targets may be Indicated at night by means of the
searchlights, a battlecommander indicating a target to the fire
commander by covering it with a searchlight. The battle
commander may cause a target to be illuminated and followed
by some light, and direct any particular fire commander or all
of the fire commanders to open fire on such a target.
578. To order unrestricted fire, the battle commander as-
sigms targets to fire commanders and commands COMMENCE
FIRING.
To order restricted fire, he uses commands similar to those
prescribed for fire commanders, substituting the name of the
fire commandfor that of the battery, or transmits instructions
to the individual batteries of his command through the fire
commanders, using the commands prescribed in paragraph 54.5.
579. To place the action of a fire command entirely in the
hands of its commander, the battle commander designates the
fire command and commands riRE COMMANDER'S ACTION.
If a particular squadron is also designated, the action will be
limited to that squadron.
 Chaptee XI.

THE ARTILLERY DISTRICT.

580. Districts are established, tlieir limits defined, head-

quarters designated, and commanders assigned in orders from
the War Department.
581. The personnel of artillery district headquarters con-
sists of the district commander, the adjutant, the quarter-
master, the ordnance officer, the artillery engineer, and the
enlisted force.
582. With the sanction of the department commander the
commanding officer of an artillery district may continue to
exercise the more important functions of his command when
absent temporarily from his district on artillery duty within
the department.
583. The district commander is both a tactical and an
administrative officer. Unless also a battle commander, he
exercises tactical functions in a supervisory way only.
584. The district commander requires of his oflicers a thor-
ough knowledge of the installation, equipment, system of
fire control and drill for battle, fire, mine and battery com-
mands and also encourages a study of them with a view to
improvement therein. Whenever in his opinion a proposed
change gives reasonable promise of increased efficiency he
should authorize a test of it at the next regular target
practice.
585. The district commander makes inspections of his dis-
trict at periods prescribed in War Department orders. He
has control within the district of all matters relating to in-
struction, drill and target practice. Heprescribes the hours
of drill and instruction for the district.
586. Subject to control by the department commander, the
operation of all means of water transportation assigned by
competent authority for the exclusive use of the artillery
district, including harbor vessels, tugs, lighters, dispatch
boats, and launches, are under the supervision of the artillery
district commander, whose duty it is to see that economy is
exercised in their maintenance and operation. He combines
the operations of these vessels so as to limit them to the lowest
number that can perform the service satisfactorily, bearing in
mind that, when needed for artillery drill, vessels ordinarily
engaged in the transportation of troops and supplies, or in
other duty, should be withdrawn temporarily to provide an
efficient drill service.
126
 THE ARTILLERY DISTRICT. 127

587. The district commander shall attend all service target

practice and exercise general siipervision.
588. The district commander conducts combined artillery
drill and tactical exercises of all the elements of defense of
his district during the annual encampment and at such other
times as he may deem necessary.
During hostilities he charged with the supervision of all
is
military operations in his district, and in connecton therewith
establishes and maintains a system of security and informa-
tion on both land and water fronts and keeps the various
subordinate commanders informed as to conditions.
589. The district commander regulates the boat service so
that a target may be towed one day each week for each post.
When a target is towed the same rules are observed with
respect to signals during drill as govern during practice, and
the same care should be exercised in applving them.
590. The district commander designates at least one night
each week for night drill, and prior to each drill prescribes
its character.
591. The district artillery engineer is charged with the
accountability for all engineer and signal property, stores,
and installations that have been turned over to the Coast
Artillery, and all mine property, stores, and installations in
the artillery district. He inspects all such property, stores,
and installations at each post in his district at least once
each calendar month.
He makes timely requisitions for each post separately for
engineer, signal, and mine stores and for all necessary equip-
ment required for the approved installations in the artillery
district, and is responsible, under the artillery district com-
mander, for their sufficiency.
He issues engineer and signal property and stores to the
artillery engineers at posts and mine property and stores to
the commanding officers of companies and detachments as-
signed to the mine defense.
He recommends the transfer, when necessary, of available
engineer, signal, and mine property from one post to another
within his district to the artillery district commander, who is
authorized to make such transfer unless the efficient operation
of any approved installation or scheme of defense will be
impaired thereby. No apparatus or plant installed in any
fortification, nor any article or material belonging to such
plant, the efficient operation of which will be impaired thereby,
shall be transferred without the approval of the Chief of
Coast Artillery and the chief of the supply department con-
cerned.
592. Xo increase of load upon any fortification electric
plant beyond that contemplated at the time of installation, or
transfer of the same or any essential part of it, or any change
in the electrical connections thereof, shall be made without the
approval of the Chief of Coast Artillery and the chief of the
supply department concerned.
82615—09 9
 :

128 THE ARTILLERY DISTRICT.

593. The district artillerj' engineer has general supervision

over all authorized repairs to the property for which he is
accountable.
594. Minor repairs that can be made with the facilities at
his disposal are made under the supervision of the post artil-
lery engineer those which can not be so made are reported by
;

him to the post commander and to the district artillery engi-

neer. The necessity for all repairs that can not be made with
the facilities available in an artillery district are reported by
the district artillery engineer, through the artillery district
commander, to the representative of the proper supply de-
partment charged with the installation, supply, and repair in
that locality. If repairs to power plants, reported as neces-
sary, can not be made with the facilities at the command of
the post artillery engineer, but can be made with the aid of
the resident ordnance machinist and by the use of material
from the artillery district ordnance repair shop, the district
artillery engineer requests the artillery district ordnance offi-
cer to make such repairs, which the latter is authorized to do,
provided that the work on the armament be not interfered
with. In accordance with the regulations of the respective
departments concerned, reports of such repairs shall be made
as follows
(o) Report by the representative of the department per-
forming the actual work.
(6) Report by the representative of the department even-
tually chargeable with the cost of the work.
595. Whenever working parties are sent into an artillery
district for the purpose of making repairs the ofQcer or other
person in charge shall notify the artillery district commander.
Before such parties are sent into an artillery district, the
artillery district commande!' shall be consulted with a view to
selecting a time that will interfere as little as possible with
drill and target practice, having due regard for the efficient
and economical execution of the work.
596. The district artillery engineer, or a suitably qualified
olHcer selected by the artillery district commander, tests In
accordance with orders from the War Department the mine
cable stored in the district, recording the same in the cable
book supplied from the torpedo depot.
597. The artillery district ordnance officer is charged with
the accountability for all ordnance property and ordnance
stores pertaining to the modern seacoast armament and equip-
ment in the artillery district that have been turned over to
the artillery, and inspects all such property and stores in the
artillery district at least once each month.
He makes timely requisition for ordnance stores and sup-
plies for each post separately, and is responsible, under the
artillery district commander, for their sufficiency.
He issues to post ordnance officers on memorandum receipts
all ordnance property and supplies pertaining to the arma-
ment at their posts. He recommends the transfer of avail-
 THE ARTILLERY DISTRICT. 129

able ordnance property and stores from one post to another

vvitliin tlie artillery district to the artillery district commander
\^'lio is authorized to make such transfers, but the transfer of
guns, carriages, and range finders, or other material per-
manently emplaced, shall not be made without authority from
the Secretary of War.
He has charge of all ordnance repair shops installed in the
artillery district, supervision over resident and other machin-
ists of the Ordnance Department in the absence of the district
armament officer, and general supervision over all authorized
repairs to the property for which he is accountable.
 Chapter XII.

THE POST.

598. The senior line officer for duty at a post is post com-
mander. As post commander he exercises administrative
control only.
599. Post commanders detail officers at their posts to per-
form duties corresponding to those of the artillery district
staff officers.
As tactical commander he may be battery commander, fire
or mine commander, battle or district commander, depending
on the armament of his post and the organization of the dis-
trict in which it is located. As an administrative commander,
certain of his duties involve tactical responsibility.
He is responsible that duties connected with the care of the
armament are given precedence without exception over all
other post duties.
He is responsible for the sufficiency of the material and the
efficiency of the personnel at his post.
He is responsible that the artillery personnel attend the
artillery drills and exercises prescribed in orders.
He is responsible for the proper execution of all orders
affecting artillery instruction and drills, and that the regula-
tions affecting target practice are adhered to.
600. Details for flre-control stations, except those for bat-
tery and mine fire-control stations, are made from post head-
quarters.
601. An officer at each post is detailed as artillery en-
gineer; when the post is district headquarters the district
artillery engineer is post artillery engineer.
602. The artillery engineer has charge of the maintenance
of communications for fire-control, the operation of power and
light plants for artillery and post purposes, and the care and
maintenance of searchlights and their controlling mechanisms.
He has charge of artillery instruction in visual signaling, of
the service of signal stations, and of the maintenance of post
telephone and telegraph lines.
He issues the stores necessary for the maintenance and
preservation of the property with which he is charged, and
makes such authorized repairs as the facilities at hand will
permit. He reports through the post commander to the dis-
trict artillery engineer the repairs which he is not able to
make.
603. The artillery engineer prepares statements of the
articles supplied by the Engineer Department and Signal
130
 THE POST. 131

Corps required for the use, repair, and care of the power and
communication installations in his charge, and submits the
same, through the post commander, to the district artillery-
engineer for his information in preparing estimates and
requisitions.
604. Unless required to command a tactical unit, the artil-
lery engineer shall not be assigned as a member of any man-
ning party, but shall be present for all drills and go wherever
his services are needed in maintaining the service for which
he is responsible.
G05. The artillery engineer is responsible for all fire-control
stations and power plants out of commission. Once each
week the post commander should supply him with the neces-
sary details so that he may test the condition of the installed
communication apparatus out of commission. Any defects dis-
covered must be remedied at once.
606. It is prescribed in orders that the fire-control instal-
lation shall be tested at least once each year under the direc-
tion of the department commander. The artillery engineer
shall be present at this test. Such portion of the equipment
as is stored under paragraph 889 shall be installed and tested.
If at any time the maintenance test required by Signal Corps
Manual No. 8, p. 344, indicates the existence of a serious de-
fect in a line, complete test shall be made at once by the artil-
lery engineer and if there is material deterioration, report
forwarded to the Adjutant-General for the information of the
Chief of Coast Artillery.
607. The artillery engineer keeps records of all breakdowns
and failures of apparatus, and on December 31 of each year
forwards a condensed report to The Adjutant-General of the
Army for the information of the Chief of Coast Artillery.
608. Although the power plants of seacoast batteries, in-
cluding reserve plants, are under direct control and charge of
the artillery engineer, battery commanders have access to
those pertaining to their batteries and in case of emergency
exercise such control as they deem necessary, reporting the
facts to the post commander when such emergency has arisen.
609. While battery commanders are responsible for the care
of the apparatus entrusted to them, the artillery engineer is
responsible for its maintenance. The battery commander
remedies minor defects only. Repairs are made by the artil-
lery engineer.
610. The artillery engineer is entirely responsible for the
meteorological station, the tide station, the searchlight sta-
tions, the wireless and such other signal stations as may be
established.
611. The artillery engineer is assisted by such master elec-
tricians, engineers, electrician-sergeants first and second class,
master gunners, and firemen, as may be assigned for duty at
the post, and such additional enlisted men as may be neces-
sary to enable him to keep all installed machinery, storage bat-
132 THE POST.

teries, cable, pole lines,and otlier electrical and power appa-

ratus in serviceable condition and to operate the same.
612. Master electricians are members of battle command
manning parties. During drill they go wherever their services
are needed. Under the direction of the artillery engineer they
have general supervision of the electrical and power installa-
tions of an artillery district. They assist the artillery en-
gineer in his work, and are required to make inspections and
tests of electrical plants and installations, and perform such
other technical duties as may be necessary in the districts
to which they are assigned. When there is only one master
electrician in an artillery district he should not be assigned
to specific duties at one post to the exclusion of other posts.
Their other duties are defined in War Department orders.
613. Electrician-sergeants are members of fire and mine
command manning pai'ties. During drill they are under
orders of their respective fire and mine commanders for
maintaining fire-control apparatus. They are responsible
primarily for the maintenance of the communications of the
fire and mine commands and make tests and repairs under
direction of the artillery engineer so that the fire-control
apparatus will be ready for service at all times. Their other
duties are defined in War Department orders.
614. Engineers supervise, care for, and operate the power
plants, machine and repair shops, and such mechanical and
electrical apparatus used for power purposes as may be
placed under their charge. Engineers may be required to
perform such other technical duties as may be necessary in
the district or at the post to which they are assigned.
615. Firemen are assigned to power plants. They perform
such duties as pertain to the care and operation of boilers
and accessories, including the police of the boiler and engine
room. They may be required to assist the engineer in his
work.
616. Master gunners are employed in photographic work
and seacoast engineering, in the preparation of tables, charts,
and maps, and for such other technical artillery duties as
they may be qualified to perform.

Meteorological station.

617. The
station is in charge of a meteorological observer,
who isresponsible for the station, the property therein, and
the care, preservation, and adjustment of the instruments. He
must be present in his station whenever the armament is
served. As soon as he arrives at his station he adjusts the
mercurial barometer and tests the aneroid, noting any correc-
tion to be made. Then he connects the electrical device (if
one is provided) of the anemometer, adjusts the stop-watch
device if necessary, and notes whether the wind vane works
freely. He reports to the battle commander's station, " Mete-
orological station in order," or reports defects he is unable to
remedy without delay.
 THE POST. 133

He reads the barometer and thermometer and by means of

the atmosphere board determines the atmosphere reference
number. He reads the azimuth of the wind and determines
its velocity by means of ten readings of the anemometer.
Then he reports to all Are commanders' stations the barometer
and thermometer reading, as well as the atmosphere reference
number and the ^'elocity and azimuth of the wind.
618. The velocity and azimuth of the wind should be recorded
at least every twenty minutes, and oftener if necessary; any
sudden change, either in direction or velocity, of any con-
siderable magnitude is reported at once to the fire command-
ers, "^'hen the atmosphere reference number changes by
more than 1 per cent, the barometer and thermometer readings
and the new atmosphere reference number are reported to
the fire commanders.
619. The meteorological observer keeps a complete record
of all meteorological messages.

Tide station.

620. The station is in charge of a tide observer. He must

be present in his station whenever the armament is seived.
He is responsible for the station and the instruments therein.
On arriving at his station he reports to the battle commander's
station, " Tide station in order," or reports defects he is unable
to remedy without delay, and telephones the state of the tide
to the fire commanders. Thereafter he reports the tide for
every change of one-half foot.
 :

Chapter XIII.
ARTILLERY INSPECTION.
621. The armament is manned, instruments adjusted, and
everytlilng prepared for service.
622. Tile inspector visits the stations and emplacements in
such order as may be most convenient. During the inspection
of a command he is accompanied by its commander.
623. As the inspector approaches a fire-control or other sta-
tion the officer or noncommissioned officer in charge commands
ATTENTION and salutes. The equipment is inspected and
operated as may be necessary to determine its working condi-
tion and the efficiency of the personnel.
624. As theinspector approaches a battery he is met and
saluted by the battery commander, who accompanies him
during the inspection of the battery.
625. When the inspector approaches a gun emplacement the
gun commander commands ATTENTION, OPEN BREECH, and
gives -such other commands as may be necessary for the exe-
cutio-i of the inspector's instructions.
626. As the inspector enters the pit of a mortar battery the
pitcommander commands ATTENTION, PREPARE FOR IN-
SPECTION, and as he approaches each piece the gun pointer
commands OPEN BREECH and such other commands as may
be necessary for the execution of the inspector's instructions.
627. At the conclusion of the inspection the battery com-
mander executes such drills as the inspector may order.
628. An artillery inspection should be conducted so as to
include the following:
(a) An examination of the equipments, the implements and
all parts of the guns, carriages, and emplacements, special
attention being given to
Obturators, to see if they are adjusted properly and pads
in serviceable condition.
Elevating and traversing mechanisms.
Devices for running in and from battery.
Recoil cylinders.
Throttling valves.
Oil holes and grease cups.
Adjustment of sights and means of giving quadrant
elevation.
Adjustment of subscales of azimuth circles.
Firing attachments.
Firing batteries and circuits.
Motors and controllers.
Sponges.
Rammers.
Condition of doors.
Condition of drains and diagrams of same posted.
Condition of hoists.
134
 :

ABTILLEEY INSPECTION. 135

Condition of electric and other lignts.

Condition of electric installation and power plants.
Condition of galleries and magazines.
Condition of emplacements and grounds in their vlcinitj-.
—
(Note. All doors should be opened and closed. In pre-
paring guns, mortars, and their carriages for inspection the oil
need not be removed from bearing surfaces.)
(6) Examination of fire-control stations and apparatus,
special attention being given to condition and adjustment of
all instruments and appliances, tables, and charts.
—
(Note. Power plants, lights in magazines, and range trans-
mission apparatus on loading platforms and on carriages
should be In operation during the inspection.
At batteries in service the companies should be exercised
In serving the guns and mortars with dummy ammunition, in
tripping the guns, and in simulating fire at a moving target,
including all details of fire control. In testing the serv-
ice of the piece at inspection the time for service of ammu-
nition begins with the projectile on delivery tables at mortar
batteries, on the receiving table at gun batteries with hoists,
and on skids at the door of the ammunition room for gun
batteries without hoists; it ends with the projectile on the
truck in the loading position. The time for simulating firing
one shot from each gun or one salvo from a mortar pit begins
at the command LOAD, with the ammunition in the loading
position, the breechblock closed, and, with mortars, pieces
clamped at an elevation of 45° or more.)
(c) Examination of mining casemate, storeroom, loading
room, wharves, boathouses, cable tanks, and mine-planting
boats, special attention being given to
Operating boards.
Engines.
Motors and generators.
Storage batteries.
Sleeping rooms.
Greneral condition of buildings.
Painting of the mine cases.
Piling of the mine cases.
Ijubrication of screw threads on all apparatus.
Condition of anchors, distribution boxes, mooring ropes,
and raising ropes.
Condition of small tools and supplies.
Condition of cranes, tram cars, and trucks.
Storage of the cable and security of all ends above the
water.
And for boats:
General condition.
Condition of engines.
Condition of hoisting apparatus.
Condition of davits and blocks.
Condition of cable-laying apparatus.
Condition of small tools.
Condition of men's quarters.
 — :

Chapteb XIV.

TAEGET PRACTICE— SALUTES.

629. Special regulations governing target practice are pub-
lished in orders and artillery memoranda from the War
Department.
630. Coast-artillery target practice is divided into sub-
caliber practice and service practice.

STJBCALIBEB PRACTICE.

631. The object of subcaliber practice is to develop fire

efficiency.
632. Subcaliber practice at gun and mortar batteries con-
sists of
Battery practice
(a) Preliminary at fixed targets.
(&) Record, normal conditions, at moving targets.
(c) Record, emergency conditions, at moving
targets.
Fire or mine command practice at moving targets.
Battle command practice at moving targets.
633. Preliminary practice is for the purpose of adjusting
the subcaliber guns and determining the muzzle velocity, and
for preparing or verifying subcaliber range scales of rapid-
fire guns.
634. The emergency practice is for the purpose of simulat-
ing battery commander's action when the regular fire-control
installation is out of action.
635. The battery commander conducts battery practice the ;

fire commander, flre-command practice and tne battle com-

;

mander, battle-command practice.

636. The officer conducting the practice is responsible for
the safety of the field of fire.
637. The district commander determines when the practice
shall be by battery and when by fire or battle command. On
account of the effect of the wind on the target and on the light
projectile, subcaliber practice shall be held, so far as prac-
ticable, on clear, calm days.
638. In subcaliber practice the methods of fire control pre^
scribed for drill and service pi'actice are employed unless a
departure from the prescribed method has been authorized
to test devices or systems of drill with a view to improvement.
639. In order to simulate the conditions of service practice
the gun pointer of a gun on a disappearing carriage should
not be permitted to follow the target continuously during
subcaliber practice. Pie should be required to cease traversing
136
 —

TARGET PRACTICE —SALtJTES. 137

from the time the breech block is opened until the charge is
inserted, this being the time when, In actual loading, the
truck is at the breech. After the charge has been inserted
he should endeavor to get on the target In the time necessary
to close the breech, plus the tripping interval. The command
TRIP is given for each shot, and at this command the gun
commander starts a stop watch he calls READY at the end of
;

the tripping interval. The gun pointer is not permitted to

give the command FIRE before READY
Is called.
640. When possible, subcallber ammunition shall be expended
at the batteries to which the companies are regularly assigned.
641. Whenever the conditions of safety permit a company
having service practice away from its home station shall have
subcallber practice at its home station.

SERVICE PBACTICE.

648. Service practice is divided into

Battery practice.
Fire-command practice. .

Battle-command practice.
643. Service practice Is held at such times as may be desig-
nated by district commanders in accordance with orders from
the War Department.
644. The district commander shall be present in all cases
and exercise general supervision.
645. At posts where no field officer Is stationed the district
commander exercises the functions of fire commander and de-
tails staff officers accompanying him to assist In the duties
to be performed by ofiicers not belonging to the company firing.
646. When a company commander Is a fire or mine com-
mander a senior officer shall be detailed to act as fire or
mine commander during service target practice of his com-
pany.
Precautions for safety.

647. Service practice shall be preceded by careful instruc-

tion and shall not be held by a company of coast artillery
until such company is thoroughly familiar with all of the
equipment supplied for the service of the battery at which
the comijany is to fire.
648. iS^o man shall be detailed to a position at the practice
for which he has not been Instructed at a reasonable number
of drills immediately preceding the practice.
649. During target practice no flag or signal shall be dis-
played at any battery on shore, except at the firing point or at
some other point at which the range observing party on the
tug has had previous notice.
650. In case of a misfire In artillery practice the primer, if
it did not explode, may be removed after a delay of a few
seconds and a new one inserted; in case It did explode the
old primer should not be removed and a new one inserted
138 TARGET PRACTICE SALUTES.

within five minutes; when the primer explodes and the piece
misses flre the breech shall not be opened for at least ten
minutes. If there is doubt as to the explosion of the primer,
explosion shall be presumed.
651. If firing by electricity, the circuit should be broken
before the primer is removed. When using fixed ammunition
and percussion primers, a second trial of the primer should
be made if the firing device can be cocked by hand without
opening the breech, but if this also fails the breech must not
be opened and a new cartridge substituted within ten minutes.
If it is found necessary to open the breech when using obtu-
rating primers the vent should be examined and cleared if
necessary and the rear section of the powder charge pulled a
little to the rear (except in mortars) so that the mushroom
head will push it to its place, the breech closed, and another
primer tried.
652. The accumulation of black powder residue in the cham-
ber is liable to occur when firing blank charges or service
charges of black powder, and may occur due to the priming
charge when smokeless powder is used. Care must be taken
to prevent this accumulation. Therefore it is prescribed that
the chamber shall be sponged with a damp sponge after each
shot when firing blank charges or black powder charges and
that, in service practice, using smokeless powder, the firing
shall be suspended after each ten shots for the time necessary
to clean the chamber with a damp sponge. This action should
be taken at shorter intervals if it becomes apparent that resi-
due is accumulating to an undue extent. In service practice
the chamber and bore must be examined after each round by
No. 2, who must see that all sparks are extinguished and all
smouldering fragments are removed from the chamber before
the insertion of the powder charge for the next rovmd.
653. At the command or signal CEASE FIRING, lanyards
shall be detached. If using electric primers the circuit shall
be broken. With rapid-fire guns using metallic cartridge
cases the breech shall be opened. With machine guns the
mechanism shall be put to " safe." If firing is not to be
resumed, fixed ammunition and separate powder charges shall
be withdrawn. Projectiles not loaded and fused shall be
driven back and withdrawn. Separate projectiles loaded and
fused shall be left in the gun until a favorable time to fire
them on no account shall an attempt be made to drive them
;

back.
654. Responsibility for the safety of the field of fire rests
with the battle commander at battle command practice; and
with the fire commander at fire command and battery practice.
655. The battery commander is responsible for all necessary
precautions for safety at the battery.
656. No powder charge shall be delivered on the loading
platform until the piece is to be loaded.
657. Whenever a junior commander is ordered to flre under
circumstances which from his position he judges to be unsafe,
 TARGET PRACTICE SALUTES. 139

he shall hold fire until he can report the condition to the nest
higher commander.
658. The careful study and observance of all regulations,
orders, and circulars relating to target practice and to the
care, handling, and use of powder is enjoined upon all coast
artillery oflBcers.

BATTERY SEEVICE PKACTICE.

659. Before artillery i^ractice the battery commander shall

satisfy himself that all the material to be used at the practice
is ready for service, special attention being paid to the fol-
lowing :

Adjustment of observing instruments.

Condition of communications.
Adjustment of plotting board.
Adjustment of sights and sight standards at gun batteries.
Adjustment of azimuth indices at mortar batteries.
Adjustment of range scales of guns and quadrants of mor-
tars, using clinometer.
Condition of recoil systems and setting of the throttling
valves.
Condition of elevating and traversing mechanisms.
Adjustment of obturating devices.
Condition of shot trucks.
Weight and condition of projectiles.
Weight and condition of powder sections.
660. Prior to artillery practice the bore, including the
powder chamber of each piece to be used in practice, shall be
cleaned thoroughly and freed from grease and oil.
661. All powder to be used for target practice at any bat-
tery shall be stored in the service magazines of the battery at
which it Is to be used for at least two weeks before the trial
shots are fired.
662. After being stored in a magazine for two weeks the
temperature of the magazine may be taken as the temperature
of the powder without material error. The temperature of a
magazine should be taken immediately upon opening the doors.
It is taken at the beginning of each practice and reported on
the proper form.
663. Powder of the same lot shall be used for each series of
shots from a battery, including trial shots.
664. Powder marked for one caliber or piece must not be
used for any other caliber or piece of different chamber
capacity.
665. In any case In which poor practice is believed to have
been caused by defective powder a special detailed report
shall be made to the Chief of Ordnance through military
channels.
666. Projectiles shall be cleaned carefully before being in-
serted In the bore, lubricant removed, and the bourrelets
freed of paint.
 :

140 TARGET PRACTICE SALUTES.

667. Before record practice or action begins the range cor-

rection or probable muzzle velocity for the lot of powder to be
used is determined by trial sliots.
668. All trial shots are fired at fixed targets permanently
located If practicable. The standard pyramidal target sup-
plied by the Ordnance Department is used for both guns and
mortars when permanent targets have not been located. If
for any reason fixed targets can not be used, the trial shots
are fired at points whose azimuths from observing stations are
known instruments are set to these azimuths before each
;

trial shot is fired and splashes observed and plotted.

669. Trial shots should be fired with deliberation, the object
being, for guns, to determine the muzzle velocity to be used
for the record practice, and, for mortars, the total corrections
other than drift to be applied in the record practice. The ele-
vation and azimuth settings are verified before and examined
after each trial shot.
670. Careful meteorological observations are taken imme-
diately before firing each trial shot from guns and the data
furnished the battery commander concerned.
671. For the 8-inch, lO-inch, and 12-inch rifles, a pressure
gauge is used for each trial shot and the pressure recorded.
672. After the trial shots pressure gauges are Inserted and
left undisturbed during the firing of the record shots. After
the firing they are taken out and the pressure recorded as the
maximum for the record shots.
673. In practice with gun batteries all projectiles and ope
powder charge for each gun may be on the loading plat-
form before the command COMMENCE FIRING. The powder
charges for subsequent shots may be taken from the maga-
zines at the command COMMENCE FIRING, but no powder
charge shall be carried to the loading or the gun platform, or
anywhere in the Immediate vicinity of the gun, prior to the
discharge of the preceding shot in the series. Breechblocks of
both guns and mortars must remain closed completely until
the command COMMENCE FIRING.
674. In both gun and mortar batteries where the maga-
zines are located so that the ammunition service is delayed,
or where the personnel is not sufBcient to furnish complete
ammunition details, just prior to the practice the powder may
be placed at some convenient point in the galleries or in rear
of the emplacements or pits the place selected to be approved
;

by the fire commander.

675. In firing guns by Case II the arbitrary deflection cor-
rection for the first shot of a series Is applied to the deflection
board, but during the firing of a series, deflection corrections
from observation of fire are made by each gun pointer inde-
pendently, as follows
676. The piece is traversed so that the vertical wire of the
sight is ;<ept on the exact point aimed at, and at the instant
the projectile strikes, the traversing is stopped and the cross
wire moved by means of the defiection screw to the splash-
 TARGET PRACTICE SALUTES. 141

ttiis may be difficult. As an alternative, gun pointers shouUl

be instructed to move tbe cross wire in the direction of the
splash the estimated amount of the error. A change in deflec-
tion will be necessary every few shots when the target changes
direction or is changing Its range rapidly.
677. In firing guns by Case III deflection corrections from
observation of fire are ordered by the battery commander and
applied to the deflection board.
678. Range corrections from observation of shots fired
during a series are made by the battery commander, and only
after he has assured hlipself that there Is a consistent error
in the ranges for which the pieces are set. At gun batteries
thjs correction is applied on the range board either by the
setting of the index to a reference number other than the
normal or by means of the velocity curves, preferably the
latter. To avoid errors in making these corrections, arrows
should be drawn on the range board to indicate the direction
in which the marker should be moved. At mortar batteries
this correction is applied to the setting of the elevation scale
on the mortar arm.
679. Immediately after a piece is fired the breech is opened
without command, and, if a vented piece, the primer removed.
680. Care must be taken to prevent injury to the gas-check
seat and keep it clean. Sometimes the residue from the
priming charge drops from the obturator into the gas-check
seat or the breech recess, and should be wiped off.
681. The bore and chamber of the piece should not be washed
out during firing. It is seldom necessary to clear the vent
except at EXAMINE GUN, when all water, oil, or obstructions
must be removed. After clearing the vent the primer seat
should be wiped clean. Care should be taken to avoid scoring
the vent and the primer seat.
682. Immediately after the firing the piece and accessories
shall be inspected and a report on their condition made to the
district commander ;the bores of pieces are washed clean
with water, dried and oiled, and the breechblocks dismantled
for th9 purpose of cleaning and oiling the mechanism.

FIBE COMMAND SERVICE PRACTICE.

683. The fire commander conducts the practice from his

station and simulates as nearly as practicable an engagement
of an independent fire command.
He keeps a record of the orders given to his battery com-
manders and of the time taken to obey them.
Precautions for safety.

684. Each battery commander acts as a local safety officer

for his own battery, and, when necessary for safety, interrupts
the firing or suspends the execution of the orders of the fire
commander, reporting the circumstances.
142 TARGET PRACTICE —SALUTES.
685. In so far as they apply, all instructions and rules gov-
erning battery practice are observed in fire command practice.
Precautions for safety (paragraphs 647 to 658, inclusive)
shall be strictly adhered to in fire command service practice.

BATTLE COMMAND SEBVICE PRACTICE.

686. The battle commander conducts the practice from his

station and simulates an actual engagement as nearly as
practicable.
687. In so far as they apply, all instructions and rules
governing battery and Are command practice shall be observed
in battle command practice. Safety precautions prescribed
for battery and Are command service practice shall be strictly
adhered to in battle command practice. A
record is kept
at the battle commander's station of all orders issued and the
time required for their execution. This record is included
in the report of the practice.

MODIFICATION OF PKACTIOE EEGTILATIONS.

688. If circumstances arise under which it is impracticable

to carry out the instructions as given for coast artillery
practice, a prompt report to this effect is made to the district
commander in case matters reported are beyond his power
;

to remedy, he forwards the report with recommendations in

the case for the action of higher authority.

EEPOBTS OP TARGET PRACTICE.

689. Before any firing begins, and immediately after its ter-
mination, the battery commander inspects the pieces, carriages,
platforms, implements, equipments, and other accessories, and,
after the practice, makes written reports on their condition to
the artillery district commander through the tactical chain of
command. These reports are separate on matters affecting
each supply department concerned and on those affecting the
drill. Pertinent recommendations which the practice or pre-
ceding drill and instruction may have suggested for the im-
provement of the material or the drill should be encouraged
by the artillery district commander. If there are no defects
to be reported or no suggestions to be made affecting any or
all of the staff departments concerned, or affecting the material
or drill, a single report embodying that statement will be
sufficient. These reports shall be forwarded by the artillery
district commander only in cases requiring action of higher
authority.
690. Each battery commander submits the reports upon the
practice of his battery he will be held responsible for their
;

prompt rendition and accuracy.

All data called for by the prescribed blanks must be noted,
or any omissions explained.
 TAKGET PRACTICE —SALUTES. 143

SALUTES.

G91. Salutes with cannon ghall be fired under the charge

of a commissioned oflScer.
692. The interval between shots is five seconds.

Precautions for safety.

693. Only guns using metallic cartridge cases shall be em-

ployed in firing salutes.
694. In firing salutes the chamber of the gun shall be
swabbed after each round with a damp sponge to extinguish
any sparks remaining from the preceding round and to remove
residue. Worn sponges or those that do not fill the chamber
of the gun must not be used.
695. Salutes shall not be fired unless the above conditions
can be fulfilled.
82615—09 10
 ;

Chaptee XV.
NIGHT DRILL—SEARCHLIGHTS.
NIGHT DBILL.

696. Special attention should be given to night drills in

order to familiarize the manning parties of the various units
with their duties under conditions which would be likely to
obtain in time of war and to insure the tactical efHeiency of
the lighting and searchlight systems.
697. Battery night drill is for the instruction of the fire-
control personnel and gun pointers in the use of their instru-
ments and the manning parties of guns and mortars in the
use of their equipment at night. Battle and fire command
night drills are for the instruction of the command in the use
of searchlights and in battle tactics at night.
698. For battery night drill, the tug, without a target, is
sent out on the range and Ijept illuminated by a single search-
light to enable the battery commanders to practice their men
in position finding and in service of the guns at night. The
movements of the tug may be controlled by signals when
necessary.
699. For battle and fire command night drills, the tug, with-
out a target, is sent out a sufficient time in advance to enable
it to get beyond the maximum range of the searchlights before
the drill begins. At the appointed time it turns and comes in
or moves according to instructions. All lights aboard except
those absolutely necessary to comply with the laws of navi-
gation are kept extinguished during the drill. The fire-
control personnel attend ; the remainder of the personnel
except gun pointers and traversing details of gun batteries
may be excused.
SEAKCHLIGHTS.

700. Depending upon the service for which used, search-

lights may be classified as fixed, roving, and illuminating.
701. The standard service searchlights are 36-inch and 60-
inch, but there are some 24-inch and 30-inch lights still In use.
702. The searchlight officer is stationed in the observing
room of the battle commander's station and has tactical
functions only. The observing room of the station is equipped
with an electric controller for every searchlight under electric
control from that
station.- Speaking tubes connect the search-
with the telephone booths in the telephone room
light officer
the telephone operator is in communication with an operator
near the searchlight in the telephone room there are as many
;

booths as there are telephones to the searchlights electrically

144
 ——

NIGHT DRILL SEARCHLIGHTS. 145

controlled from the station, and arrangements are made so

that the searchlight officer may be bridged on the various
lines.
Manning parties for searchlights.

703. If actuated from a central plant

Operator.
Assistant.
704. If actuated from a local plant (internal combustion
engine) —
Operator.
Assistant.
Engineer.
705. If actuated from a local plant (steam engine) —
Operator.
Assistant.
Engineer.
Fireman.
706. In addition to the above:
Fixed and roving lights, for each
Watcher (equipped with a night-glass).
Telephone operator.

Service of the lights.

707. Fixed lights are used to keep the outer limit of the
battle area illuminated. For this purpose the beam should
be moved but little in azimuth and should be given an oscil-
latory motion up and doven so as to cover the vs'ater between
it and its extreme limits of illumination. In conjunction with
this light and on the outside there should be a roving light,
which is used to obtain information as to the approach of
an enemy at the earliest practicable moment. It may be
necessary to have fixed lights on each side of the channel, in
which case there should be a roving light for sach, and the
beams of the fixed lights should be adjusted so as to give a
continuous band of light entirely across the harbor entrance.
A roving light Is used also to do the work of a fixed light
when the latter, for recarboning or other cause, goes out of
service. Watchers should be stationed on the outside of
fixed and roving lights at such distances that they can detect
readily any vessel passing into the beam, and anything detected
must be reported instantly to the battle commander's station.
708. Roving lights are also provided to search the battle
area within the fixed beams.
709. The searchlight area of each roving light is divided
into sectors, designated as right, middle, and left, or right,
right middle, left middle, and left. These sectors are used
for the purpose of controlling the lights by telephone. Fixed
146 NIGHT DRILL SEARCHLIGHTS.

and roving lights are under the direct control of the search-
light officer.
710. When searching, the roving lights are moved slowly
back and forth through the designated area, and occasionally
given an up-and-down motion. The best method of handling
a particular light under the varied conditions which arise can
be determined by experience only. The search is maintained
through the entire area assigned to the light unless orders are
received to search a particular sector. When a vessel is de-
tected by the watcher the fact is reported to the searchlight
officer when a vessel is picked up by the searchlight operator
;

he follows it until ordered to search.

711. Illuminating lights are intended primarily to illuminate
targets assigned to the Are commands, and when used for this
purpose are under control of the fire commanders, the elec-
trical controllers being at the Are commanders' stations. It
may happen often that an illuminating light must be used
for searching while a roving light is out of action or is reliev-
ing a fixed light.
712. An illuminating light may be used for searching in two
ways First, the fire commander may be directed to search,
:

in which case the searching is done under his orders second, ;

the searchlight officer may direct the searching by telephone,

in which case the operator acts under the orders of the search-
light officer. In order to facilitate the use of illuminating
lights for searching, their areas are divided into sectors.
713. Mine lights are under the control of the mine com-
manders they are used for searching the mine field and
;

illuminating targets therein, but may be used under the search-

light officer for searching purposes, as in the case of the fire
commanders' lights.
714. Except in case of emergency, illuminating and mine
field lights are put in use only when ordered from the battle
commander's station.
715. Wheneyer it is necessary to occult a fixed or roving
light, to change carbons or for any other reason, report must
be made to the searchlight officer before the light is occulted
in order that a light may be assigned to relieve it.
716. When two lights are working together, one is desig-
nated as the directing light and the other follows its motion,
so that the proper intersection of the beams is eftected.
717. The normal use of searchlights is as follows The out-
:

side roving light picks up a vessel and follows it to the fixed

beam. The approximate position of the vessel and the light
covering it are reported to the battle commander. His ob-
server watches carefully for the entrance of the vessel into
the fixed beam, and as soon as it is detected by him an inside
roving light is thrown upon it, the outside light returning to
its proper function. The vessel is followed by the inner
light until It is covered by the necessary illuminating light,
and assigned as a target to one or more fire commanders then ;

the inside roving light is given other orders. With fewer

 NIGHT DRILL SEARCHLIGHTS. 147

lights the method of using them must be varied to suit con-

ditions.
718. The searchlights in a district are designated by num-
bers, as No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, etc.
719. Searchlights shall not be thrown on any vessels except
those provided by the Government for coast artillery purposes.
If by accident a searchlight beam is thrown on any other ves-
sel, it must be removed as soon as the mistake is discovered.
720. It is diflBcult under the most favorable circumstances
for a searchlight oflScer to exercise accurate control of search-
lights by telephone. Therefore it is necessary that the com-
mands be concise and understood easily.
721. Searchlight commands are as given below, but may bo
modified in order to meet the requirements of local conditions.
IN ACTION signifies that an occulted light is to be put into
operation. The command is given as follows :IN
ACTION.
OUT take a light out of action. The command is
signifies to
given as follows : OUT.
SEARCH signifies that the light is to search its entire area.
The command is given as follows : SEARCH. If the
light is to search a certain sector the command is
SEARCH RIGHT, • SEARCH MIDDLE AND LEFT, etc.
If a light searching a particular sector and it
is is desired
that it search the full area, the command is SEARCH.
If the light is covering a target the command is
UNCOVER AND SEARCH.
FOLLOW signifies that the light is to follow a vessel
within its beam even the vessel passes out of the sector
if
which the light has been ordered to search.
COVER signifies that a designated light is to cover
a target illuminated by some other light. The command
2 COVER 3 signifies that light No. 2 is to cover the target
illuminated by light No. 3. If 2 were on a target already, the
command would be 2 UNCOVER AND COVER 3; the command
COVER is preceded by UNCOVER, so as to indicate to the
operator that no mistake has been made; otherwise the oper-
ator may consider it his duty to remind the searchlight ofiicer
that he is covering a target.
The command UNCOVER AND SEARCH given to a
roving light covering a vessel indicates that that light is to
uncover and to search its entire area, no matter what the
previous order may have been.
FOCUS, SPREAD, CONTRACT, RAISE, LOWER, RIGHT,
LEFT, and HALT, are commands to accomplish the objects
indicated by them.
If a small motion only is desired when using the commands
RIGHT, LEFT, RAISE, or LOWER, " SLIGHTLY " may be
added; otherwise the amount of movement should be indi-
cated in degrees.
At the command ELEVATE the beam is raised 30 degrees and
held there until further orders.
148 NIGHT DRILL SEARCHLIGHTS.

722. A searchlight operator should be a man of intelligence,

and preferably one who has had experience in the use of
electrical and mechanical apparatus. A good searchlight
operator can be made by careful training and constant prac-
tice only. He should be interested in his work and appreciate
its importance. Operators should not be changed from light
to light, as no two lights require precisely the same handling
or adjustment. Operators should be required to experiment
with the adjustment of their lights under the supervision of
an officer or electrician sergeant.
723. The light must be kept clean, special attention being
given to the mirror.
724. The service of a searchlight In proper condition de-
pends largely on the character and condition of the carbons.
The best service is obtained when the carbons have been dried
thoroughly.
 :

Chapter XVI.

COMMUNICATIONS.
725. The means employed for the transmission of orders
and information in the coast artillery service are as follows
Wireless for communication between district headquarters,
other wireless stations, and boats equipped with wireless
outfits.
The telephone for communication between the units of the
command.
tactical chain of
The telautograph or other electrical or mechanical device
for transmission of information from the plotting room to the
gun platforms or mortar pits.
Speaking tubes for communication between the battle com-
mander's observing room and the telephone booth of his sta-
tion, between fire commanders' stations and near-by battery
commanders' stations, between emergency stations and plotting
rooms, and as an auxiliary means of communication between
plotting rooms and emplacements or powder magazines.
Flags, heliographs, and other means of signaling for com-
munication between posts and between posts and boats when
wireless or other means of communication are not Installed.
726. The means of communicating throughout a battle com-
mand are illustrated in the diagram, page 150.
Signal stations.

727. Signal stations are established at each coast artillery

fort. These stations are equipped with telephones to post
switchboard, and such other equipment, including wireless
outfits, as may be prescribed in War Department orders.
The stations are in charge of the operators necessary for
their proper service.

Telephone service.

728. The proper use

of the telephone requires careful train-
ing. Care should be takenIn selecting operators; the men
should be tested as to their ability to distinguish sounds in
a telephone. The following method is suggested:
Enunciate distinctly through the telephone letters which
sound somewhat alike, as B, C, P, T, E, and ascertain whether
they can be distinguished readily enunciate a number of
;

words beginning with S, such as seven, six, sight, sound; try

such words as four, more, score, door, bore.
729. After a test of this kind with an instrument in good
order, try with an instrument which is not working well.
14«
150 COMMUNICATIONS.

I
 : ;

COMMUNICATIONS. 151

730. After the hearing test, give a number of selected words

to be sent through the telephone to test the operator's ability
to enunciate distinctly.
731. Other qualifications being equal, men should be selected
who are in the habit of spealiing slowly and distinctly. A
man who raises the pitch of his voice when excited should
not be selected.
732. Operators should have a sufficient knowledge of their
instruments to correct minor defects, such as loose or corroded
contacts, or bent levers.
733. When preparing for service the operators arrange their
apparatus for communicating and raise and lower the hook
switch. If this operation results in a sharp click in the re-
ceiver, the battery is in working order. If no click is heard,
the binding post to which the head sets are connected should
be examined and tightened. If the hook test indicates that
there is no battery on the line, the operator must notify the
electrician sergeant. The principal operator on each line calls
up all the others on his line and reports to the chief of his
station.
734. The tests for telephones are found in Signal Corps
Manual No. 8.
735. Particular stress should be laid on the importance of
training each telephone operator to take an interest in the
Instrument used by him. If each operator takes proper care
of his instrument the efficiency of the system is much en-
hanced. The talking set should be hung in its proper place
at the completion of drill, hook springs should be in place, the
cords should be kept clear of possible interference, and a re-
port should be made promptly of any defect in the talking
circuit.
736. The nickel plating should be kept polished w'ith chamois
the connections external to the transmitters and receivers
.should be examined often for possible corrosion and a strip
of, hard-surfaced paper drawn between platinum contacts to
insure their cleanliness. Cords should be examined frequently
for wear just behind the tips.
737. Transmitter shells must not be opened by the operator
under any circumstances.
738. Report nnist be made to the electrician sergeant in
charge of the equipment as soon as there is any indication of
trouble, in order to avoid discontinuance of the service.
739. In sending messages observe the following rules
1. Speak into the transmitter holding the head in a natural
position, the lips about an inch from the transmitter.
2. Use a moderate tone of voice and speak slowly and dis-
tinctly, being careful not to slur the words or syllables, but to
enunciate clearly each sound.
3. Never shout or raise the pitch of the voice.
4. Send numerals singly ; thus, 4370 is sent four, three,
seven, zero. Never use the letter O for zero. In sending an
 :

152 COMMUNICATIONS.

azimutli, or any number involving a decimal, the decimal point

is called point; 246.34 is sent two, four, sir, point, three, four.
An exact hundred is sent as a hundred; thus 200 is sent afe
two hundred, 4500 is sent forty-five hundred. The same sys-
tem applies to sending an exact thousand; 4000 is sent four
thousand.
5. If necessary to repeat, use more care as to distinct-
it is
ness, butdo not raise the voice. A single number not under-
stood may be accentuated by counting up to it and emphasiz-
ing it. Thus if the figure four is not understood, say four;
one, two, three, four.
740. In receiving messages observe the following rules
1. Keep the mind on the message a person can not receive
;

correctly when he is thinking of something else.

2. Keep the receiver close to the ear.
3. Do not interrupt the sender unless absolutely necessary.

Telautograph service.

741. The electrician sergeant in charge of equipment is re-

sponsible for the adjustment and repair of telautographs.
The operator keeps the instrument clean, the ink bottle full,
pen in condition, and puts in the paper.
742. To operate the telautograph the operator closes and
opens the master switch, adjusts the voltage rheostat, writes
the message, and shifts the paper.
743. To close the master switch, depress the button latch
with the point of the pencil, pull the lever of the switch, then
lift the pencil thus releasing the latch; this will lock the
lever and keep the switch closed.
744. To open the master switch, depress the button with
the pencil this will release the lever and the switch will
;

fly open.
745. To shift the paper, depress the button latch with the
point of the pencil, and hold it down during the entire opera-
tion;, then move the lever back and forth its full stroke as
many times as may be necessary each strolie shifts the paper
;

a certain amount. If the writing is to be continued after

shifting the paper, the switch should be left closed, otherwise
it should be opened.
746. To adjust the voltage, close the master switch, move
the pen along the edges of the platen (called making a field),
and note the result on the receiver if the proper rectangle
;

appears on the receiver the voltage is correct; if not, the

voltage is varied by the rheostat until the rectangle is proper.
747. To test the telautograph for service, the operator turns
on the power, closes the master switch, makes a field, and
writes a message. The range setter telephones to the station
how his receiver is working. Report is made to the chief of
detail, and if everything is not working properly the electri-
cian sergeant is notified at once.
 : :

COMMUNICATIONS. 153

748. In using the telautograph

1.Never depress the button with anything but the telauto-
graph pencil.
2. Hold the pencil as nearly vertical as possible.
3. Donot rest the hand on the platen, otherwise the pen
at the receiver will not lift, as the lifting of the pen is accom-
plished by allowing the platen to rise when the pencil is
lifted.
4. See that the lead in the pencil protrudes a sutHcient
distance and is sharpened properly.
5. Write in a clear round hand.
6. Always open the master switch when the message is
complete. This is exceedingly important.
7. Make figures as follows, the arrows indicating the direc-
tion in which the pencil moves

// ^
S 9 V
 :

Chapteb XVII.

FIBE-COWTROL APPARATUS.
ATMOSPHERE BOARD.

749. Figure 2 sliows the atmosphere board.

750. The operation of the board is self-evident. The argu-
ments are the barometer and thermometer readings, and the
result obtained is the reference number to be used on the range
board in determining the range correction for atmospheric
conditions.
Aeroscope.

751. See Signal Corps Manual No. 8.

ANEMOMETER.

752. The anemometer consists of four hemispherical alumi-

num cups mounted on arms and a spindle so as to revolve
under the action of the wind and to record its travel on a dial.
In order to determine the wind velocity the anemometer is
connected electrically in some cases with a device by means
of which a stop watch Is started or stopped whenever the
anemometer closes an electrical circuit. The face of the stop
watch is graduated to read the velocity of the wind in miles
per hour. The first closing of the circuit starts the watch, the
second stops it, and the third closing brings the hand back to
zero. This operation is repeated continuously, a record of the
velocity of the wind being obtained for every three closings of
the circuit. There is ample time between the second and third
closings to read the velocity of the wind. In case the elec-
trical device is not provided, the watch may be started and
stopped by hand, the proper instant being indicated by a bell
or sounder. The record sent to the fire commanders' stations
should be the mean of ten readings.

AZIMUTH INSTRUMENT.

753. Figure 3 illustrates the azimuth instrument. It may

be mounted either upon a tripod, as in the figure, or upon a
pier mount. It is used for measuring azimuths.
754. The instrument is said to be oriented when it is set
up so that it will read azimuths. The operation is as follows
First. Set the graduated circle and index to read the azi-
muth of a knovra datum point.
154
rlEE-CONTROD APPARATUS. 155
156 riEE-CONTEOLi APPAKATUS.

Second. Witli the azimuth clamp screw loosened, set the

eyepiece slightly to the left of the reading window and clamp
the azimuth clamp.
Third. Raise the whole instrument by grasping the top and
turn it so that the telescope points in the general direction of
the datum point with the plumb bob over the home station.
In orienting the instrument on a pier mount, the instrument
may be turned in the proper direction by loosening all of the
leveling screws.
(Second and third are not essential to the reading of azi-
muths, but are provided so that when the adjustment is com-
plete the parts of the instrument will be in the most con-
venient relative position for operation and reading.)
Fourth. Level the instrument. See that all the screws
have a uniform and firm bearing on the leveling plate set ;

one of the levels exactly over two opposite leveling screws;

turn the screws in opposite directions until the bubbles of
each level are exactly in the middle, being careful to maintain
a firm bearing of the screws on the plate. Turn the instru-
ment through 180 degrees and correct one half of any variation
of either bubble by the adjusting screws on the level, the
other half by the corresponding leveling screws. Repeat this
operation until the bubbles remain In the middle of the tubes
for any position of the telescope in azimuth.
Fifth. Focus the telescope, paragraph 820.
Sixth. Bring the vertical wire of the telescope approximately
on the datum point tighten the azimuth clamp, and, using
;

the azimuth slow motion screw, bring the vertical wire ex-
actly on the datum point. Clamp the slow motion.
755. The instrument is now ready to read azimuths. In
using it, the vertical wire must be set accurately on the
designated point of the object observed. In case of moving
objects it is essential also that this setting be made at the
designated instant.

BABOMETEE.

756. Both the mercurial and aneroid barometers are hung

in the meteorological station. The aneroid barometer is
always used for determining atmospheric data, the mercurir.l
barometer being used to adjust the aneroid. To use the mer-
curial barometer for ordinary work involves too much loss
of time.
DEFLECTION BOAKD.
(See also mortar deflection board.)

757. The deflection board is an adding machine by means

of which the corrections for travel in azimuth during the
observing interval, for travel in azimuth during the time of
flight, and for wind and drift, are added algebraically. The
total azimuth correction to be made on the gun arm, or the
 1

AZIMUTH INSTRUMENT

/Yoke Cap
Trur-nion Clar>->p Screw,
Telescope Trunnion
Tye Le
fbcu5ir-)g Knob

Cye
Ly, Rec —Objective and
Objective Cell

Eve Rece Adapter

Crosswire Holder and

Adjusting Screws

Worry-\ Box Elccentrii

Crank

Vorm Bov
Adjusting 5crew
Worm Adjusting Screw -Worm Sot

'Worm Screw

Dix Crank

Fig. 3.
82013 — 00. (To face page 156.
Q
<
O
CD

o
UJ •I-

Q
 FIRE-COXTEOL APPARATUS. 157

deflection to be set on the sight is indicated on the proper

scale of the instrument.
758. The instrument consists of a base B. figure 4, upon
which slides a movable frame A, called the platen this ;

frame slides on the rod C, to which It is attached by means

of two lugs XN. In the left-hand lug there is a set screw
M, by means of which the platen may be clamped to the rod C.
The rod C is attached to the base by the two brackets
K and Q. In the bracket K is a threaded sleeve L, which can
be turned by the milled head J, thus giving a slow motion to
the rod, and consequently to the platen.
Attached to the base at the lower side are three scales.
Two of these, the deflection scale and travel scale, are fixed,
and the azimuth correction scale is movable. (The travel
scale is no longer needed In the use of the board.)
On the left-hand side and attached to the base is the wind
arm P and the wind arc G.
Attached to the platen is the platen scale I, over which
moves the travel arm D. The scale I can be given two posi-
tions on the platen, one corresponding to a time interval of
1.5 seconds and one to a time Interval of 20 seconds. (The
latest boards are made for observing intervals of 15 and 30
seconds.)
Over all moves the T square E, which also slides on the
rod C. On the face of the T square there is a range scale
called the T square scale.
Attached to the left side of the platen is a piece of metal H,
called the leaf. The curved edge of the leaf Is a drift curve.
On the left there is a range scale, which is used In setting the
platen for wind and drift. This is called the leaf range scale.
759. Platen scale. — This is a scale representing travel In
azimuth it is graduated in degrees and hundredths, scale
;

one-half of a degree to the inch. It is numbered from left to

right, and the reference number at the origin Is 15°, to corres-
pond to the azimuth degree tally dial on the plotting board.
760. Deflection scale. — This scale indicates the deflection to
be used on the sight in Case II, scale of half of a degree to
the inch. It is numbered from left to right, with 3° in the
center to correspond to the reference numbering on the sight
scale.
761. —
Azimuth correction scale. This scale indicates the cor-
rection to be applied to the gun arm on the plotting, board
In Case III. The scale is one-half of a degreee to the Inch,
and it is numbered from left to right with 15° in the center
to correspond to the numbering of the azimuth correction
scale on the gun arm.
762. The wind arc. —The arc is graduated for wind compo-
nents varying by 10 miles per hour. The origin (zero wind)
is the graduation numbered 50, and the corresponding position
of the wind arm is normal, that is, perpendicular to the de-
flection scale. The reference number zero corresponds to a
left wind component of 50 miles per hour. The reference
82615—09 11
158 FIRE-COJ«TEOD APPARATUS.

number 100 corresponds to a right wind component of 5u miles

per hour. The wind arm is set to the proper reference num-
ber by the arrow index.
763. T-square scale. — This scale, although graduated in
yards of range, is a scale of times of flight. The range num-
bers are placed at a distance from the zero of the scale cor-
responding to the time of flight for the range. The time
scale is five seconds to the inch. The origin of the time scale
for the board is the center of motion of the travel arm.
764. The leaf range scale.— This is a non-equicrescent scale
constructed so that the correction for wind and drift is ap-
plied by a single setting.
765. For suhcaliber practice.— A special leaf scale and scale
arm for the T-square are used. When not supplied paper
scales should be constructed.

Operation.

766. First. Set the wind arm to the proper reference num-
ber, as indicated by the wind component board.
Second. Set the platen so that the point of the drift curve
corresponding to the range will be accurately over the right-
hand edge of the wind arm.
Third. Set the travel arm (right edge) for travel reference
number as received from the plotting board.
Fourth. Set the azimuth correction scale so that the travel
reference number is under the normal of the deflection scale.
Fifth. Set the T-square so that the point of its scale corre-
sponding to the range will be accurately over the right edge
of the travel arm.
The bevel edge of the T-square then indicates :

(o) On the deflection scale the deflection to be used on the

sight with Case I or II.
(6) On the azimuth correction scale the 'correction to be
applied to the gun arm, when using Case III.
767. The foregoing operation, when used for Case III, is
based upon the assumption that the guns can be laid continu-
ously for azimuth as well as for range and can be flred when
ready. With guns on disappearing carriages there is a delay
in traversing while the truck is at the breech, but experience
has shown that a well-trained detachment can pick up the
time azimuth relation easily while the breech is being closed
and the gun going in battery.
768. For use with systems of firing at a predicted point
which require more than one observing interval to lay the
gun in azimuth two multiplying scales are furnished with
each board to be attached to the semicircular brace of the
platen. One of these scales is intended for use when a fifteen-
second interval is employed and the other with a twenty-second
interval. They permit the making of allowance for travel
during time of flight plus the travel during two observing
intervals.
 : ;:

FIRE-CONTBOL APPARATUS. 159

All of the operations are the same except the fourth, which
reads as follows
Fourth. Set the azimuth correction scale to the reading of
the multiplying scale.

DEPRESSION POSITION FINDEE.

783. Depression position finders are instruments for deter-

mining the position of an object by means of its azimuth and
range. The azimuth features are similar to those described
in paragraphs 753 and 754. The range is determined by meas-
uring the angle between the horizontal and the line from the
instrument to the water line of the object, the measure of the
angle being read directly from the Instrument as the range.
In addition to accurate setting of the Tertical wire for azi-
muth, as in the case of azimuth instruments, the horizontal
wire must be set accurately upon the water line of the object
observed.

Adjustment of the Swasey D. P. F.

770. 1. Level the instrument carefully (par. 754).

Focus the telescope (par. 820).
2.
3. For reading azimuth angles the instrument must be
oriented by setting the azimuth of a known point on the
scale and bringing the vertical wire exactly on the point
by means of the azimuth adjusting screws. The holding
down bolts for the base are situated so that the Instrument
is oriented approximately when the base is placed properly
on the bolts.
4. The adjustment for reading ranges in made as follows
(It is assumed that datum points at short, mid, and long
range, Dl, D2 and D3, have been established.)
(a) Set the height scale to Indicate the height of trunnions
of the instrument corrected for tide.
(6) Set the range drum to read the range of D3 and direct
the telescope on that point; water line by means of the
micrometer screw.
(c) Set the range drum to the range of Dl, turn the tele-
scope on it and water line by moving the top carriage along
the height scale by means of the carriage knob.
(d) Repeat (6) and fc) until the adjustment permits ap-
proximately correct readings on Dl and D3.
(e) Then test on D2; should the difference between the
range reading and the true range be small, no change in
adjustment need be made. Should this difference be material,
D2 should be substituted for D3 or Dl in (6) and (c) de-
pending on the range at which the instrument is to be used
(for D] if a longer and for D3 if a shorter range than D2).
771. This adjustment once made, should be checked from
time to time.
160 riEE-CONTEOL APPARATUS.

772. Wbere no datum points liave been established, the

method of adjustment is similar to that given above by
making use of buoys or other fixed objects that can be vs'ater
lined and the ranges to which have been determined previously
by the horizontal base system. As far as practicable they
should be at long, mid, and short ranges, corresponding to
Dl, D2, and D3 above.
773. If reference marks have been established on one or
more datum points, set the height scale for the height of the
trunnions of the instrument above the reference mark, and
with the range drum set to read the correct range make the
horizontal wire coincide with the reference mark by means
of the micrometer. Set the height scale index to indicate
height of the trunnions of the instrument corrected for tide
and proceed as in (6"), (c), and (d) above, or if the tide is
not known, water line as in (c), and repeat (6), (c), and
(d) as before.

Adjustment of the Lewis D. P. F., model 1901.

774. The Lewis D. P. F., model 1907, consists of a pedestal

on which are mounted two trains of gears which operate re-
spectively the range and azimuth scales. The inclination of
the telescope is given by means of a double screw, which
insures constant parallelism of the graduated arm on which
the height scale is laid off and which transmits the motion
of the screws directly to the telescope. The index slide on
the height scale carries a refraction screw.
775. To correct automatically for a variation in height a
cam attachment operates a slotted bar which is connected
with the refraction screw.
776. Rapid changes in azimuth are made by turning the
upper plate of the instrument, the friction of the gear not
offering enough resistance to prevent this slow changes in
;

azimuth are made by turning the azimuth head.

777. This instrument has three leveling screws. To level it:
Set one of the levels over two of the screws and turn the
screws in opposite directions until the bubble is in the middle.
Bring the bubble of the other level to the middle by means of
the third leveling screw alone. Turn through 180 degrees and
correct as provided in paragraph 754.
778. When the Instrument is leveled but one adjustment for
range reading is necessary. This is made as follows Set the
:

height scale to correspond to the height of the trunnions of

the Instrument corrected for tide. Set the range scale to the
range of a datum point, preferably one at mid-range. 'Water-
line the datum point by means of the refraction screw.
779. For reading azimuth angles the instrument must be
oriented by setting the azimuth of a known point on the scale
and bringing the vertical wire exactly on the point by means
of the spanner wrench provided for turning the instrument on
the pedestal.
 PL0TTIN6 BOARD.

\ndm% for- reatiimo Connecting Bar

hundredths of Degree,
lnde« Clamp
ndej Olst
Inde* Knob

Heading Window for even Decrees Oun Arn-i Azin-iurh oub-Scale

/vy. 6.
SiOir.— 00. (To taoo page IGl.
 FIRE-COXTEOL APPAKATTJS. 161

MOBTAE DEFLECTION EOABD.

780. The mortar deflection board is illustrated in Figure 5.
It consists of a cylinder A, on the elements of which are num-
bered, consecutively, azimuths from 1° to 21°, from 11° to 31°,
etc., the last series running from 351° through 0° to 11°. The
degi-ees only are on the cylinder, the azimuth subscale B
giving the subdivisions to 0.05°. Any desired series may be
brought into the slit on the shield R by turning the head K.
Immediately below the subscale B is the drift scale C on the
drift-scale slide D', which is carried by the carriage D. The
carriage is moved by turning the main traversing wheel E.
There is a pointer H
on the carriage for setting to any azi-
muth on the subscnle. The carriage I may be moved by the
head K independently of the carriage D. On the carriage I
there are two pointers, the first, L, for setting the elevation
on the drift scale C, the second, M, for indicating the corrected
azimuth on the subscale B. The pointer JI may be given an
independent motion by the head X the amount of this motion
;

Is indicated on the deflection scale P by the pointer Q.

781. The construction of the board depends upon the theory
that the angular drift is constant for a given elevation what-
ever the velocity. Its operation is as follows Set the pointer
:

H to the plotting-board azimuth of the set-forward point,

bringing the proper degrees on the cylinder into view by means
of the head X. Set the pointer L for the elevation as deter-
mined from the plotting board. If no arbitrary correction as
a result of observation of fire is to be made, set the pointer
Q to 3°, the normal of the deflection scale. The pointer JI
now indicates the azimuth of the set-forward point corrected
for drift. Arbitrary corrections may be made at any time by
setting Q to the proper reference number.

PLOTTING BOARD.
Orientation of the board and gun arm center.

782. base-line arm may be moved through 1 degree

The
either way and
set to the proper reading by means of verniers
attached to each end. The zero of the fixed scale of the
vernier on the main azimuth circle opposite the vernier on the
base-line arm may be assumed to correspond to any convenient
degree number, depending upon the azimuth of the base line.
It is convenient to consider the zero opposite one end of the
base-line arm as corresponding to the nearest degree of the
back azimuth (180° -|- the azimuth). For example, assume
that the azimuth of the base line was 212.14°, and that the
base line was left-handed. Then the zero of the scale opposite
the left-hand end of the base-line arm would correspond to
212°, and the zero of the scale opposite the right-hand end
would correspond to 32°. To orient the base-line arm to
correspond with the actual base, it is necessary to swing the
base-line arm clockwise through 0.14° that is, set the left end
;

to 212.14°, The other would, of course, be set at 32.14°.

162 FIRE-CONTROL APPARATUS.

Assume that the azimuth of the base line was 212.80°, then
the left end would correspond to 213°, and the right end to
33°. To set the base line at 212.80° it would be necessary to
swing the base-line arm counter-clockwise through 0.20°. In
other words, the left-hand end is to be set at 212.80°, and the
right-hand end at 32.80°.
783. To prevent error it is important that both verniers
should be used, and both ends be set accurately.
784. The main azimuth circle and the gun azimuth circle
of all boards issued are numbered at Frankford Arsenal in
accordance with information furnished from the post at which
the board is to be used. This information includes a state-
ment of the azimuth of the normal to the base line, of the
position of the secondary station with relation to the primary,
and of the length of the base line.
Bring the gun-arm center over the primary center by placing
the zeros of the longitudinal adjusting slide verniers and
the lateral adjusting slide vernier coincident with the zeros
of their respective scales. Be sure that the zero of the worm
guard is opposite 15 on the azimuth correction scale, and the
scale on the micrometer head of the worm is at zero. Bring
the primary arm to the normal line of the board. Be sure
that the pointer of the index box on the primary arm is at
zero. Place the targ against the reading edge of the primary
arm, and bring the gun arm carefully against the targ. If
done properly, the reading edges of the primary and gun arms
will coincide with the normal line. Set the azimuth pointer
at the gun-arm azimuth window, by means of the adjusting
screw, to the whole degree of the azimuth of the normal line.
Next, set the gun-arm azimuth subdial indicator to zero by
loosening the screw holding the indicator in place. This will
allow of an adjustment of one-fourth, one-half, or three-
fourths of a degree. If this is not sufficient, the tally subdial
is removed. The inner dial face can be adjusted now within
the limits of one-fourth of 1 degree by loosening the retaining
screw and moving the dial until the pointer is at zero.
785. To verify this setting, the gun arm should be mov^d
away from the targ and brought up to it several times. The
gun-arm center is moved to the position on the board corre-
sponding to the position of the gun by moving the adjusting
slides the required distances in the proper directions, depend-
ing on the coordinates of the directing point, the primary
station being taken as the origin.
786. Bach board is given a serial number, stamped on the
name plate and right-hand end of the azmuth circle.
—
787. For suhealiber practice. To provide for reading shorter
ranges than are shown on the gun arm the graduations may be
carried back to the inner end of the arm by the use of a paper
scale pasted on the side of the arm, or the normal of the range
correction scale of the gun arm and the ruler of the range
board may be taken as 2,400, and a pa])er scale pasted on the
gun arm showing ranges from 1,400 to 3,500 yards.
 FIRE-CONTEOL APPARATUS. 163

Plotting board for mortars.

788. The mortar plotting board is tJae same as above de-

scribed, except tbat a mortar arm provided with a sliding scale
graduated in degrees and minutes of elevation and times of
flight for each zone, and a gun center with a larger azimuth
circle, are substituted for the gun arm and gun center. The
corrected elevation is read directly from the scale on the
mortar arm.
789. The azimuth read from the mortar arm azimuth circle
is corrected for drift, by means of the mortar deflection board.
790. For subcaliber practice at mortar batteries the scale
of the plotting board may be increased to 150 yards to the
inch where local conditions permit. I'nless subcaliber scales
of 1.50 or 300 yards to the inch have been supplied, an eleva-
tion scale for attachment to the mortar arm conforming to
the scale at which the board is to be used should be con-
structed at the post.

Plotting ioard for fire commanders.

791. The plotting board for fire commanders is similar to

the ordinary board, but has in addition a pantograph attach-
ment and a reverse plot of the location of the batteries and
stations. The gun center is mounted on ball-bearing lateral
and longitudinal slides. It may be set over any desired point
by means of the pantograph, the stylus attached to one of
the arms of the pantograph being set over the corresponding
point on the reverse plot. The important points on the reverse
plot such as the directing points of the batteries, position
finding stations, etc., are marked by small holes for the accu-
rate setting of the stylus.

POWDEB CHABT.
792. The powder chart is a chart to determine the velocity to
be expected from a given charge of powder considered as a
function of the temperature of the powder. It is constructed
at the post and used in connection with a T-square, as shown
in figure 7. The velocity scale is at the top of the chart.
The T-square is graduated on the left edge for temperature.
The velocity scale at the top of the chart is graduated 10
f. s. to the inch ;it reads from left to right. The normal
velocity for the gun is placed in the center. In the figure this
is taken as 2,250 f. s. A convenient length for the chart is
20 inches, which allows for a variation of 100 f. s. on each
side of the normal. The left edge of the T-square is graduated
in degrees Fahrenheit, beginning at — 10° at the bottom and
ending at 100° at the top. A convenient scale is 10° to the
inch, which requires a chart about 13 inches wide.
793. To construct the temperature-velocity curve. — Draw
a horizontal line on the chart which will pass through the 70°
mark on the T-squal-e, and consider this the axis X. Draw
a line at right angles to this through the normal velocity and
164 FIEE-CONTEOL APPAEATTTS.

consider it the axis Y. Then determine coordinates of points

of the curve from the data contained in tables published from
 —

R/iNOC BOAf<D

Fiy. 8.
SL'in". 0:p. (To facL' pa^-e ](.;:
 : :

FIRE-CONTROL APPARATUS. 165

The ordinates are the temperatures and the abscissae are the
corresponding variations from the normal muzzle velocity.
Plot the points and draw a curve through them.
794. To use the chart. —
For powder tested and adjusted to
give the normal velocity of the chart at 70° F., set the T-square
so that the actual temperature of the powder lies on the curve
and read the velocity to be expected from the charge from the
velocity scale on the left edge of the T-square.
795. For powder tested and adjusted to give the normal
velocity at some temperature other than 70°, set the T-square
for the temperature at which the powder was tested and read
the velocity. This is called the " test setting." Then set the
T-square for the actual temperature of the powder and read
the velocity. This is called the " temperature setting." Sub-
tract the velocity of the test setting from the velocity of the
temperature setting and add this difference algebraically to
the normal velocity for the gun, and the sum will be the
velocity to be expected from the charge.
Example 1. —Xormal velocity, 2,250 f. s. Velocity for test
setting, 2,240 f. s.Velocity for temperature setting, 2,280 f. s.
2,280 — 2,240 = +40 2,250
; 40+ =
2,290 f. s., the probable
velocity.
Example —Normal velocity, 2,250
2. Velocity for test
f. s.
setting, 2,240 Velocity for temperature
f. s. 2,220 setting, f. s.

2,220 — 2,240 = — 20; 2,250 — 20 = 2,230 the probable f. s.,

velocity.
Weights of powder charges. —
796. sometimes necessary
It is
to change the weights of powder charges. The velocity to be
expected due to such changes may be computed from the
formula

The average value ot u is: For nitrocellulose powder, 1.2;

for nitroglycerin powder, O.S.

EANGE BOARD.
797. Nomenclature
a. Frame.
6. Board.
c. Ruler.
d. Scale on the ruler.
e. Main bar.
/. Index.
g. Pointer.
li. String.
A-. Travel ruler.
I. Travel bar.

m. Travel scale.
n. Travel range scale.
0. Prediction scale.
p. Jiarker.
s. Tally.
166 riEE-COXTEOL APPARATCrS.

General description.

798. The range board is a computing device used to deter-

mine the range corrections to be applied to the gun arm of
the plotting board. It consists of a frame in which can be
placed in fixed position a graphic range correction chart
pasted on a board. In front of this chart is a balanced hori-
zontal ruler, which can be moved up or down and set opposite
any range on the chart. The ruler is maintained in position
by supporting sprocket chains and counterpoise.
799. The only adjustment required is to set the ruler paral-
lel to the horizontal lines on the board; this adjustment is
made by means of the adjusting screw on the left of the
frame, which shortens or lengthens the left-hand support of
the ruler.
800. On the ruler is a scale of yards, 100 to the inch, a
movable bar and a sliding pointer; these three elements in
connection with the graphic chart constitute a mechanical
means for adding algebraically the various corrections. The
horizontal scale of the chart is also 100 yards to the inch.
801. The origin of the correction scale on the gun arm on
the plotting board is numbered 2,000, in order that the correc-
tion to be made thereon shall never be negative. This re-
quires 2,000 to be taken as the origin of the scale on the
ruler.
802. The curves on the chart indicate the magnitude of the
corrections to be added or subtracted, and the ruler performs
mechanically the addition or subtraction.
803. The curves are drawn for every 2 per cent variation
in the density of the air, for every 10 f. s. M. V., for e^ery
5 feet of tide, and for every 10 miles of wind. Tor con-
ditions when the values lie between these least readings, the
pointer can be set by the eye closely enough for all practical
purposes. The vertical line in the center of each set of
curves is called the normal.
804. Reference numbers are used instead of two sets of
numbers of the same magnitude with plus and minus signs,
to avoid liability of error. Thus, if the wind curves were
numbered in both directions from zero, there would be a +10
mile wind curve and a — 10 mile wind curve, and the wrong
curve might be used the corresponding reference numbers for
:

wind are 40 and 60, and the possibility of confusion on ac-

count of the plus and minus signs is avoided.
805. On the upper edge of the board is placed a rod which
carries the markers. They are used to mark the particular*
curves which apply to the given set of conditions.
806. The travel ruler is fastened to the top of the frame
in a position parallel to the horizontal lines of the chart. It
Is used in determining the range corrections for travel of the
target during the time of flight and observing interval.
807. No modern ship can travel more than 300 yards in
fifteen seconds (the usual observing interval), therefore the
 FIRE-CONTROL APPARATUS. 167

origin of the travel scale on tbe gun arm of tlie plotting board
has been numbered 300, and the same reference number must
be used for the origin of the travel scale and the normal of
the prediction scale on the range board. For convenience of
computation, the numbers on the travel scale which run from
to 600 read from right to left, while those on the prediction
scale also run from to 600 read from left to right.

Operation.

808. 1. Adjust the ruler.

2. Set a marker to the curve corresponding to the atmos-
phere reference number.
3. Set a marker to the curve corresponding to the height of
tide.
4. Set a marker to the curve corresponding to the velocity
assumed for the first trial shot.
5. The wind component indicator having been set for the
azimuth and velocity of the wind and the azimuth of the tar-
get, note the range reference number and place a marker at
the top of the wind curve having that number.
6. As soon as the approximate range is given set the ruler
for the range and the index at the origin of the scale; slide
the pointer opposite the atmosphere curve indicated by the
marker, holding the bar in place with the left hand slide the
;

bar until the pointer is at the normal for atmosphere; this

completes the correction for atmosphere.
7. Proceed in a similar manner for wind.
8. Proceed in a similar manner for tide.
9. Proceed in a similar manner for velocity.
10. Set the travel bar with the index at the normal (300)
and its sliding pointer at the first range called. When tbe
next range is called move the travel bar until the pointer is at
the second range. Slide the pointer on the main bar until it is
opposite the string, then move the bar until the pointer is
opposite the vertical line corresponding to the travel as indi-
cated by the position of the index on the travel bar.
11. Then the index indicates the setting of the correction
scale on the gun arm for the total range correction to be
applied.
809. Always hold the bar firmly while moving the pointer.
810. In making corrections the density of the air, the ve-
locity, and azimuth of the wind at the opening of the action
will usually suflice for the entire action.
811. The height of the tide should be obtained at least every
half hour.
818. On range boards issued prior to December 26. 1906, tbe
curves are constructed to give the corrections for the actual
range. Therefore it is necessary that the operator of the
board should keep the ruler set at the actual range and not at
the corrected range. A setting to within 100 yards of the
actual range is sufBciently accurate. The of)erator should be
 : — :

168 FIHE-CONTEOL APPARATUS.

drilled In obtaming approximately the actual ranges from the

corrected ranges read by the plotter from the gun arm of the
plotting board.
813. On range boards issued December 26, 1906, and subse-
quently, the cul'ves are constructed to give the corrections for
the corrected range, so that the ranges read from the gun arm
of the plotting board should be used in setting the ruler. The
first corrected range can be obtained only by using the actual
range for setting the ruler, hence it is only an approximation.
The second corrected range obtained by setting the ruler at
the first corrected range will be sufiicieutly accurate to use
for firing. It is necessary to obtain the second corrected range
in firing at a stationary target as well as at a moving target.

Prohabic muxxlc velocity.

814. In determining the data for trial shots some velocity

must be assumed it may or may not be the normal velocity,
;

depending upon the circumstances, such as the temperature of

the powder, or some assumed deterioration of the powder
based upon previous experience with the same lot. The ve-
locity marlier is set for this assumed, velocity, the other
markers to the proper curves for the conditions of the day
and the proper range corrections obtained as described above.
If the center of impact of the trial shots fired with this ve-
locity is short of or beyond the expected range, the error may
be considered as due to an erroneous assumed velocity and the
center of impact may be brought to the expected range by
using a new velocity determined as shown by the following
examples
Suppose
1. The actual range to the target to be 7,100 yards.
2. The range at which the gun was laid to be 7,450yards.
3. The range to the splash 7,200 yards (to center of im-
pact where usiug data from more than one shot).
Then (with range boards issued prior to December 26,
1906) —
1. Set the ruler at the range to the splash, 7,200.
2. Set the index at 2,100, corresi)onding to the actual range
of the target.
3. Set the pointer to the velocity assumed for the trial
shots.
4. Slide the bar until the index reads 2,200.
Then the pointer indicates the probable velocity.
The result should be verified, as follows
Conceive the target to be moved to 7,200 yards so that the
splash (or center of impact) and the target coincide. Using
the muzzle velocity as determined above and the atmospheric
data for the day, determine the corrected range. This should
be 7,450.
With range boards issued December 26, 1906, and subse-
quently, the method is the same as the above, except that the
 : : :

FIRE-CONTROL APPARATUS. 169

ruler should be set at the range for which the gun is laid
(corrected range), viz, 7,450. In checking the results on these
boards the second corrected range obtained should be the
same as the corrected range for the trial shots.
Additional examples taken from actual pra(?tice

10-inch rifle (range board issued prior to December 26, 1906).

Powder C. P. W., lot 5, 1901 M. V.=2,235 f. s.

;

Temperature of testing, 70° F.

Temperature of magazine at time of firing, 65° F.
Temperature correction reduces initial velocity to 2,225 f s. .

Corrections due to atmosphere, wind, tide, and velocity ag-

gregate +130 yards.
The actual range to the target was 6,410 yards (the cor-
rected range set off on range drum of gun was 6,410+130
yards=6,540 yards).
The range to the splash was 6,100 yards (the center of
impact of the three trial shots was 310 yards short).
(a) The ruler was set at the range to the splash, 6,100
yards.
( 6 ) The index was set at 2,410 corresponding to the actual
range to the target.
(c) The velocity marker was set at the velocity assumed
for the trial shots (2,225 f. s.).
(d) The bar was moved to the left until the index read
2,100. Then the pointer indicated a velocity of 2,163 f. s.
10-inch rifle (range board issued prior to December 26, 1906).

Powder C. P. W., lot 5, 1901 M. ; V.=2,235 f. s.

Temperature of testing, 70° P.
Temperature of magazine at time of firing, 70° P.
No powder correction for temperature.
In the previous firing with this lot of powder the corrected
velocity was found to be 2,163 f. s.
Corrections due to atmosphere, wind, and tide aggregated
+50 yards.
The results of the trial shots were as follows

First trial shot — 51 yards.

Second trial shot- — 27 yards.
Third trial shot— — 50 yards.

3)— 128
Average — 42 yards.

The velocity for the records was determined as follows

(o) The ruler was set at the range of the center of impact
of the trial shots (6,548 yards).
(6) The index was set at 2,590 (corresponding to the actual
range to the target).
 :

170 riEE-CONTEOIi APPARATUS.

(o) Tlie velocity marker was set at the velocity assumed

for trial shots (2,163 f. s.).
(d) The bar was moved to the left until the index read
2,548. Then the pointer indicated the probable velocity for
the record shot^, viz, 2,150 f. s.
815. If for any reason it is impossible to obtain any data
as to atmospheric conditions, all corrections may be thrown
into the velocity correction by assuming a velocity, firing trial
shots, and determining a new velocity, as above; it is desir-
able for the assumed velocity to be as near the correct ve-
locity as possible.

Searchlights.

816. See Artillery Notes, No. 31,

Telautogra4)h.

817. See Signal Corps Manual, No. 8.

Telephone.

818. See Signal Corps Manual, No. 8.

TELESCOPE.

819. Figure 9 illustrates the important parts of a telescope.

A telescope is a delicatepiece of apparatus and requires care-
ful use. It should never be subjected to unnecessary shock.
When not in use it should be kept in the case provided for it
or protected by proper covers. Parts liable to rust should be
kept lightly oiled bronze parts should be kept clean and dry.
;

To obtain satisfactory vision absolute cleanliness of the lenses

is necessary, and they must be kept free from moisture. Cham-
ois skin or a clean linen handkerchief may be used to remove
moisture or particles of dust, care being taken that the lens is
not scratched by grit or dirt. The lenses will require cleaning
on the inside infrequently, and when this is necessary they
should be removed by a competent person. The object glass
must be kept screwed home at all times. Erecting prisms, if
found in the telescope, should never be removed from the
prism holder, nor the objective lenses from the objective cell
and ring. If they need repair, report should be made to the
proper authority. When the eyepiece of a telescope is re-
moved the cross wires are generally exposed in the tube.
They are very delicate and must not be touched.
820. In the use of a telescope for coast artillery purposes
two adjustments are necessary
1. The focusing of the eyepiece so that the cross wires
appear clear and distinct This should be done by pointing
:

the telescope to the sky. It should not be done with any near
object In the field of view. Generally the cross wires have
 u;

82615—09 12
 :

FIRE-CONTROL APPARATUS. 171

more or less rougbness on them, which is most clearly seen

when the eyepiece is focused properly. Another way of testing
this adjustment is to see whether or not the ends of either
cross wire appear double or blurred. If so, the adjustment is
not perfect.
2. The focusing of the objective so that the object appears
clear and distinct The proper position of the objective to ob-
:

tain this result will be found most readily by moving it in and

out a few times past the proper point. When the image ap-
pears to be satisfactory as to clearness the head should be
moved from side to side or up and down as far as possible,
keeping the image still in view. If the intersection of the
cross wires appears to remain upon exactly the same point on
the object, the focusing Is satisfactory otherwise not. The
;

adjustment should be repeated until this result is obtained.

Apparent motion of the cross wires on the Image, due to
faulty focusing of the object glass, is spoken of frequently as
" parallax." The parallax must be eliminated before satisfac-
tory work can be accomplished.

TELESCOPIC SIGHT.

821. The telescopic sight is attached to the gun carriage, so

that its axis may be adjusted to intersect the axis of the gun
at or beyond mid-range. Normally it Is used to give direction
to the guu, the deflection being set on the sight by means of
—
a horizontal scale graduated from 0° to 6° the 3° point
being in the vertical plane containing the axis of the tele-
scope. On some carriages the sight is mounted so that it may
be used to give elevation as well as direction.

THERMOMETEE.

822. In locating the thermometer in or near the meteoro-

logical station the following should be borne in mind
First. The temperature of the outside air is required and
not the temperature of the station.
Second. The thermometer must be in the shade to obtain the
temperature of the air.
Third. The thermometer should not be located where it
can be affected by radiation from the walls of the station or
by artificial heat from any source.
Fourth. The thermometer should be placed where it is
exposed to a fair circulation of air and protected from the
sun and rain.
Great accuracy in the determination of atmospheric data is
not necessary. Temperature is the most important a change
:

of 5° has about the same effect upon the range as a 10-mile

longitudinal wind five-tenths of an inch is a corresponding
;

barometric change.
172 FIEE-CONTEOL APPARATUS.

Time-interval system.

823. See Signal Corps Manual No. 8.

WIND COMPONENT INDICATOR.

824. The object of this device Is to determine the wind ref-

erence numbers to be used on the range and deflection boards
and to indicate the numbers to the operators of these boards.
It consists of a circular dial (o), figure 10, on the face of-
which the reference numbers are marked with corresponding
horizontal and vertical lines. The dial is Intended to be held
in a vertical position by means of a bracket (m) screwed to
the wall and fastened to the back of the dial in such a way
that the dial Itself will not turn hence the figures it carries
;

will be right side up always.

825. Around the dial Is the movable azimuth ring (6), grad-
uated and numbered clockwise every 5 degrees. This ring can
be set so that the wind azimuth pointer (fc) at the bottom of
the dial points to any required wind azimuth. The ring can
be clamped in position by a clamp screw at the back of the
plate immediately behind the wind azimuth index.
826. Embracing both dial and ring and rotating about an
axle at the back of the dial is the target arm ( C" ) . The tar-
get arm is centered in front by the screw (d), which passes
through the end of It into the center of the dial. It has a
clamp screw, by means of which it may be clamped at any
desired azimuth, Indicated by the azimuth Index (c).
827. The pointer (HH') passes through a slot in the square
projection on the end of the target arm and can be set to indi-
cate any wind velocity from to 50 miles per hour by means
of the wind scale on the target arm, using the end H of
the pointer as an index. The reference numbers to be used
on the range and deflection boards are indicated by the end
(//') of the pointer. The instrument is intended to be sus-
pended from the celling immediately over the plotting board
and facing the range and deflection boards, so that the opera-
tors of these boards can read the range and deflection compo-
nents without leaving their positions.
828. The operator sets the pointer (if) to the wind velocity,
and by turning the azimuth ring brings the wind azimuth to
the pointer (K). He keeps the target arm set to the approxi-
mate azimuth to the target, as Indicated by the gun arm, using
the index (0) and moving the target arm as the target moves.
Should the wind change in velocity or direction, he makes the
corresponding change on the board.

WIND VANE.

829. This is a device for determining the direction of the

wind. It should be remembered that the mean direction of
the wind is desired. The ordinary fluctuations in direction are
 WIND COMPONENT INDICATOR.
S) ®

Fi^./O.
82615 — 09. (To face page 17;;..)
 FIEE-CONTEOL APPARATUS. 173

due usually to local causes near the surface of the earth and
have but little effect upon the flight of the projectile. A true
fish-tail wind undoubtedly produces varying results, but it is
not practicable to do anything other than consider its mean
direction. The observer should watch carefully the movement
of the vane and endeavor to obtain the true mean. It will be
found useful to make chalk marks indicating the observed
swing of the vane, by means of which the mean direction can
be determined.
 Chapter XVIII.

CARE OF MATERIAI,.
GENERAL INSTEtTCTlONS.

830. Officers are held to a strict responsibility for tlie proper

care and preservation of all artillery material in their charge.
831. The methods prescribed for care and preservation of
material are those described herein and those contained in
the publications issued by the supply departments.
832. Batteries are " in service " when they are used at dally
drill by coast-artillery manning parties. Batteries are " out
of service " vehen they are in the hands of a coast-artillery
manning party but not used at dally drill. A battery is " out
of commission " when it is not in the hands of a coast-artillery
manning party. Batteries " in service " or " out of service "
are " in commission."
833. Battery commanders are responsible for the ordnance
property pertaining to batteries " in commission," and ord-
nance officers for those " out of commission."
834. All disappearing guns in commission shall be tripped
at least once each week. All guns in commission shall be ele-
vated and depressed between limits at least once each week.
All carriages in commission shall be traversed between stops
once each week. Guns and carriages out of commission shall
be tripped, elevated, depressed, and traversed at least once
each month.
835. The ammunition-service apparatus (trolleys, motors,
and hoists) shall be operated at least once each week, and the
different working parts (pulleys, journals, etc.) should be kept
clean and lubricated. Special care should be exercised in
operating the motor starter and in preventing the jamming
of any part of the hoists ; also in the handling of projectiles
at the receiving and delivery tables. The Hodges ammunition
hoist is not designed and must not be used for lowering pro-
jectiles, either by motor or by hand power. The Taylor-Ray-
mond ammunition hoist may be used with safety to lower pro-
jectiles by hand power, provided care be exercised and the
hoist operated slowly; but the hoist must not be used to lower
projectiles by motor power. Where emplacements are pro-
vided with cranes these should be used in preference to the
Taylor-Raymond hoist for lowering projectiles.
836. For care of hoists, see Engineer Mimeograph, No. 46,
and supplements.
174
 : : : :

CARE OF MATERIAL. 175

Fortifications in general.

837. The Engineer Department erects, alters, and maintains

all batteries, fire-control stations, fortification power plants,
and structures used for submarine mining.
838. Tbe Engineer Department supplies, installs, and main-
tains the following
Apparatus and lines for fortification power and lighting
(except signal corps storage batteries and mechanisms for
operating flre-control apparatus, mining casemate equipment
for operating the mine system, and ordnance motors for op-
erating guns) cable approaches and covers for cable termi-
;

nals; ammunition hoists; trolleys; pulleys; searchlights and

their equipment.
It supplies the following
Circular benches for observing instruments and plotting
boards; rubber floor cloth for the floors of stations, telephone
booths, and dynamo rooms, reserve lanterns.
It installs underground communication lines.
It furnishes the supplies given in the following table

Supplies. Use.

3?or emplacements, steel and iron work,

Spare parts for engines, boilers, heaters,
generators, etc.
boilers and engines, and electrical ap-
paratus pertaining to seacoast bat-
teries.
For power plants maintained by Engi-
neer Department.

839. The Ordnance Department supplies and maintains the

following
Guns and mortars and their carriages and accessories tools ;

and implements for the service thereof; also fire-control ap-

paratus (not pertaining to communications, time-Interval sys-
tem, signaling and meteorological data), and in addition
observation telescopes stop watches cameras and camera
; ;

supplies drawing boards and drawing instruments thermom-

; ;

eters and hygrometers; magnetos for firing; firing batteries;

bench and hand tools and appliances for fortification power
plants and ordnance repair shops, stencils, and figures for
marking guns and emplacements.
It installs motors on the gun carriages, their circuits, wiring
for firing circuits and illuminating circuits on carriages, and
position-finding instruments.
 : : : ;

176 CARE OF MATERIAL.

It furnishes the supplies given in the following table

Supplies. Use.

Paints For guns, carriages, and position-find-

ing instruments.
Oils for paint Do.
Lubricating oils Do.
Neutral oil For recoil cylinders, gun carriages.
Slushing oil For guns and carriages.
Kerosene For cleaning recoil cylinders and guns.
Abrasives For removing old paint from the guns,
carriages, sights, position finders.
Paulins For gun covers.
Rope, blocks, gins, etc For mechanical maneuvers.
Draftsman's supplies , For battery charts.

Miscellaneous.

Cleaning material: Sal soda, quicklime; For cleaning, painting, and packing
powdered lye, chamois skins, burlap! guns and carriages, and position find-
flax,twine, packing needles, putty, cot- ers, etc.
ton waste (white), cotton waste (cob),
lumber, nails, screws, paint pots, sievesj
brushes, corn brooms, whisk brooms,
hand sponges.
Oil storage tanks (30 and 60 gallons), fun- For storage of oil at batteries.
nels, and measures.
Plumbers' force pumps For cleaning recoil cylinders.
Hose For policing magazines, guns, and car-
riages.

840. For detailed information in regard to allowance of

materials enumerated above, see Ordnance Pamphlet 1869.
841. The Signal Corps supplies, installs, and maintains the
following
All fire-control apparatus pertaining to communications,
time-interval system, signaling, and meteorological data.
It supplies field glasses, portable ammeters and voltmeters
all cable for communications.
It installs submarine cables, overhead lines, and inside wir-
ing, pertaining to the apparatus furnished by it.
842. The Quartermaster's Department supplies the follow-
ing
Furniture (not including rubber floor cloth or circular
benches for fire-control stations), stoves, scythes, sickles,
shovels, rakes, fuel-handling apparatus, fire tools, wheelbar-
rows, etc.
 : :

CARE OF MATERIAL. 177

It furnishes the supplies given in the following table

Supplies.

Paints For power and electric plants.

Fuel
Lubricating oil, Icerosene Do!
Storage tanks, oil Do.
Brooms, sapolio, brushes, soap, mops, sal- For police of fire-control stations, power
soda, waste. and electric plants.
Spare parts for engines, generators- boilers, For power plants maintained by the
and accessories. Quartermaster's Department.

843. Platforms, parapets, and the grounds surrounding

them, whose limits are prescribed by post commanders, shall
be kept in proper police. Drains and sumps shall be inspected
weekly and kept in order.
844. Any damage to or defects in the engineer, signal, or
ordnance work or property shall be reported promptly to the
proper authority.
845. Gun commanders are charged with the care of the guns,
carriages, and loading platforms at all times.
846. Parts of seacoast guns and carriages are not expend-
able, and irrespective of their condition are borne on property
returns.
847. Pamphlets and publications descriptive of ordnance
material and containing instructions relative to caring for,
mounting, and using guns, mortars, and accessories are issued
by the Ordnance Department as listed in Ordnance Depart-
ment Pamphlet Xo. 1467.
848. Oils (see Ordnance Pamphlet No. 1869). The impor- —
tant oils supplied and uses therefor are shown in the follow-
ing table

No.
178 CARE OF MATERIAL.

849. Care must be exercised that no water is allowed to

enter tlie recoil cylinders when they are filled with oil or at
any other time, for this will cause rusting of the interior of
the cylinders.
lu cold weather it may freeze and burst the equalizing pipes
or other parts of the recoil system.
850. Painting.— For allowances and preparation of paints,
see Ordnance Pamphlet 1869.
851. Guns and mortars. — In general, three coats of paint are
given guns and mortars the first year that they are mounted;
thereafter two coats annually will suffice, the actual needs
depending upon the climate and local conditions.
As soon as the piece is mounted on its carriage, all parts
which have been marred in transportation are primed, after
which one complete coat of the gray paint is applied.
The entire surfaces of guns and mortars, except the por-
tions where the tray bears, are painted gray. When de-
tached quadrants are used with mortars the seats for the
quadrants are left unpainted. Before painting the surfaces
are rubbed smooth and made perfectly clean and dry. Special
care must be exercised to prevent painting contact surfaces
forming part of an electrical circuit.
Bronze trays are not painted. Steel trays, excepting the
upper and front surfaces and guide rails are painted the same
color as the gun. No parts of the breechblock or mechanism
are painted. The unpainted surfaces must be kept clean and
bright with oil or pomade.
The elevating bands of pieces mounted on disappearing car-
riages and the elevating racks attached to pieces mounted on
mortar and barbette carriages are painted the same color as
the guns or mortars, leaving the bearing surfaces of the teeth
unpainted.
852. Carriages.— The number of coats of paint required for
carriages is the same as that for guns and mortars. Before
painting, surfaces should be rubbed smooth and made per-
fectly clean and dry. As soon as the carriage Is assembled
completely and the piece mounted, all parts which have been
marred in transportation are primed, after which one complete
coat of olive paint is applied.
All steel and iron nonbearlng surfaces, both inside and out,
are painted. This includes the exposed parts of shafts (ex-
cept squared ends), bottom plate of counterweight, ladders,
crossheads, cranks (not handles), crosshead pawls (except
teeth), and large bronze pieces, including web and spokes of
wheels and cylinder heads.
The following parts are not painted All wearing or bearing
:

surfaces, which Include the handles of handwheels aud cranks,

teeth of all gear wheels, teeth of crosshead pawls, teeth of
crossheads, elevating-rack guides, rollers and surfaces on
which they travel, piston rods, crosshead guides, etc.
The bronze sight holders are not painted, nor are the azi-
muth and elevation scales and pointers and the followers of
 : :

CARE or MATERIAL. 179

the Stuffing boxes; these parts, with the exception of the

sight holders, must be kept clean and bright with oil or
pomade.
Name and direction plates and trunnion brackets for tele-
scopic sights shall not be removed while painting guns and
carriages. Sight brackets shall not be painted. Name and
direction plates are painted, but the raised surfaces of the
letters and figures must be kept polished.
853. The paints mentioned are supplied in original packages,
mixed ready for use. In all cases before using the contents
of the package should be stirred thoroughly with a wooden
paddle if thinning is desired, turpentine Is used. Care should
;

be exercised to have the paint of the proper consistency before

it is applied.
854. To remove old paint from guns and carriages. — When
the paint becomes so thick as to scale off in places or to give
an unsightly appearance, as is the case after a number of coats
have been applied to guns and carriages, it is removed for
repainting as follows
Dissolve 1 pound of concentrated lye, powdered form, in
6 pints of hot water and add enough slaked lime to give the
solution the consistency of paint. Use the solution, freshly
mixed, and apply to the parts where paint is to be removed
with a brush or with waste tied on the end of a stick. When
the solution begins to dry on the surface use a scraper to
remove the old paint and complete the cleaning of the surface
with a mop and water. If one application is not sufficient to
loosen the paint, apply a second coat. Before applying a new
coat of paint wash the surface with a liquid made by dis-
solving one-half pound of washing soda in 8 quarts of water
and wipe dry. Let stand a sufficient length of time so that all
parts will be thoroughly dry before painting.
—
855. Marking guns, mortars, and mortar pits. ^At all coast
artillery posts the position of every gun, mounted or to be
mounted, is given a number. When the gun is in position this
number is placed on it.
Guns and mortars arranged in line are numbered from right
to left in separate series for each battery.
The two pits of each mortar battery are lettered from right
to left or from rear to front Aand B. The mortars in each
pit are numbered as follows
No. 1. The right rear mortar.
No. 2. The right front mortar.
No. 3. The left rear mortar.
No. 4. The left front mortar.
The mortar-pit letter is painted with its median line on the
median line of the front vertical wall or interior slope of the
pit and with its middle point about 10 feet above the floor.
The letter is block, 10 inches high and 8 inches wide, and
painted in white on circular black background 16 inches in
diameter. The mortar number is painted with its median line
on the upper element of the mortar, half way between the
180 CAEB OF MATERIAL.

median circular element of the trunnion band and the face of

the breech, the top of the figure being toward the trunnion
band. The number is white blocli, 4 inches high.
The tactical numbers of guns of 8 inches caliber and upward
are painted on the left half of the horizontal diameter of the
face of the breech, half way between the circumference of the
opening of the breech recess and the circumference of the face
of the breech. The numbers are white block, 4 inches high.
The tactical numbers of guns of caliber less than 8 inches
are located on the gun or carriage so as to be visible easily
from the rear, the location on each class of gun and carriage
in an artillery district being uniform and as prescribed by the
district commander. The numbers are white block, IJ inches
high.
856. Care of guns and mortars.— No part of the piece should
be allowed to rust at any time, and if it is to remain unused
for short intervals all bright and bearing parts should be cov-
ered with a coat of two-thirds synovial and one-third light
slushing oil. If the piece is to remain unused for a long
interval, light slushing oil should be used. For the bore two
applications per year are considered sufficient ;for surfaces
exposed to the weather four applications may be required.
857. To oil the bore an ordinary counter brush is used; it
is secured to the end of a rod and provided with a half disk of
wood to keep it against the bore. By this means any required
thickness may be applied. The brush rod for guns is fitted
with a socket for connecting It with the special sponge staff.
For mortars the brush is supplied with a special handle.
858. To remove the greater portion of the slushing oil from
the bore an Iron scraper Is used. For guns it is fitted for
attachment to the staff of the special sponge ; for mortars it
is provided with a shaft 14 feet in length. The entire removal
of the Oil and residue from the bore by hand is necessary for
star gauging, firing, and after firing before oiling the bore.
After the greater portion of the slushing oil is removed with
the scraper, a sponge is dipped in a solution of concentrated
lye and passed through the bore. This softens and dissolves
partially the coating. Then burlap is wrapped around the
special solid-head sponge, the whole being made of such diam-
eter that it requires eight or ten men to pass it through the
bore, since considerable pressure against the bore is necessary
in order to reach the bottom of the grooves. For covering the
sponge the burlap is cut from 4 to 8 Inches longer than the
head and the selvage laced together with packing needle and
twine. The bore is wiped perfectly dry before firing.
859. After firing the powder residue is removed by using
either the sponges or special cleaning sponge well saturated
with water. To effect this completely burlap is used, one or
two thicknesses being secured over the head of the sponge.
860. The habitual position of guns on disappearing car-
riages is in the loading position, I. e., at an elevation of 5°.
Guns on barbette carriages are given the same elevation.
 CARE OF MATERIAL. 181

861. Mortars are elevated babitually so tbat their axes will

be parallel to the piston rod. The breech cover is left off and
the translating roller is left in place. At posts vchere the sand
blows into the breech mechanism and at all posts during the
cold season where snow and ice may collect and form around
the breech mechanism the mortar is kept horizontal with the
breech cover on.
862. Care of carriages. —
When in use all bearing parts must
be cleaned and lubricated thoroughly. In all carriages special
attention should be given to the lubrication of gun trunnions,
rollers, pintle surfaces, sliding surfaces, elevating, loading,
and traversing mechanisms, including the teeth of all gears.
On disappearing carriages the following parts must be lubri-
cated also : Gun-lever axle bearings, crosshead pins, tripping
and retracting mechanisms, elevating rack and band trun-
nions, and crosshead guides.
The parts mentioned above should be lubricated frequently
whether the carriages are in use or not.
Oil holes where provided must be cleaned out frequently to
keep them free from sand and grit, and kept closed habitually
by the screw plugs or covers provided except during oiling.
Before oiling at any oil hole, wipe off carefully any dirt or
grit near the opening that might 6e carried down into the
hearing by the oil.
Compression grease cups are filled with No. 4J lubricant, so
as to show at all times the plunger well above the top of the
cup.
In general, no parts should be allowed at any time to rust,
and if a carriage is to remain unused for a short interval all
bright and bearing i)arts should be covered with a thin coat of
one-third light slushing oil and two-thirds synovial oil. If
the carriages are to remain unused for a long interval, slush-
ing oil should be used. The rollers and roller paths should be
cleaned and covered with the above mixture and the space
between dust guards and base rings filled with waste or oakum
to keep out dust. Any wrench holes inside of the base rings
should be plugged tightly with fitted wooden plugs.
Experience has indicated that the oil should not be removed
from recoil cylinders when carriages are to remain unused for
a considerable period, as the walls of the cylinders soon be-
come dry and rust.
Garlock's waterproof hydraulic packing is furnished for
packing all stuffing boxes of gun carriages, but hemp packing
may be used when necessary.
If rust is allowed to accumulate on carriages, its removal
from all bearing parts, and especially piston rods, requires
particular attention in order that clearances shall not be
increased unduly. The use of sandpaper for this purpose is
forbidden, and emery cloth No. 1 is coarse enough for removal
of ordinary rust, the rust being softened, if necessary, by
kerosene.
182 CARE OF MATERIAL.

On all seacoast gun carriages special care must be exercised

to insure that bolts passing into hydraulic cylinders are tight
at all times.
863. Mortars are raised from their trunnion beds at least
once every two years, or more frequently if necessary, and
trunnion beds cleaned thoroughly, including the oil grooves in
the trunnion-bed liners.
864. Once every two years mortars shall be dismounted, the
carriage cleaned and overhauled, and the old paint removed
from the counter-recoil springs, which are given two coats of
new paint. The springs must not be reassembled until the
paint is dry. The springs on the right spring bolt are placed
on the left spring bolt and the springs on the two inside bolts
interchanged in reassembling.
865. A record of the dismounting and cleaning is kept in the
emplacement book.
866. To dismount mortars for cleaning springs Take off
the guides and guide caps and unscrew the piston-rod nuts;
use a prop under the lower end of each of the cylinders to
hold them steady as the mortar is raised.
If the springs continue to raise the mortar as the piston-rod
nuts are unscrewed a tackle should be used to bold the mortar
down to the racer. This should be slacked off carefully as the
nuts are unscrewed, so as to prevent any destructive strains
on the nuts.
Build cribbing on both sides of the breech and at the muzzle.
Place a 12-inch block, hewn round, in the muzzle and a 12-
Inch skid, 12 or 15 feet long, under the breech (the span to be
not greater than 9 feet). Have the face of the skid flush with
the face of the breech and the left half moved well forward,
otherwise the skid will not clear the pedestal bracket as the
mortar is raised. Place props in the well for the cylinders.
Kaise the mortar by jacks (15-ton jacks are preferable), one
under each end of the skid and one at the muzzle. The block-
ing should be placed under the skid and under the muzzle.
As the three jacks go up together the saddle rotates about the
Lulcrum and the mortar is moved gradually to the front the ;

cribbing should be arranged accordingly. Much time will be

saved if the jacks are canted about 25° from the vertical
when they take hold, as they will have a longer arc to work
through. Before going up on the jacks unclamp the elevating
gear. When the crossheads leave the piston rods move the
props so that the cylinders will rotate about their trunnions,
top end toward the rear this gives more room for the cribbing.
;

When the centers of the trunnions are about 5 feet 9 inches

above the racer the springs are fully extended and the spring
cap can be taken out. Then the spring columns can be col-
lapsed toward the middle. With the aid of a rope around the
five columns they can be pulled to a vertical position, where
each spring, washer, and rod can be removed.
867. In assembling the springs follow the same method in
reverse order. Before placing the springs and washers on the
 : : :

CARE OF MATERIAL. 183

spring rods run down the locking nuts against the fixed nuts.
This will bring the top of the spring rods nearer the spriug
cap and cause them to enter more freely. The spring rods
will have to be guided into their proper holes in the spring
cap. This is done by letting the spring columns rest against
a small scantling. After the saddle has been lowered a few
inches and some compression given the springs the spring rods
can be guided accurately into their proper holes with the aid
of a crowbar. A small amount of oil on the top end of each
spring rod will assist the rods materially in sliding through
the spring cap.
Should the weight of the mortar fail to compress the springs
sufficiently to permit the entering of the piston-rod nuts, the
assembling bolts and compression washers, or the tackle above
referred to, can be used to draw the mortar down. The
weight of 10 men standing on the mortar will lower it about
half an inch.
After the guides, etc., have been assembled the assembling'
bolts and compression washers can be used to hold the saddle
while the gun is raised 5 or 6 inches out of the trunnion beds
for the purpose of cleaning the trunnions and their beds.
868. Removal of paint from counter-recoil springs. —
^The fol-
lowing method is used when practicable
For 100 counter-recoil springs, dissolve 15 pounds of lye in
water, using an iron kettle or trough sufficiently large to per-
mit of complete immersion of as many springs as possible.
Pleat the solution to the boiling point and immerse each spring
for about five minutes. Upon removing the spring from the
solution the old paint may be washed off by a stream of water
from a hose.
869. Cleaning of recoil cylinders. — Recoil cylinders should
be cleaned a short time prior to each firing.
In no case is it necessary to remove the packing from stuff-
ing boxes in order to clean the cylinders.
The following methods are given as guides
First method {disappearing carriages).

(a) Trip the gun.

(6) Remove the oil from the hydraulic recoil system as
follows
Obtain a length of hose sufficiently long to reach from the
emptying coupling to the gun platform, make one end fast to the
equalizing pipe under the emptying coupling, and place a fun-
nel in the end so that when the coupling is opened oil will
flow into the funnel and through the hose. Provide a reserve
tank for hydrolene oil and place it on the gun platform near
the chassis. Pass the end of the hose through the opening in
the chassis just in front of the traversing shaft, place a sie\o
above the opening In the top of the reserve tank and hold the
end of the hose just above the sieve. Unscrew the opening
coupling and the oil will flow from the cylinders (both filling
184 CARE or MATERIAL.

plugs having been taken out) into the reserve tank. This
avoids spilling oil on the carriage and the platform and saves
the labor of handling it in buckets.
(c) Retract the gun until the pistons are in the middle of
the cylinders, then slack away until the pawls engage in the
ratchet teeth on the crosshead observe that the pawls are
;

engaged properly in the ratchet teeth, and that the pistons are
not under the filling holes.
(d) Remove the piston-rod brackets from the rear ends of
the chassis rails. Take ofC the two nuts on the front end of
each piston rod, remove the rear cylinder head from each cylin-
der, and pull the rods carefully to the rear out of the cylinders.
Before removing any part it should be marked so as to Insure
its being assembled in its correct position.
(e) Clean thoroughly each cylinder from both ends with
kerosene oil forced in with a hand pump, then wipe dry with
clean cotton waste and clean the piston rods. The equalizing
and connecting pipes should be dismounted and cleaned by
forcing kerosene oil into them with the pump.
(/) Assemble the equalizing and connecting pipes, leaving the
throttling valve wide open. Insert each piston rod in its cylin-
der, exercising care to prevent binding of the piston, burring
of the walls, or other damage. Assemble the two nuts on the
front of the rod move each rear cylinder head forward into
;

its seat in the cylinder. Assemble the piston-rod brackets to

the chassis, and then secure firmly the rear cylinder heads to
the cylinders and fill the recoil cylinders with hydrolene oil.
This will require some time, as the oil can enter the parts of
the cylinders in rear of the pistons only through the equalizing
pipes and the throttling bar orifices. Insert the filling plugs
when apparently filled, close the throttling valve, and retract
the gun to the loading position. Complete the filling of the
cylinders and close the throttling valve to its proper setting.
For this method a plumber's foreepump is supplied to each
coast artillery post, also suction-hose discharge tube.
Inspect carefully all parts dismounted and note that they
have been assembled properly then trip the pawls and let
;

the gun rise into battery. Then the piston-rod nuts should be
loosened to insure the rod being located centrally in the cylin-
der and the nuts tightened.
The gun should be retracted and tripped several times to
Insure that all parts are in proper working order.

Second method (disappearing carriage).

(a) Trip the gun.

(&) Remove the oil.
(c) Close the emptying coupling and put 10 gallons of kero-
sene oil in each cylinder and replace filling plugs. With the
use of retraction cables bring the gun from battery and allow
it to go in battery slowly with the cables on, controlling the
motion by the retraction cranks. Repeat this operation
 CARE OF MATERIAL. 185

several times. In this way tlie lierosene will be forced

through every portion of the and pipes and
recoil cylinders
will clean all parts. With the gun in battery the emptying
coupling is unscrewed and the kerosene allowed to drain out.
After kerosene has drained out place about 20 gallons of
hydrolene in the cylinders and work the gun in and from
battery with cables on, in the same manner as before. Drain
this hydrolene out and throw it away or save it to flush out
pintle bearings. After cylinders have drained refill with
hydrolene.
When batteries are equipped with electric power for retract-
ing, the foregoing, method is an easy one. Guns are drawn
from battery by power and allowed to go back with four men
on the retracting cranks (for 12-inch guns). If retracting is
to be done by hand, labor will be saved by removing all hand
counterweights before starting.
(d) If cylinders have not been cleaned for so long that
female portions of counter-recoil buffers have become packed
with hardened oil and sediment, the gun will either go in bat-
tery by creeping the last inch or may not go entirely in. If
the above method does not serve to remove the obstruction, the
cylinder head must be taken out and the buffers cleaned by
hand.
(e) In employing this method a careful examination should
be made to see that the cables are in good condition, and the
gun must be allowed to go into battery slowly and evenly.

Third method (barbette carriage).

(a) Remove oil from cylinders and equalizing pipes.

(&) Eetract the gun until the pistons are in the middle of
the cylinders; place hard-wood planks, 1 inch thick, between
the front ends of the cylinders and the counter-recoil stops
so as to retain the top carriage positively in this position.
Care should be taken that both planks are of equal length.
(c) Remove the cylinder heads and both piston-rod nuts and
withdraw the piston rods carefully from the cylinders. Each
part dismounted should be tagged to insure its being assem-
bled In its correct place.
(d) Clean the cylinders thoroughly with kerosene oil forced
from a hand pump into both ends of each cylinder. The plug
in the emptying coupling should be removed and both
branches of the equalizing pipe flushed out from their cyl-
inder ends. (In 10-inch barbette carriages, model of 1893,
Nos. 2 to 10, Inclusive, a cored equalizing passage connects the
pressure ends of the cylinders. In these carriages the empty-
ing plug at the middle of this passage should be removed and
both parts of the passage flushed out, as in the case of the
equalizing pipe. ) Then wipe the interior of the cylinders dry
with clean cotton waste and clean the piston rods and cylinder
heads.
82615—09 13
 : :

186 CARE OF MATERIAL.

(e) Replace the emptying coupling plug, assemble the piston-

rod nuts and cylinder heads, exercising great care that none
of the parts are burred or otherwise damaged. The cylinder
heads should be screwed into place firmly, care being taken
that the packing ring is in good condition and placed properly.
Screw the followers tight against the packing in the stuffing
boxes.
All parts dismounted should be inspected to ascertain that
they have been assembled properly. Retract the top carriage
until both planks can be removed, then, by means of the re-
tracting gear, allow the gun to return slowly into the firing
position. After the cylinders have been filled with oil the gun
should be retracted and allowed to run into battery several
times to insure that all parts are in good working order.

Fourth method (pedestal mount).

For this method the following material Is required

Three 12 by 12 inch blocks.
Two 12 by 6 inch blocks.
Two 12 by 4 inch blocks.
Six 12 by 2 Inch blocks.
Four 12 by 1 inch blocks.
The above blocks should be about 3 feet 6 inches long.
One 15-ton jack.
Sixty feet 2-inch rope.
Sixty feet 3-inch rope.
Two single blocks.
Two double blocks.
One 24-inch rule.
One chain pipe wrench.
One sledge hammer.
Five gallons kerosene oil.
Ten pounds waste.
One pound white lead.
The necessary tools in tool chest provided with gun
and carriage.
The recoil cylinders of these carriages should be emptied at
least once in three months and cleaned thoroughly at least
once in six months. A
plumber's hand force pump is used for
this purpose.
The method is as follows
(a) Elevate the gun about 10° and remove the oil in the
recoil cylinder through the drain hole.
(&) Place the gun at 5° depression measure accurately the
;

distance from the front face of the piston-rod lug on the baud
to the rear end of the recoil cylinder, for use in assembling
the gun correctly in its balanced position. Knot a stout cable
tightly around the breech of the gun immediately in rear
of the band, passing the end along the top of the gun and
through the eyebolt on top of the cradle. Lash it to one of the
shield supports, leaving as little slack in the cable as possible.
 :

CARE or MATERIAL. 187

Unscrew slowly the rear nut on each spring rod until the
front nut bears against the spring cylinder head, then remove
the rear nuts. Remove the rear nut on the recoil piston rod
and the spring yoke. Build up blocks of various thicknesses
under the breech of the gun so that when the piece is set at 5°
elevation there is a clearance of about 1 inch between the
upper surface of the topmost block and the lug of the recoil
band. This is recommended as a safety precaution.
Place the gun at 5° elevation, slack the cable, and push the
gun rearward. If it is impossible to start the gun in this
way, attach a luff tackle, and if six or eight men are unable to
start it with this, tap the face of the muzzle with a heavy
block, keeping a steady strain on the fall of the tackle.
Repeat these operations until the distance from the front face
of the piston-rod lug to the rear end of the piston is .iust suffi-
cient to permit the front nut to be removed. As the piece
slides back keep a clearance of about 1-inch under the recoil
lug, shifting the blocks for this purpose. Remove the bolt
which secures the left-hand spring-case extension to the
cradle, unscrew the spring-case extension (using a chain-pipe
wrench), and remove it with the recoil springs ^tlU assembled.
This will permit ready access to the cylinder head. Unscrew
the follower about three turns to relieve the pressure on the
packing and unscrew the cylinder head. It may be necessary
to start the cylinder head by a blow on the handle of the cylin-
der-head wrench with a sledge hammer. Move the piston rod
rearward through its hole in the recoil lug until the piston
and rear cylinder head are against the lug.
(c) Clean thoroughly the cylinder with kerosene oil forced
into the rear end with a hand pump or by hand with waste
soaked in kerosene oil, then wipe the interior dry with clean
cotton waste. Then the piston rod, piston, and rear cylinder
head should be cleaned. The counter-recoil buffer should not
be removed.
Reassemble as follows
Force the piston rod and cylinder head forward into place
and assemble the front nut on the piston rod. Screw the
rear cylinder head into its seat, taking care that it is seated
firmly. Force the piston rod forward until the piston is
against the front end of the cylinder and tighten the follower.
Release the elevating friction clamp, and by means of a jack
under the breech bring the gun to the horizontal. Insert the
left recoil spring, screw up the spring-case extension, and re-
place the spring-case extension stud bolt. By means of the
jack further depress the piece until the gun moves slowly and
gently into the firing position by pushing on the breech. If
the gun does not slide readily, it may be necessary to use
tackle and shock as described above for moving the gun rear-
ward. Refill the cylinder with hydrolene oil. Adjust the
front piston-rod nut so that the distance from the front face of
the piston-rod lug to the rear end of the cylinder is the same
as it was before dismounting. The spring yoke and rear nuts
188 CAEE or MATERIAL.

Should be replaced on the three rods and the nuts on the spring
rods tightened until the front nuts, which have not been
moved, bear firmly against the yoke.
870. To remove packing from stitifing boxes. — When diffi-
culty is experienced in removing packing from stuffing boxes
•with the hooks provided for the purpose the following method
may be used with success:
Force the packing extractor down on the packing and turn
in a contraclockwise direction until the hooks have engaged
in the packing and are turning it. Then continue to turn in
a contraclockwise direction and pull the extractor outward
gently at the same time. The packing will conform to the
threads of the stuffing box and may be brought out easily and
without injury to threads or packing.
—
871. To repack stuffing boxes. Unscrew the follower and be
careful to remove the ring gland. Remove the old packing,
and if any of it is fit for use again it should be put in after
the new.
In general, six rings of Garlock's packing are required for
packing each box. Put one ring at a time on the piston rod,
breaking joints. Force well to the bottom of the stuffing box
by means of a wooden stick and mallet. Treat each layer of
packing in a similar manner until the proper thickness of
packing has been attained. Now put the gland in place and
screw up the follower. No more force than that of two men
should be put on the spanner wrench, and generally that of
one man will be sufficient. The addition of a pipe to the end
of the spanner wrench should not be permitted.
872. Dismounting breechblocks of heavy cannon. — Open
breech, remove the firing attachment, and place a shot truck
with its tray under the mushroom head, elevating the tray
until it bears the weight of the mushroom head and spindle.
Remove the spindle nut and move truck back so as to with-
draw the spindle from the block. Remove the split rings, gas-
check pad, and filling-in disk.
To assemble, proceed in the reverse order. The firing at-
tachment should not be placed on spindle until the mushroom
head has been adjusted.
For further Instructions in dismantling, dismounting, and
caring for breechblocks, see Ordnance Pamphlet on Breech
Mechanism for Seacoast Cannon, No. 1665.
873. To adjust pad.— Close the breech with the spindle nut
loose, but not loose enough to permit slipping of the pad or
split rings, rotate the block one-half. With the mechanism
in this position screw up the spindle nut as tight as it can be
screwed with the wrenches provided.
It is necessary to insert the end of a screw-driver in the
opening of the nut in order to spread it sufficiently to allow
its rotation without rotating the spindle.
Clamp the spindle nut and rotate the breechblock until the
breech is closed completely. This last operation presses the
pad into its seat, due to the forward motion of the block.
 CARE OF MATERIAL. 189

Then the pad should be in proper adjustment for firing;

this may be tested by turning the mushroom head by hand.
It should turn easily, but without play.
874. Examination of the breech mechanism of mounted
—
guns. The breech mechanism of mounted guns should be
operated at least once each week, and such parts of it as
need cleaning should receive proper attention. If necessary,
the tray is removed in order to clean the worm, worm shaft,
the spiral gear, and their recesses.
The mechanism should be oiled frequently, especially the
worm shaft and the hinge pin synovial oil is issued for this
;

purpose.
875. The breechblocks of 10-inch and 12-inch B. L. rifles,
model 1S88, mounted on barbette carriages should not be
opened when the gun has an elevation of more than 1°, since
with a greater elevation the crank of the translating roller is
liable to be bent by striking against the right cheek of the top
carriage.
On account of this interference neither of these guns should
be elevated or depressed while the breech is open.
876. Firing mechanisms. — Firing mechanisms should not bo
left on any gun or mortar out of service, but should be kept
dismantled in the box provided for the purpose. All parts
must be kept oiled and entirely free from dust.
—
877. Projectiles for target practice. Unless special instruc-
tions are given, cast-iron shot or shell of service weight and
form are used. When necessary, sand may be used in the
cavity of shell to bring them up to the proper weight. Saw-
dust may be mixed with sand to fill the cavity completely, or
the sand may be wet to secure the desired weight. Fixed am-
munition for target practice is issued upon proper requisitions,
the projectiles of which are of proper weight and without
bursting charge or fuse.
—
878. Piling projectiles. Projectiles when received at a post
are unboxed and piled with points to the wall, base out, so
that they may be inspected easily.
879. Packing boxes for projectiles. — The packing boxes in
which projectiles are received should be kept until the project-
iles are used.
880. Painting projectiles.— Projectiles are painted as pre-
scribed in ordnance pamphlets 1869 and 1877, and in case the
galleries are wet the projectiles after painting should be
slushed. The distinctive color to indicate the character of the
bursting charges is not applied until the projectiles shall have
been filled, after which the entire base of each projectile shall
be painted the required color at once.
881. Loading projectiles. — Instructions for loading project-
iles with high explosive are contained in Ordnance Pamphlet
No. 1727.
882. Care of empty metallic cases and primers. — After the
expenditure of ammunition in target practice with guns using
metallic cartridge cases the empty cases are taken up on the
 :

190 CAHE OP MATERIAL.

property return of post as " empty metallic cartridge cases,"

under the heading provided for that purpose. Immediately
after firing the cases should be decapped, cleaned well by
washing inside and out, and dried.
All obturating electric and friction primer cases should be
cleaned immediately after firing and turned in to the post
ordnance officer for shipment to Frankford Arsenal, as pro-
vided for .30-caliber shell.
883. Cartridge storage cases. —Whenever it may be necessary
on account of weather conditions or for other adequate reasons
to delay target practice the following method of resealing
cartridge storage cases temporarily is provided for the proper
protection of the smokeless-powder charges
Support the cartridge storage case in a horizontal position
on a table or bench, and after pressing the lid firmly on the
ease apply melted paraffin with a brush to the joint between
the lid and the cartridge storage case, at the same time turn-
ing the latter rather rapidly at first, but more slowly as the
paraffin sets. Continue this operation until a thick coat, en-
tirely covering the joint, has been formed. Each layer should
be allowed to set before applying the next one. Before put-
ting on the lid the joint between it and the cartridge storage
ease should be made clean and dry. No special skill is re-
quired in this work, and if the paraffin is kept hot and thor-
oughly liquid iind care is used in applying it, the joint will be
waterproof and will stand ordinary handling. In turning the
cartridge storage case while applying the paraffin care should
be exercised not to allow the powder charge to strike against
the lid, as any severe jar or blow is liable to crack the coat of
has set and become brittle. Rubber
paraffin, especially after it
tape may be used at the joints for temporary sealing. If con-
ditions are such that the powder charges contained in car-
tridge storage cases that have been broken open and resealcd
in the manner described may not be used within six months
from the date of opening the cases, report should be made to
the district armament officer, who will take steps to provide
for the resealing of the cases by soldering.
Cartridge storage cases should be handled as little as pos-
sible after sealing in the manner described, and should be
stored where other articles will not be placed upon them.
In reopening the cartridge storage cases the paraffin may be
removed readily by striking it lightly with a hammer or an
iron bar and then scraping the joint with a chisel.
884. To carry out the foregoing instructions the following
material is issued to ordnance officers of artillery districts
:

Two .75-inch brushes.

One 2-quart enamel saucepan.
Twenty pounds of paraffin.
Paraffin will be replaced upon requisitions submitted in the
usual manner.
885. Powder. — Powder Issued to the batteries for target prac-
tice or action is stored and cared for in service magazines, as
 —
CARE OF MATERIAL. 191

provided in War Department memoranda, general orders, and

circulars.
Instructions for preparation and care of powder charges are
contained in Ordnance Pamptilet No. 1872.
Directions for blending and drying powders stored at forts
are contained in Ordnance Pamplilet No. 1871 and Artillery
Memoranda.
886. Instructions for the shipment of explosives are found
in Ordnance Pamphlet No. 1720 and in the pamphlet on this
subject issued by the railroad companies under the interstate-
commerce law.
887. Care of telescopes. — The prisms and lenses in the tele-
scopes of position tinders, azimuth instruments, and sights are
not arranged for adjustment by those using them ; the taking
apart of telescopes for any purpose, and the making of any
adjustments other than those provided for in their construc-
tion and described in the pamphlets issued by the Ordnance
Department, except under the supervision of district arma-
ment officers, are forbidden.
When telescopes or any instruments of the range-finding
and flre-control system for coast artillery issued by the Ord-
nance Department require repair, a report describing the char-
acter and extent of the injuries or defects is made to the arma-
ment officer of the district. In case the repairs or adjustments
required by telescopes and other delicate instrutuents of pre-
cision are of such a nature that they can not be made at the
post the instruments are shipped by express to such arsenal
as may be designated by the district armament officer.
888. Paulins. —Specially shaped paulius for the protection
of seacoast guns and carriages at fortifications on the Atlantic
coast north of the fortieth parallel of latitude are provided by
the Ordnance Department upon requisition. Paulins for other
fortifications than those named above or for other purposes
are provided only in cases of extreme necessity, which should
be explained fully in each instance.
889. Electrical installations. —
In general, the care and pres-
ervation of engineer, signal-corps property, fire-control instal-
lation, power and electric plants is charged to the artillery
engineer. In this duty he is assisted by master electricians,
engineers, electrician-sergeants, first and second class, firemen,
and master gunners.
For information concerning the methods to be employed in
carrying out the above instructions, see Signal Corps Manual
No. 8, Submarine Mine Manual, engineering circulars (Signal
Corps), mimeographs (engineer). Artillery Notes, and other
available publications.
Telephones and telautographs or other portable apparatus
which is exposed to the weather when installed at batteries
out of commission may be removed and placed in a storeroom.
(See paragraph 606.) This does not apply to batteries in
commission but out of service.
890. Care-taker detachments.— The duties to be performed
by care-taker detachments consist of
192 CARE OF MATERIAL.

(o) Care, preservation, and protection of all government

property.
( 6 ) General police of the batteries, power plants, fire-control
stations, and ottier public buildings and of their Immediate
surroundings.
(c) Enforcing the regulations relating to persons coming on
government reservations and visiting or inspecting the bat-
teries or buildings.
891. The care of a battery includes, in addition to the care
of the battery proper and its armament, the care of all build-
ings, rooms, flre-control stations pertaining thereto and of the
contents thereof.
892. The care and preservation of all ordnance property is
in the charge of an ordnance-sergeant when practicable.
893. The care and preservation of all engineer and signal
property is in the charge of an electrician-sergeant when
practicable.
894. The general protection of all government propert,y and
the police of batteries, buildings, and surroundings is in the
charge of a noncommissioned officer of Coast Artillery, who is
also in command of a detachment of privates of Coast Ar-
tillery detailed to assist the ordnance-sergeant in the care and
preservation of the public property in his charge, to guard the
reservation against the intrusion of unauthorized persons, and
to police the batteries, buildings, and grounds.
895. At subposts where an ordnance or electrician sergeant
is not provided the noncommissioned officer of artillery in
command of the artillery detachment acts as such.
896. The composition of artillery detachments to assist ord-
nance-sergeants is determined on the following basis: One
private to every 2 guns of 6-inch or greater caliber ; 1
private to every 2 mortars; 1 private to each rapid-fire bat-
tery of 4 guns or less below 6-inch in caliber: P/-oi;((?C(Z,..That
in no case shall a care-taker detachment consist of less than
1 noncommissioned officer and 3 privates.
897. One private, in addition to those authorized in the pre-
ceding paragraph, is detailed to cook for the detachment when
it messes separately.
898. The noncommissioned officer of artillery in command of
the artillery detachment is held responsible for the good order
and military discipline of his detachment. He details the
privates of the detachment as watchmen of the batteries,
buildings, and grounds in accordance with a roster kept for
that purpose. At least one man is on watch at all times.
The watch tour is of such duration as the commanding officer
of the artillery district may prescribe, not to exceed eight
hours. During the time that a man is ou watch he makes the
rounds as prescribed by the district commander at least once
every two hours.
 Chapter XIX.

STORAGE AND HANDLING OF EXPLOSIVES.

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS.

899. At least once each calendar month each officer re-

sponsible for the care of explosives stored at posts shall inspect
personally each place where such explosive Is stored. At this
inspection he shall see that the requirements of these instruc-
tions for the storage and handling of explosives are being
observed carefully. He shall report to his post commander
the result of his inspection.
900. Remove all dirt, grit, and foreign material from cases
before placing them in storage.
901. Avoid sliding or rolling cases. Lift, carry, and deposit
them with care.
902. One of the most Important requirements in the care of
any explosive is absolute cleanliness in and about the place
where the explosive is stored. By removing all foreign mate-
rials from a magazine the chances of accidents are reduced
greatly. The ground around the storage place must be kept
free from leaves, long grass, brush, dSbris, or anything which
may increase the fire risks.
903. Officers charged with the receipt and storage of ex-
plosives shall direct personally the work of handling the cases
and shall select men who, either by previous experience or
reputation for care and steadiness, are well qualified for the
work.
904. Never expose cases of explosives to the direct rays of
the sun longer than is absolutely necessary. Cover them with
a paulin or similar cover in such a way as to admit of the
free circulation of air. The effect of the direct rays of the
sun on a metallic case is to raise the temperature inside the
case to a point considerably above that of the open air, and
this temperature is maintained for a considerable time after
the exposure.
905. In opening cases avoid as far as possible the use of
implements which may produce sparks. Suitable implements
are a wooden mallet or copper hammer and a wooden wedge or
copper chisel. Use a hammer only when necessary, and then
as lightly as possible.
906. The keys of magazines and storage places must be kept
in the hands of thoroughly reliable and responsible persons.
907. .Whenever there is more than one kind of explosive in
a storage place but one kind shall be placed in a pile, and the
different kinds separated as much as possible.
193
194 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF EXPLOSIVES.

908. Only those explosives mentioned herein as being suit-

able for storage together shall be placed in any single storage
place.
909.Free circulation of dry air is most desirable in any
place where explosives are stored. Cases should alvcays be
raised off the floor of the storage place and placed on skids.
910. If a storage place is artificially heated or from climatic
conditions the temperature of the air is liable to rise above
100° F., a maximum thermometer shall be suspended therein
and the temperature watched carefully during the period of
excessive heat. Should a temperature as high as 100° F. be
maintained for any length of time the place must be cooled or
the explosive removed.
911. Black powder is now supplied to the service in rela-
tively small quantities. It must never be stored with other
explosives.
912. Black powder must be kept dry, and on account of the
danger of explosion by ignition must be protected thoroughly
from all Are risks.
913. Matches and unauthorized lights shall not be permitted
in any magazine.
914. No loose explosive shall be permitted in any building,
exceiJt such as is being used actually in preparing charges.
915. Empty ammunition cases shall never be stored with
filled cases.
916. A copy of these instructions shall be hung in a con-
venient place in every magazine containing explosive, for the
information and guidance of all concerned.

COMMEKCIAL DETONATORS.

Package.

917. These detonators are supplied in pasteboard boxes con-

taining 50 detonators, and the pasteboard boxes are shipped in
suitable wooden boxes.

Storage and care.

918. Commercial detonators may be stored in any place

which is available, provided it is cool, dry, secure from en-
trance by unauthorized persons, and not subjected to tempera-
tures greater than 100° F.
919. Under no circumstances may detonators be stored with
other explosives, except fuses and primers, and temporarily
with dry gun cotton when in the fuse cans preparatory to load-
ing mines. (See Dry gun cotton.)
920. On account of the sensitiveness of mercury fulminate,
the filling charge of the detonator, to detonation by a blow,
special care must be exercised in keeping individual deto-
nators off the floor or other places where they may be exploded
by stepping on them or dropping heavy articles on them.
 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF EXPLOSIVES. 195

921. Never handle the detonators by the wires in such a

way that the detonator itself may be brought in violent con-
tact with any object.
Inspection.

922. The inspection of this class of explosives shall be lim-

ited to seeing that the requirements of Storage and care are
observed strictly.
DYNAMITE.
Package.

923. Dynamite cartridges are packed ordinarily in sawdust

in wooden boxes. Each cartridge is wrapped in paraffin
paper. The cartridges are arranged in the box so that when
they are transported all cartridges will lie on their sides and
never on the ends. "Usually the amount of explosive in a
single package will not exceed 50 pounds.

Storage and care.

924. The boxes must never be allowed to stand so that the

cartridges will be vertical.
925. Like other nitroglycerin mixtures, dynamite freezes at
about 40° F., and in its frozen condition is, under ordinary
circumstances, less liable to explosion from detonation or per-
cussion than when thawed, but more susceptible to explosion
by simple ignition. Should any of the nitroglycerin be exuded,
the dynamite cartridges are much more sensitive to explosion
by a blow.
926. It is important that dynamite cartridges be kept dry.
If exposed to a moist atmosphere, there is a tendency of the
water, condensed from the air on all exposed surfaces, to dis-
place the nitroglycerin.
927. The cases should be raised from the floor on skids and
the floor underneath covered with clean sawdust. The saw-
dust should be removed from time to time, the old sawdust
being burned in the open air.
928. Rubber gloves should be worn in handling this explo-
sive, or in the absence of rubber gloves cover the hands with
grease and wear cotton gloves. This is for the protection of
the skin from the Injurious effect of nitroglycerin.
929. Dynamite ihay be stored with wet guncotton and ex-
Ijloslve D.
930. Date of receipt at post shall be marked on each box.

Insiicction.

931. At the monthly inspection all boxes shall be examined

to see If they are dry. If not dry, all shall be exposed to the
dry air out of the direct rays of the sun.
932. The principal source of danger from dynamite is in the
exudation of the nitroglycerin. Exudation is indicated by
the presence of small white, oily, lustrous globules of liquid
196 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF EXPLOSIVES.

either among the particles of dynamite or on the packages. If

such globules are discovered, they may be identified positively
as nitroglycerin by absorbing a drop in a piece of unglazed
paper, which should be placed on an anvil or other piece of
metal and striking it a sharp blow with a hammer. If it be
nitroglycerin, an explosion will occur. Another test is to set
fire to the paper, and if the liquid be nitroglycerin it will burn
with a crackling noise and a greenish-yellow flame.
933. If exuded nitroglycerin has stained floors or other'
material not readily destroyed, the nitroglycerin may be de-
composed and rendered harmless by washing with sulphur
solution. Sulphur solution may be made by boiling 50 pounds
of lime in a barrel of water and adding powdered sulphur
until the solution will take up no more. This will require
about 20 pounds of sulphur. The resulting bright orange-
colored solution should be filtered and only the filtrate used.
A suitable filter for this purpose is a piece of thin cheese cloth.
Sodium carbonate may be used in the place of lime.
934. Dynamite may be destroyed by burning in small quan-
tities ata time. Slit the cartridge with a knife, spread out
the contents over some straw or shavings, and ignite carefully.
Do not attempt to burn frozen dynamite.
EXPLOSIVE D.

Package.

935. Explosive D is contained in double paper bags contain-

ing about 100 to 125 pounds of explosive. These bags are
inclosed either in the standard cartridge storage cases or in
strongly hooped wooden barrels painted inside with rubberine
or other authorized paint.

Storage and care.

936. This explosive must be stored in a perfectly dry place,
preferably in a magazine. If it is impracticable to store in a
magazine, the explosive may be stored in the dryest place
available where it is protected thoroughly from all fire risks.
937. The barrels are stored on end, marked end uppermost.
938. Date of receipt at post shall be painted on each barrel.
939. There shall be no cards or other material tacked on the
barrel.
940. There shall be no nails driven in the barrel.
941. If from any cause the barrels of explosive are wet and
there is a reasonable assurance that the interior has become
wet, a barrel shall be selected and opened. If the interior is
wet, a full report of the circumstances shall be made to the
War Department. If the interior is dry, the barrel shall be
reheaded carefully and all barrels dried in the open air out of
the direct rays of the sun.
942. Explosive D may be stored with wet gun cotton and
dynamite.
 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF EXPLOSIVES. 197

Inspection by the Ordnance Department,

943. Technical inspection is confidential.

Inspection- at posts.

944. No technical inspection of this explosive shall be made

at posts except by the Ordnance Department.
945. Barrels shall not be opened for the purpose of inspect-
ing the contents.
946. If any barrel shows signs of drying out and opening at
the staves or head, all barrels shall be given a coat of rubber-
ine or other authorized paint.

FUSES AND PMMEES.

PacJcagc.

947. Fuses and primers are packed in hermetically sealed

metallic boxes, inclosed in suitable wooden containers. These
boxes are not to be opened until the fuses and primers are
required for use.
Storage and care.

948. Cases of fuses and primers may be stored in any place

which provided it is cool, dry, secure from en-
is available,
trance by unauthorized persons, and not subjected to a tem-
perature greater than 100° F.
949. Under no circumstances may fuses and primers be
stored with other explosives except the commercial detonators
used in submarine mines.

Inspection.

950. The inspection of this class of explosives shall be lim-

ited to seeing that the requirements of Storage and care are
observed strictly.
GUN COTTON.
Package.

951. Wet gun cotton for submarine mines is supplied in

boxes containing approximately 100 pounds of dry gun cotton
with 25 pounds of water absorbed total weight, 125 pounds.
;

The boxes are lined with zinc and the lids are screwed down
upon a rubber gasket. There is an opening in the lid for re-
placing water lost by evaporation. The manufacturer's name,
the date of nitration, net and gross weights are stamped on
each box. The object of having the gross weight on the box is
to give an easy means of checking the amount of water con-
tained in the gun cotton at the time of the quarterly weighing.
198 STOBAGB AND HANDLING OF EXPLOSIVES.

Storage and care.

952. Maga7,ines in wliich gun cotton is stored should not be
allowed to attain a temperature as high as 100° F. for any
length of time.
953. Gun cotton which is kept loet may deteriorate after
long storage, but will not become dangerous.
954. Wet gun cotton can not be ignited by a flame, but grad-
ually smoulders away as the outer portions in contact with
the flame become dried.
955. A brownish or reddish shade is sometimes seen in cakes
of gun cotton. This is due to the presence of iron in the wash
water and does not indicate decomposition.
956. When storing gun cotton in the magazine the piles of
boxes should be made so as to give free circulation of air and
the greatest convenience in handling consistent with the
capacity of the magazine.
957. In the event of damage to any case, which may cause
loss of water by evaporation, the contents shall be removed at
once, repacked in a gun-cotton box which has been washed with
soda solution, the proper amount of water added to the con-
tents, and the box closed. The gross weight shall be marked
on the case. In repacking avoid as much as possible handling
the cakes with the bare hands. This is for the protection of
the gun cotton from oil or acid of any kind. Clean cotton or
rubber gloves are suitable covering for the hands when en-
gaged on this work.
958. If for any reason the cases are subjected to dampness
sufficient to cause unusual deterioration of the cases, they
should be removed from the magazine and dried out of the
direct rays of the sun.
959. Gun cotton containing 25 per cent of moisture may be
stored with Explosive D or dynamite, but never with dry gun
cotton.
960. Empty cases, before being placed in storage, must be
washed thoroughly to remove all traces of gun cotton.

Inspection t)y the Ordnance Department.

961. Samples of each gun cotton issued to the service

lot of
are preserved in the laboratory of the Ordnance Department
for chemical test. These retained samples are subjected regu-
larly to technical inspection and test by that department to
determine their condition as to stability. This will insure the
detection of lots that are deteriorating and their removal from
the posts or their destruction, before they have deteriorated
to such an extent that they become dangerous.

Inspection at posts.

962. In addition to the regular monthly inspection, at the

end of each quarter the responsible for submarine-mine
officer
explosive shall supervise the weighing of each box of
"un
cotton under his care. Any loss in the gross weight shalfbe
 STORAGE AXD HANDLING OF EXPLOSIVES. 199

made up by the addition of distilled water poured through the

filling hole. Water thus added will be absorbed gradually by
the charge.
963. No further inspection of this explosive is necessary.

Dry gun cotton.

964. Dry gun cotton used for submarine mine iirimers.

is
965. Primers are not to be prepared until just previous to
the time they are to be used in loading. Therefore the period
of storage will be short and no particular examination of the
dry gun cotton will be required.
966. Dry gun cotton during the interval between loading
in the mine case and the time dryness is secured shall be
stored ordinarily in an assembled fuse can. When prepared
In this manner It shall be kept in a cool, dry, and secure room
away from all other explosives.
967. Dry gun cotton should be handled as little as possible
to present crumbling and scattering of gun-cotton dust.
Finely divided gun cotton is difficult to remove by brushing,
and if allowed to collect about a room may give serious
trouble by " flashing " should a portion become ignited. This
dust may be removed with a damp sponge or cloth.
968. Dry gun cotton which is not used as contemplated shall
be rewetted with the proper amount of water and repacked.
SMOKELESS POWDEK.
Package.

969. Powder charges are now supplied to forts in hermet-

ically sealed cases and shall be opened only in accordance with
War Department instructions.
Storage and care.

970. Smokeless powdershall be stored in the driest avail-

able magazines. So long as the container remains sealed the
only effect of water is to cause unusual deterioration of the
case.
971. No magazine in which the temperature of the air rises
above 95° F. shall be used for the storage of smokeless
powder.
972. Notwithstanding the great care taken in sealing stor-
age cases it is almost impossible to prevent some slight escape
of volatiles, therefore a slight odor of ether in a magazine is
not unusual and does not indicate deterioration. However,
If the ether odor is persistently strong It indicates a leaky
storage case, which should be found by a process of elimina-
tion. When a leaky case is found or the seal of a storage
case of powder discovered to have been accidentally broken
the fact should be reported to the War Department for de-
cision as to the disposition of the powder charges contained
therein.
200 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF EXPLOSIVES.

Inspection by the Ordnance Department.

973. Samples of each lot of smokeless powder Issued to the

service are preserved in the laboratory of the Ordnance De-
partment for chemical test. These retained samples are sub-
jected regularly to technical inspection and test by that de-
partment to determine their condition as to stability. Should
any lot show deterioration the change is discovered by such
inspection and the entire lot recalled from posts where it is
stored.
Inspection at posts.

974. With each lot of powder supplied to a post there

shall be furnished a ground glass stoppered bottle containing
a sample of the particular lot of powder. This bottle shall be
stored in the magazine with the corresponding lot of powder.
The object of preserving this sample bottle in the magazine is
to enable the responsible oflScer to keep his powder under
regular observation.
975. At each monthly inspection a piece of blue litmus
paper, moistened with distilled water, shall be suspended just
above the powder in the sample bottle. The paper, which
must be kept moistened, shall remain in the bottle for six
hours, when it shall be examined. If the paper has been red-
dened, the test shall be repeated, and if duplicated the facts
shall be reported to the War Department at once.
976. A
determination of the standard red (acid) color of
the blue litmus may be made by dipping the paper in dilute
vinegar or acid.
977. Avoid handling the litmus paper with the bare hands
or anything which is capable of imparting color to the paper.
978. At all times, other than when inserting and removing
the litmus paper, the sample bottle of powder shall be kept
stoppered tightly.
979. No other inspection of smokeless powder shall be made
at posts.
PROJECTILES, FILLED AND FUSED.

Storage and care.

980.These projectiles shall be stored in the magazines pro-

vided for them, piled, and painted as required by existing
orders.
981. They shall be kept dry as possible and free from rust.
982. While premature explosions are not expected, project-
iles filled and fused shall be handled with care.

Inspection.

983. On
account of the nature of the envelope no inspection
of the explosive is possible. The inspection of the projectiles
shall be limited to seeing that the requirements of " Storage
and care" are observed strictly.
 Chaptek XX.

EXAMINATION FOB, GUNNERS AND FOR SPECIAL RATINGS.

INSTEDCTION OF GUNNEKS.

984. This instruction is under the supervision of the Are or

mine commander when a field officer is available for that duty.
During the period of indoor instruction all enlisted men shall
be required to attend the classes, except those extra and
special duty men who are first-class gunners and who do not
have to requalify at the next examination. Such first-class
gunners as are not utilized as instructors shall be given an
advanced course of instruction.
985. Its object is to impart knowledge of guns, mortars,
mines, and accessories to the enlisted men of coast artillery.
The period of indoor instruction shall be followed by an exami-
nation having for its object the determination of the number
of qualified gunners in each company. The examination shall
take place at the post where the respective companies may be
serving and shall be separate for each company.
986. For purposes of instruction and examination, enlisted
men of the Coast Artillery Corps not belonging to companies
or batteries may be attached to convenient organizations, and
upon qualification shall be classified as gunners.
987. A candidate to be eligible for qualification as first-class
gunner must have qualified previously as second-class gunner,
though both qualifications may be made at the same exami-
nation.
988. Boards of examination shall be convened annually in
each artillery district by the district commander, to meet not
less than one month after the expiration of the indoor instruc-
tion period. Separate boards may be convened for the exami-
nation of candidates for first and for second class gunners,
and also for posts attached to the artillery district. All
boards shall consist of three artillery officers, selected with
reference to their special qualification for this duty provided
;

that when a member of the board is a company commander he

shall be relieved during the examination of candidates from
his company and the examination conducted by the remaining
members. Where travel is necessary the selection of an officer
for this duty shall be made subject to the approval of the
authority competent to order the necessary journeys.
989. Previous to the commencement of the examination each
company commander shall submit to the adjutant a duly
signed list, in triplicate, giving the full names, arranged in
muster-roll order, of all the men of his company who are to be
82615—09 14 201
 : :

202 gunners' examination and ratings.

examined for first or second class gunners, with tlie statement

that he believes each man so presented is capable of qualify-
ing in the class designated. These lists shall be transmitted
to the senior member of the board by the post commander.
990. The examination of gunner candidates shall be held, as
far as practicable, at such places as the material or equipment
pertaining to the subject in hand is located, i. e., at the battery
'
or in a fire-control station.
991. In determining the qualifications of candidates credit
shall be given for practical knowledge of subjects rather than
for text-book answers to questions.
992. The qualifying mark for classification as first or second
class gunner shall be in each case not less than an average of
75 per cent. Whenever, during the progress of the examina-
tion of a candidate for either grade, the sum of the marks
received on subjects for which he has already been examined,
increased by the maximum allowed for the remaining subjects,
is less than 75, his examination shall be discontinued.
993. The board shall keep a record of its marks during the
examination, but these marks shall not be published in orders.
The report of the board on each company shall be sent as soon
as possible after the completion of the examination to the
artillery district commander, who shall publish an order an-
nouncing the names of those who have qualified as first and
second class gunners, the names being arranged for each or-
ganization in each class in muster-roll order, and reciting the
date of qualification in each case, the date of the completion of
the company examination being taken as the date of quali-
fication.
994. The scope of the examinations for first and second class
gunners and the relative weights to be given the subjects are
as follows:
For candidates in companies assigned to gun defense
For second-class gunners:
(a) Service of the piece 25
(&) Guns and carriages 25
(c) Powders, projectiles, primers, and fuses 25
{d) Cordage, gins, shears, jacks 15
(e) United States magazine rifle lo

100
For gunners:
first-class
(a) The azimuth instrument 20
(&) Duties in the plotting room 50
(c) Aiming and laying guns or mortars 15
(d) Definitions C. A. D. R 5
(e) War ships 10

100
For candidates in companies and detachments assigned to
mine defense
 :

gunners' examination and eatings. 203

For second-class gunners:

(a) Ammunition, nomenclature, and service of guns
to whida the candidate's company is assigned 15
(6) Material of and duties in the loading room (ex-
cept electrical principles involved) 35
(o) Material for and duties on the water 30
id) Cordage 10
(e) United States magazine rifle 10

100
For flrst-class gunners:
(o) Care and preservation of mine material 15
(&) Handling high explosives 20
(c) Knowledge and use of the azimuth instrument
and plotting board : 20
(d) Engines, generators, transformers, storage batter-
ies, and searchlights assigned to the company
of which the candidate is a member 20
(e) Operation of casemate apparatus and of tele-
phones , 20
(/) Definitions C. A. D. R 5

100

995. The examination of candidates for first-class gunners

of organizations assigned exclusively to rapid-fire guns not
provided with separate fire-control system shall include the
following head in lieu of that given under (6) for companies
assigned to gun defense
(&) Subcaliber firing 50
996. The examination in subjects (a), (B), and (c) for both
second-class and first-class gunners shall be confined to the
material of that part of the defense to which the company is
assigned. If no azimuth instrument is included in the bat-
tery equipment the instrument used in the instruction shall be
used in the examination.

QUALIFICATION OF BATED ENLISTED MEN.

997. In each company of coast artillery examinations shall

be held by the company commander under the direction of the
fire or mine commander, at such times as the latter may pre-
scribe, for the purpose of determining enlisted men who are
qualified for appointment to rated positions.
998. Records shall be kept in each company in the form of
eligible lists for each rated position to which enlisted men of
the company may be appointed.
999. Examination for rated positions shall be confined to
first-class gunners or enlisted men who have once been classi-
fied as first-class gunners. Candidates who pass with an aver-
 —

204 gunners' examination and eatings.

age of 75 per cent any of tlae examinations prescribed for

rated enlisted men sliall be carried on tlie eligible list for ap-
pointment to the corresponding rated position for a period of
three years from the date of examination.
1000. Enlisted men on the eligible list for a rated position
shall be classified as first-class gunners from the date of quali-
fication and so announced in district orders, and such classifi-
cation shall be continued for the time they are entitled to re-
main on such eligible list. When a man's term of eligibility
for any rated position expires he may be continued in such
lated position or on the corresponding eligible list by passing
a new examination for such rated position, and his classifica-
tion as first-class gunner shall be continued without further
examination.
1001. The same enlisted man may be carried on several
eligible lists providing he passes satisfactorily the prescribed
examinations for such rated positions.
1002. Prior to the examination for the rated positions of
observers, first or second class, or gun pointer, the candidates
shall be examined by the post surgeon for defective vision,
and no candidate shall be rated for these positions who has
any defect in vision which would impair his efficiency.
1003. An enlisted man now holding a rated position need not
be required to take the examination for that position until
the termination of the three-year period from the date of his
last classification as a first-class gunner, unless his qualifica-
tions for the position he holds have not been established to the
satisfaction of the fire or mine commander concerned or the
artillery district commander, in which case he shall be re-
quired to take the examination for that position at such time
as may be prescribed by the fire or mine commander con-
cerned. In the event of his failure to pass satisfactorily the
prescribed examination he shall be disrated immediately by
the artillery district commander.
1004. The scope of the examination for each of the rated
positions is as follows :

Gun commander and gun pointer.

I. Definitions C. A. D. E.
II. Gun and carriage.
(a) Nomenclature, purpose, and action of several
parts.
(6) Packing stuffing boxes and cleaning recoil cyl-
inders,
(c) Adjustment of
Quadrant elevation device, sight standard,
throttling valve, gas-check pad, elevating
gear, grease cups, and firing mechanism.
id) Care and preservation, including care of hand
counterweights, oiling, and painting.
 gunners' examination and ratings. 205

III. Powders, projectiles, fuses, and primers,

(o) Ventilatloii of magazines.
(6) Blending powder apd preparation of powder
charges.
(c) Pilling and fusing projectiles.
(d) Painting projectiles.
(e) Care of empty cartridge cases and primer bodies.
IV. Preparations for service or subcaliber practice.
V. Service of tbe piece.
(o) Duties of each member of the gun section under
all conditions.
"VI. Precautions for safety at the battery.
VII. Fire-control system.
(a) General knowledge of that in use at the battery.
(6) Duties of range keeper; object and use of time
range board.
VIII. Pointing.
(a) Methods of pointing and pointing tests.
(6) The telescopic sight (the quadrant for mortars),
(c) Emergency system and salvo points.
id) Bore sighting and orientation.
IX. Regulations governing service and subcaliber practice
so far as they affect the service at the emplacements.
X. Mounting and dismounting guns and carriages.
XI. Characteristic features of the several classes of war
ships, general knowledge of local shipping, of chan-
nels leading to the harbor, and of ranges to prominent
fixed objects in the tield of fire of the battery.

Plotter.

I.Definitions C. A. D. B.
II.Fire-control system.
(o) Detailed knowledge of system employed at the
battery.
(6) Indication and identification of targets.
(c) Duties of each member of the range section
under all conditions.
(d) Emergency system and salvo points.
III. Fire-control apparatus.
(o) A detailed knowledge of adjustment and use of
all fire-control apparatus used in the plotting
room.
IV. Elementary gunnery.
(o) Explanation of the several corrections to be ap-
plied to the observed range to obtain the cor-
rected range.
(6) Effect on the flight of the projectile of variations
in the density of the air the direction and ve-
;

locity of the wind.

(c) Use of trial shots and application of data ob-
tained from them (problem).
V. Preparation of target-practice records.
206 gunners' examination and ratings.

Observer {first or second class).

Definitions C. A. D. R.
I.
II. Fire-control system.
(a) Detailed description of that in use at tlie battery.
(Jj) Indication and identification of targets.
(c) Emergency system and salvo points.
III. Fire-control apparatus.
(o) A detailed knowledge of adjustment and use of
all observing instruments and range finders in
use at the battery.
(6) Use of the telephone.
IV. Observer's test C. A. D. R.
V. Characteristic features of the several classes of vrar
ships, general knovs^ledge of local shipping, of chan-
nels leading to the harbor, and of ranges to prominent
fixed objects in the field of fire of the battery.

Casemate electrician.

I. Definitions C. A. D. R.
II. Casemate apparatus.
(a) Nomenclature:
(6) Testing,
(c) Circuits.
((f) Maintenance.
III. Troubles and remedies,
(o) Lamps and bells.
(6) Switches.
(c) Ammeters and voltmeters.
(d) Telephones.
(e) Engines and machines.

Chief planter.

I. Definitions C. A. D. R.
II. Mine planting material.
(a) Voltmeter test of a mine circuit.
(6) Hydraulic jacks.
(c) Nomenclature and use of apparatus aboard mine
planters used in planting mines.
(d) Capacity of falls and winches,
(c) Automatic anchor.
III. Drill.
(o) Duties of noncommissioned officer on distribution
box boat.
(6) Duties of noncommissioned officer in charge of
planting mines from mine planter,
(c) Boat drill with yawl boat.
IV. Emergencies.
V. Cordage.
 gunners' examination and eatings. 207

Cliivf loader.

I. Definitions C. A. D. K.
II. Explosives.
( a ) Storage of explosives.
(6) Gun cotton.
(c) Drying gun cotton and gun-cotton primers.
(d) Preparation of gun-cotton primers from square
cakes.
(e) Dynamite.
(/) Nitroglycerine.
(g) Evidence of free nitroglycerine in dynamite.
(ft) Method of decomposing nitroglycerine to render
it harmless,
(i) Preparation of priming charges.
III. Fuses.
(a) Description.
(6) Tests.
(c) Storage of fuses.
(d) Preparation of fuses for loading plugs.
TV. Loading-room duties.
(a) Testing transformer and measuring the resist-
ance of its circuits.
(6) Assembling and testing a compound plug.
(c) Loading a mine and preparing it for delivery to
planter.
V. Unloading mines.
(o) Precautions.
(6) Returning charge to storage boxes.
(c) Determination of amount of water to add to gun
cotton.
 INDEX.
[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]
A.
Abbreriatlons and symbols, flre-control stations 116
Abnormal corrections, gun arm 493
Absolute deviation 97
Access to power plants 608
Accountability of ordnance ofllcer 597
Accuracy of D. P. F.'s 328
Adjustment, azimuth instrument 754
indices 527,529
Lewis D. P. P 774-779
pads 873
plotting board 782-785
quadrants 530
range board 799
retraction ropes 402
subeallber guns 633
Swasey D. P. P 770-773
telescope 820
Aeroscope 751
Aiming 21
Allowance of cleaning material 840
of paints 850
All-round flre carriage 67
Ammunition, dummy 341, 394
fixed 70
reserve 315
subeallber 640
Ammunition hoists, care of 835, 836
definition 22, 192, 236
Ammunition recess 23
Ammunition section 283
Ammunition service, care of apparatus 835, 836
chief of 72,373,403
gun, 12-inch, disappearing carriage 403-405
gun, 10-inch, disappearing carriage 409
gun, 8-inch, disappearing carriage 414
gun, 6-inch, disappearing carriage 422,424
gun, 12-inch, barbette carriage 434
gim, 10-inch, barbette carriage 437
gun, 8-inch, barbette carriage 440
gun, 6-inch, pedestal 444
gun, 5-inch, 4.7-inch 447, 448
gun, 3-ineh 453^55, 457
gun. 6-pounder 463-467,472
mortar battery 373-375
target practice 674
test of 628
Anemometer 752
Angle, of departure 24
of depression 28
of fall 25
of impact 26
ofincidence 27
of jump 143
of position jo
striking ^40
Apparatus, fire-control Chapter XVII
Appointment of rated enlisted men 292, 293
Approaches 30
209
210 INDEX.

[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]

Apron 29
Arbitrary deflection correction 675
Area, battle 47
Armament, accessories for effective use of 11
care of, post commander 599
manning tables for 159, 286
primary, intermediate, secondary (see also Gun battery and
Mortar battery) 5, 6, 8—10
Artillery district, tlie Chapter XI, 19
commander. (See District commander.)
engineer 591—596
how designated 20
how established 580
manning tables 286
ordnance officer. {See Ordnance officer.)
Artillery district headquarters, how designated 580
personnel of 581
Artillery drill. (See Drill.)
Artillery engineer, breakdowns 607
care of electrical installations 889
care of machinery, storage batteries, etc 611
communications, fire control and power plants, out of com-
mission 605
definition 31
district 591-596
duties at drill 604
failures of apparatus 607
fire control stations, care of 610
inspections 591
maintenance of apparatus 609
maintenance of communications 602
material for repairs 603
post 610, 611
power plants 608
records 607
repairs 602
reports 607
responsibility of 605, 609, 610
supervision of electrician sergeants 613
tests of communications and mine cable 596, 605, 606, 734
visual signaling 602
Artillery inspection Chapter XIII
battery commander 624, 627
district commander 585
duties of gun commander 625
duties of pit commander 626
fire-control stations 623, 628
gun emplacements 622,625,628
Inspector 622-628
mortar pit 302,626,628
order of inspection „ 622
preparations for I1_I 621
range officer 623
Artillery Instruction, service at emplacement Chapter VI
Artillery material, care of Chapter XVIII
Artillery practice. (See Target practice.) Chapter XIV
Assignment of companies 278
Assignment of officers 274-277 279-282
Atmosphere board, definition '
32
description 749 7=q
operation 750
'

use of 2 617
Attendance, artillery drill, record of 314
gunner's instruction " 004
target practice gay
Automatic guns J j^gg
Auxiliary horizontal base system, gun battery, primary arma-
ment 490 400
mortar battery ;„ 517
 INDEX. 211

[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]

Axis of gun 33
Axis o( trunnions 34
Azimuth 35
Azimuth correction scale 761
Azimuth difiFerence 36
Azimuth instrument 37, 753-755
adjustment of 754
description of 753
orientation of 754
use of 755
Azimuth, ranpe table 204
Azimuth setter 38,361,363
Azimuth, wind 617,618
B.
Banquette 41
Barbette carriage 67
Barometer 756
use of 617
Barrels for explosive "D" 937-941,945,946
Base-end stations, 39
Base line 40
Batteries, definition 13
care of 832-834, 891
construction and maintenance of 837
naming of 14
Battery practice. (See Target practice.)
Battery, the («ee also Gun battery and Mortar battery) 13
assignment of companies to 278
assignment of officers 282
l>ore-sighting 526'
dismissal of 312, 356
fire control Chapter VII
general duties Chapter V
general instructions 337—356
In commission 136, 832-834
In service 138,832
Inspection of 621-828
manning parties r 286
night drill 697,698
out of commission 832-834
out of service 832
service at the emplacement Chapter VI
target practice, service G42-6S2, 689, 690
target practice, subcaliber 632-635
Battery commander 43, 277
access to power plants 608
appointment of rated enlisted men 292, 293
artillery inspection 621-628
assignment of officers 280, 282
auxiliary horizontal base system 498, 499, 517
commands of .355,356
correction of Are 675-678
duties at drill 308, 312, 314-316, 319-323, 354,
355, 350, 480^87, 498-504, 509-512, 677, 678, 697, 698
emergencies 320-323
emergency system 502-504
fire command target practice 642-658, 683-685, 688
horizontal base system 487-497
independent action 319, 543
indication and identification of a target 480-486, 509
indoor instruction 317, 984-987
inspection 318, 624, 625
minor defects 609
modifications in fire control and drill 316
night drill 697,698
records 314, 315
reports received 322
212 INDEX.

[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]

Battery commander — Continued.

responsibility of 315, 609, 636, 655, 833
safety otBcer 684
subcaliber practice ; 631-641
vertical base system 500,501
Battery commander's action 319, 543, 545
Battery commander's observer 323
Battery commander's station 44,116,321,354
manning detail, gun battery primary armament 475—479
manning detail, mortar battery 505-508
Battery commander's walk 45
Battery parade 46
Battery practice, subcaliber 632-635
Battle area 47
Battle command 18, Chapter X
communication olHcer 570
communications 725, 726
designation , 18
details 287, 289, 291, 317, 574
dismissal of 312
drill 569
fire-control system 575-579
indication of a target 576, 577
;
manning of 311
manning parties 575
manning tables 286
nigtit drill 697,699
rated men 293
•

searchlight officer ,
571—573
searchlights 572
service practice 042, 644, 647-658, 686-688
subcaliber practice 632, 635-638
typical 273
Battle commander, commands of 567, 578, 579
duties at drill 312,567,569,576-579
fire commander's action 579
inspection 621-628
nature of command 565
night drill 697, 699
reports from fire commanders 309
reports from mine commanders 310
responsibility of 566,567,654
searchlight commands 720,721
searchlights _ 572 714
service practice 642-644, 647-658, 686-688
Battle commander's station 116
instruction of detail for 317
manning party for 3IO 575
Bell, T I __ 251 497
Blast slope 4g
Blending powder 49 ggs
'
Block, breech. (See Breechblock.)
Board, atmosphere. (See Atmosphere board.)
deflection. (See Deflection board.)
mortar deflection. (See Mortar deflection board.)
plotting. (See Plotting board.)
range. (See Range board.)
time range. (See Time -range board.)
Boat service 589
Book, emplacement IO7
Booth, information 520
Bore _ 50
Bore plug 78
Bore sighting 51, 526
Bore sighting, orientation and pointing Chapter "^^III
Bourrelet 52
Breakdowns, of apparatus _ 007
of communications 323
 INDEX. 213
[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]
Breech _ 53
Breechblocks 54, 55
care of 872-876
aismounting of 082, 872
target practice 673, 679, 680, 682
Breech detail, 12-inch gun, D. C 389
Breech mechanism, care of 874-876
Breech recess 56
Breech reinforce 57
Buildings and grounds, police of 890,891,894
Bursting charge 58
C.
Cable details 283
Cable, tests of 596,606
Call to arms 311
Cannon 61
Cannoneers, changes in position of 343
Canopy 62
Capital 63
Carbons, searchlight 724
Care of, ammunition service apparatus 835, 836
armament, post commander 599
batteries in commission 832-834
batteries in service 832
batteries out of commission 832—834
batteries out of service 832
.breechblocks 872-876
'breech mechanism 874-876
carriages 862-871
cartridge storage cases 883, 884
cylinders, recoil 849, 862, 869
detonators 918-922
drains and sumps 843
dynamite 924-934
and power plants
electric installations 889
empty metallic cases and primers 882
Explosive "D" 936-946
explosives Chapter XIX
fire-control stations 605-010
firing mechanism 874-876
fuses and primers 882,948-050
gas-check seat 680
gun cotton 932-968
guns 856-860, 888
hoists 835, 836
machinery, storage batteries, etc 611
material Chapter XVIII
mortars 856-859, 861-868, 870-873
parapets 843
platforms 843
powder 885, 911, 912, 970-979
primers 882, 948-950
projectiles 877-881, 980-983
projectiles,filled and fused 980-983
property, ordnance sergeant 892, 894
recoil cylinders 849, 862, 869
searchlights 723
signal property 89.i
smokeless powder 885, 970-979
stuffing boxes 870, 871
telautographs 741, 8S»
telephones ial
telescopes
siq »»'
»i».
Caretaker detachments °*'"~°gS
Carriages, A. E. F 67
barbette = 6'
care of It
casemate "'
214 INDEX.

[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]

Carriages, cleaning recoil cylinders 869
coast 67
definition 64-67
disappearing 67
fixed 65
L. F 67
masking mount 67
movable 66
packing stuffing boxes of 870,871
painting of 852
parts of, not expendable 846
rapid-fire guns 67
recoil cylinders 849,862,869
wheeled 66
Caliber of guns 59
Calibration 60
Cartridges for 3-incb gun 453-455
Case I 68,186,531
Case II 68,186,532
Case III 68,186,533
Casemate carriages 67
Casemate detail 283
Casemate electrician, definition 60
examination for 1004
Casemate, manning party for 563
Cases, empty metallic, care of 882
Cases for gun cotton 956-960
Cases of pointing 68,168,531-^533
Cases, Dowder, care of 882-884
Cease firing 653
Centering slope 50, 190
Chamber, powder 50, 190
Changes in fire-control system and drill 316, 543, 584
Changes in installation 316, 543, 584, 592
Changes in position of cannoneers 343
Charge, bursting 58
definition 70
powder, chuite for 191
priming 199
Charts, powder 792-795
Chase 71
Chief loader, definition 73
examination for 1004
Chief of ammunition service, definition-- 72
gun, 12-inch, disappearing carriage 403
mortar battery 373
Chief of detachment 285, 295,598
Chief of detail 285,298
Chief of section 285, 295, 298, 302, 307, 308
Chief planter, definltiou 74
examination 100-1
Chute, powder 191
Classification of searchlights 700
Cleaning bore and chamber 681
Cleaning material, allowance of 840
Cleaning recoil cylinders 889
Clinometer 75
Clinometer rest 7g
"Close breech" gun, 12-inch, 1895 mechanism 384
gun, 12-inch, 1888 mechanism 332
gun, 12-inch, barbette carriage 430
mortar 37O
Coast Artillery garrison 78
Coast Artillery reserves 78 79
Combination primers 352
Command, tactical (see also Mine command, fire command, bat-
tle command) 245
Commands commanders
of battery 355 353
battle commanders 5G7, 578' 579
fire commanders '545
 INDEX. 215

[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]

Commands, searchlight 720, 721
Commence firiug 673
Commercial detonators 017-922
Communication detail 283
Communication officer o46, 547
assignment of 275
battle command 570
Communications Chapter XVI
battle command 725,726
breakdown of 323
defects in 606
failure of 498,502
maintenance of 602
means employed 725
out of commission 605
signal stations 727
telautograph service 741-748
telephone operators 728-740
telephone service 728-740
telephone tests 733,734
tests of 605, 600, 734
wireless 725
Companies, assignment of 278
Company commanders, appointment of rated men 292, 293
details by 289, 290
examination of rated men 997-1004
Company detail 283
Company, formation of 294-304
Company, gun 126,283,286
mine 162, 283, 284, 286
mortar 164, 283, 286
Computer 82
Construction of batteries 837
Continuance of qualification as gunner 1000
Control of searchlights 720
Corrected range 83
Corrections, abnormal 493
deflection 675-677
drift (see also Deflection board and mortar deflection board) 522
from observation of fire 675-678
how applied, battery secondary armament 525, 676
range 524, 525, 678
wind, gun battery secondary armament , 522
Correction scale, azimuth 761
range board 801
Corridor 84
Corridor wall 85
Counter recoil 215
Counter assembling or
recoil springs, 867
cleaning and painting of 868
preservation of 864-866
removal of paint from 868
Counterweight 86
Counterweight well 86
Coyer post, mortar batteries 87,363-367
Crane 88
Crest, exterior 110
Crest, interior 139
Curves, range board— 802, 803
Cylinder, recoil, care of 84a, 8bz, Bba
definition 216
D.
Damage to, material 844
plotting room oOg
Danger range gg
Danger space -— »g
Defects, in communications ?5S-5qq qaa
In material 68A b»9, S44
216 INDEX.

[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]

Defense of coast line 1-3
Defense plans 123, 567-569
Defense zone, inner 271
Defense zone, outer 271
Definitions Cliapter II
Deflection, definition 90
arbitrary corrections 675
liow set on sight 821
Deflection board 91, 757-768
azimuth correction scaie 761
deflection scale . 760
description of 757,758
leaf range scaie 764
multiplying scale 768
operation of 766-768
platen scale 758,759
subcaiiber board 765
T-square scaie 763
use of 675
wind arc 762
Deflection board for mortars (see Mortar deflection board) _ 780, 781, 789
Deflection corrections 675-677
Deflection errors, mortar batteries 512
Deflection scaie . 760
Delivery table 92
Density of loading . 93
Depression position finders 94, 189, 769-779
accuracy of 828
adjustment, Lewis D. P. F 774-779
adjustment, Swasey D. P. F 770-773
description of 769
D. P. F. system 180,500,501,517
Designation of, battle command 18
searchlights 718
Destruction of dynamite 934
Detachment 283
caretaljer 890-898
chief of 285 295
Details, battle command 287, 289, 291, 317' 574
casemate 283, 563
chief of 285,298
communication 283
company 283
company commander 289, 290
explosive 283
fire command 289, 291, 317
gun and mortar 283,
375, 391, 404, 405, 475-479, 503-508, 519, 520
mine command 288, 290, 291 600
powder 283, 375
projectile 283, 374
Detonators, commercial, care of 918-921
how supplied 917
inspection of 922
storage of 918-921 •

Deviation, absolute 97
at the target 98
definition 95
mean lateral 9g
mean longitudinal ,
99
range 100
Device, obturating 55, 122, 170, 873
Devices, improvised 31g
Diameter of bore 59
Differences, gun I27
range * 206, 528
Directing gun lOi
Directing lights 71g
Directing point lOi
Disappearing carriage g7
 INDEX. 217
[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]
Dismissal of, batteries 312, 356
battle commanci 312
Dismounting breeclilocks 1 682 872
Displacement, definition Hi-'
gun 1^,^
District artillery engineer, (i'ec Artillery engineer.)
District, the artillery (see Artillery district Chapter XI, 19
how designated 20
District commander, appointment of rated enlisted men 292, 293
assignment of 580
assignment of companies by 278
assignment of officers by 274-277,279-282
attendance at target practice 587
caretaker detachments 890-898
command when absent from district 582
control of water transportation 586
duties at drill and durlnt; hostilities 584-590
duties during encampment 588
duties in general 584-590
inspections 585
modifications he may allow 584
modifications in proVisional installations 316
nature of command 583
night drill 590, 698, 699
rated enlisted men 1003
regulation of boat service 589
responsibility of 566, 584-590
service practice 643-658, 688
subcaliber practice 637
target practice 643-658,688
working parties 595
District, headquarters 580, 5S1
ordnance ofiicer. (See Ordnance officer.)
Divisions of target practice 630, 632, 642
Double primary station, mine command, abbreviations and
symbols 116
manningparties , 560
Double secondary station, mine tommanij, abbreviations and
symbols 116
manning party 562
Drains and sumps 843
Drift 103
Drift corrections, gun battery, secondary armament 522
mortar (see also Mortar deflection board) 789
primary armament. (See Deflection board.)
Drill, artillery, duties of artillery engineer 604
duties of battery commander 308,
312, 314-316, 319, 320-323, 354, 356, 480-
487, 49S-.-,04, 509-512, 077, 678, 697, 698
duties of battle commander 312, 567, 569, 576-579
duties of communication officer 546, 547
duties of district commander 584-590
duties of emplacement officer 307, 312, 324, 358, 372, 377
duties of fire commander 312, 543-545
duties of mine commander 312,545,556,564
duties of range officer 312, 323, 498, 500, 502
duties of searchlight officer 571-573, 710
formation for 294-300
gun, 12-lnch disappearing carriage 379-405
gun, 12-inch barbette carriage 428-434
gun, 10-ineh disappearing carriage 408^11
gun, 10-inch barbette carriage 436
gun, 8-inch disappearing carriage 414, 415
gun, .S-inch barbette carriage 439
gun, 6-inch disappearing carriage 417, 419-424
sun, 6-incb pedestal mount 442, 445
gun, 5-inch, 4.7-inch, 4-inch 447, 448
|uS; 3-inch - 4,50, 452-457
gun, 6-pounder 460-473
82615—09 15
218 INDEX.

[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]

modifications of 316,543,584
Drill, mortar, 12-incli 381-375
night 500, 696-099
primers 346
record of attendance 314
service at emplacement Chapter VI
Dry gun cotton 964-968
Dummy ammunition 341,394
Dynamite 923-934
decomposition of nitroglycerine in 933
destruction of 934
exposure to air 926
gloves for handling 928
inspections of 931-934
marking of packages 930
packing 923
principal source of danger 932
storage and care of 924-934
storage cases 927
temperature of freezing 025
E.
Bight-inch gun battery. (See Gun battery, 8-inch.)
Electrical installation, care of 889
Electrician, casemate. (See Casemate electrician.)
Electrician sergeant, care of property 893
care of telautographs 741
duties 611, 613
supervision of 613
lllectric motors for gun carriages 308
Elements of trajectory 254
Elevation, definition 104
quadrant 104, 201
setter 105, 361, 363
sight 104, 239
Eligibility for rated positions 999
Eligible list for rated positions 998-1001
Emergency 320, 323
Emergency practice, subcaliber 632, 634
Emergency station, abbreviation and symbols 116
manning party 478, 508
Emergency system, definition 189
gun battery, primary armament 502-504
indication and identification of targets 480
mortar battery 517
Emplacement, definition 106
inspection of 622,625,628
range keeper 479
service at Chapter VI
Emplacement book 107
Emplacement officer, general duties 324
general duties at drill 307,312,324,358,372,377
gun battery, 12-inch D. C 376, 377
gun battery, 12-inch barbette carriage 425-428
gun battery, 10-inch D. C 406
gun battery, 10-inch barbette carriage 435
gun battery, 8-inch D. C 412
gun b.attery, 8-inch barbette carriage 438
gun battery, 6-inch D. C 418
gun battery, 6-inch pedestal 442, 443
gun battery, 3-inch 4.">0, 451
mortar battery 357,358,372
Empty metallic cases, care of 882
Encampment, duties of district commander 588
Energy of projectiles 108
Engineer, artillery. (Sre Artillery engineer.)
Engineer Department S:',7,838
Engineers 611, 614
Engineer property, minor defects 609
repairs of 593, 594, 002. 603
 INDEX. 219

[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]

Enlisted personnel :;83
Equalizing pipe 1U9
Errors, deflection, mortar batteries 512
Examination for rated positions ;i'.)7-100-t
Examination for gunners (see oiso Gunners' instruction). Chapter XX
Exbibiting data for R. F. batteries 320, 521
Expendability of parts of armament S46
Explosives Chapter XIX
Explosive " D " 035-946
barrels for 93T-941, 945, 946
inspections 943-946
marking of barrels 937-941
packing of 0:i.j
storage and care of 936-'.)42
Explosive detail 283
Explosives, black powder 911, 912
care of Chapter XIX
commercial detonators 917-922
dynamite 923-934
explosive "D" 935-946
fuses and primers 198, 346-350, 352, 650-651, «S2, 947-050, 965
general instructions 899—916
gun cotton 951-968
inspection 899
projectiles filled and fused 980-983
shipment of 886
storage cases for 900-905
Exterior crest 110
Exterior slope 111
r.
Faces of trunnions 263
Failure of apparatus 607
Failure of communications 498, 502
Field artillery 61
Field officers, assignment of 274
Field of Are, definition 112
safety of 636,654
Field works 3
Fire, observation of 675-678
orders of 545
172, 544,
restricted 578
172, 220, 545,
unrestricted 578
172, 267, 545,
Fire and mine commands Chapter IX
Fire area 113
X'^ire command practice. [See Target practice.)
Fire command, definition and organization 15, 16
designation of 18
details 289, 291, 317
dismissal of 312
fire-control system 551-555
general 541-550
grouping of batteries 16
indication of a target 553-555
manning parties 286, 287, 289, 291, 548-552
manning table 2si;
night drill 697,699
rated men 203
stations 116, 551, 552
target practice (service) 642-658,68.3-685,688
tarlet practice (subcaliber) 632,633,63.5-637
Fire commander, action 579
assignment of -74, 270, 281, 645, 646
commands of 54.5
communication officer 546
duties of 541-546, 683
gunners' instruction, supervision of O.'^l

independent action 543

instruction, manning parties 31/
220 INDEX.

[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]

Fire commander, manning party 286, 287, 289, 291, 548-552
manning tables 286
modifications of regulations 543
nature of command 542
night drill 543,697,699
orders of fire 545
plotting board 791
records 543
reports to battle commander 309
responsibility of 541. 543, 654
rated men 293,997,1004
searchlight 711, 712
supervision of target practice 281, 543
target practice (service) 642-658,683-685,688
target practice (subcaliber) 632, 633, 635-637
Fire-control, the battery Chapter VII
apparatus Chapter XVII
definition 114
installation 114, 474
material 115
manning details for gun batteries, primary armament 475—479
manning details for gun batteries, secondary armament 519
manning details for mine stations 288, 290, 291
manning details for mortar batteries 505-508
manning details for other stations 600
methods for subcaliber practice 638
modifications 316, 543
personnel 115
range officer 209, 312, 325, 498, 500, 502
responsibility for apparatus 599-620
sections 283, 333
Fire-control station, abbreviations and symbols (see also Sta-
tion) 116
care of 605,610
construction and maintenance of 837
inspection of 623, 628
Fire-control system, battle command 576-579
definition 114
fire command 551-555
gun battery of the intermediate armament 518
gun battery of the primary armament 474-504
gun battery of the secondary armament 519-525
mine command 559-564
modifications of 316,543,584
mortar battery 505-517
Firemen 611, 615
Firing attachment, 12-inch gun, D. C 887
Firinp- by electricity 651
Firing interval, definition 117
gun, 12-inch 401
mortar battery 514,516
Firing mechanism 55, 352 874-876
First-class gunners, examination of 984-996
instruction of 317, 984-996, 1000, 1003
First sergeant, formation for artillery drill 295-299
formation for infantry maneuvers 303
formation for roll calls 301 302
Five-inch gun battery. (See Gun battery, 5-inch.)
Fixed ammunition _ 70
Fixed lights 116, 118, 700, 707,"'715, 717
Fixed targets for trial shots 668
Flags, at target practice 649
for signaling ~ 725
Floating defenses o
Focusing telescope ^^q
Forcing cone 50,119
Formation, for artillery drill "94-304
for infantry maneuvers ~
303
for roll calls.. 301,302
 INDEX. 221

[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]

Formation, for marching maneuvers 304
of company 294-304
of sections 295, 296
Fort, artillery 77
Fortification power plants, load on 592
Fortifications 3, 4, 837
Four-inch gun battery. (See Gun battery, 4-inch.)
Four-and-seven-teuths-inch gun battery. (See Gun battery,
4.7-inch.)
From battery 120
Fuses and primers 047-950
G.
Gallery, definition 121
shot 235
Garlock packing 862
Garrison, coast artillery 78
Gas check 122
Gas-check seat, care of 680
General defense plans 1l'3, 567-569

General principles
—
General instructions the battery 337-356
Chapter I
Grooves 124,221
Grouping of batteries in fire commands 16
Gun-arm center 784, 785
Gun battery, intermediate armament 5, 8, 10
fire-control system 518
Gun battery, primary armament, flre-control system 474-504
Gun battery, secondary armament, fire-control system 519-525
corrections 523, 676
Gun battery, 12-inch D. C, adjustment of indices 527
ammunition service 403-405
auxiliary horizontal base system 498, 499
bore sighting 526
breech detail 389
chief of ammunition service 403
close breech 382, 384
drill 379^05
emergency system 502—504
emplacement officer 376, 377
failure to go in battery 395
fire-control system 474-504
firing attachment 387
gun section 376
horizontal base system 487—497
indication and identification of targets 133, 137, 480^86
inspection after firing 682
load and fire 379, 385, 386, 391
manning details, fire control 475-479
method of pointing 532
notes on the drill 380-405
open breech 381, 383
organization of 376
pointing test 534-537
powder detail 405
projectile detail 404
rammer and truck detail 391
range differences 528
range setter 393, 400
retracting gun 402
shot trucks 392
time to load 401
tripping gun 390
vertical base system 500, 501
Gun battery, 12-inch, barbette carriage, adjustment of indices 527
ammunition service 434
auxiliary horizontal base system 498, 499
bore sighting 526
close breech 430
222 INDEX.

[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]

Gun battery, 12-incli, barbette carriage, drill 428—434
emergency system 502-504
emplacement olficer 425-428
fire-control system 474-504
gun section 426
horizontal base system 487-497
indication and identification of targets 133, 137, 480-486
inspection after firing 682
lanyard 432
load and fire 431^33
manning details, fire control 475-479
method of pointing 532
notes on the drill 430-434
open breech 430
organization of 425-427
pointing test 534-537
ramming projectile 433
vertical base system 500, 501
Gun battery, 10-inch, D. C, adjustment of indices 527
ammunition service 409
auxiliary horizontal base system 408, 499
bore sighting 526
drill 408-411
emplacement officer 406
emergency system 502-504
failure to go in battery L 395
fire-control system 474—504
gun section j. 407
horizontal base system 487—497
indication and identification of targets 133, 137, 480-486
inspection after firing 682
manning details fire control 475—479
method of pointing 532
notes on the drill 409-411
organization of 406, 407
pointing test 534-537
rammer and trucli detail 391
range differences 528
shot trucks 392
tripping gun 390
vertical base system 500, 501
Gun battery, 10-inch, barbette carriage, adjustment of indices 527
ammunition service 437
auxiliary horizontal base system 498, 499
bore sighting 526
drill 436, 437
emergency system 502-504
emplacement oflicer 435
fire-control system 502-304
gun section 436
horizontal base system 487—497
indication and identification of targets 133, 137, 480-486
inspection after firing 682
manning details, fire control 47.5-479
method of pointing 532
notes on the drill 43^
organization 435-437
pointing test 534-537
vertical base system 500,501
Gun battery, 8-iuch, D. C, adjustment of indices 527
ammunition service 414
auxiliary horizontal base system 498, 409
bore sighting 5'>6
drill 414, 415
emplacement oflicer 412
emergency system 502-504
failure to go in battery 395
fire-control system 474-504
gun section 413
 INDEX. 223
[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]
Gun battery, 8-inch, D. C, horizontal base system 487-497
Indication and identification of targets 133, 137, 480-486
inspection after firing 682
manning details, Are control 475-479
method of pointing 532
notes on the drill 415
organization 412, 413
pointing test 534-537
rammer and truck detail 391
range differences 528
shot trucks 392
tripping gun 390
vertical base system 500, 501
Gun battery, 8-inch, barbette carriage, adjustment of indices 527
ammunition service 440
auxiliary horizontal base system 498, 499
bore sighting 526
drill 439, 440
emplacement officer 438
emergency system 502-504
fire-control system 474-504
gun section 439
horizontal base system 487-497
indication and identification of targets 133, 137, 480-486
inspection after firing 682
manning details, fire control 475^79
method of pointing 532
notes on the drill 439-440
organization 438,440
pointing test 534-537
vertical base system 500, 501
Gun battery, 6-incb, D. C, adjustment of indices 527
ammunition service 422,424
auxiliary horizontal base system 498, 499
bore sighting 526
drill 417, 419-424
emplacement ofllcer 418
emergency system 502-504
gun section 418
fire-control system 474—504, 518
horizontal base system 487-497
indication and identification of targets 133, 137, 480-486
inspection after firing 682
load and fire 420
manning details, fire control 475—479
method of pointing 532
notes on drill 420,424
organization of 416, 418
pointing test 534-537
range differences 528
retracting gun — 421
time to load 423
vertical base system 500, 501
Gun battery, 6-incb, pedestal mount, ammunition service 444
auxiliary horizontal base system 408, 499, 523
bore sighting 526
drill 44o
*f2,
emplacement oflcer iii'SnA
emergency system 502-504
fire-control system 475-479, 518
gun section 443
horizontal base system t:;-7^; f SI~tSX
indication and identification of targets 133, 13 r, 480-486
Inspection after firing 682
method of pointing M^
notes on the drill ttt-t,., fi-r
organization of 441, 443, 444
pointing test g*0
vertical base system sou, 5Ui
224 INDEX.

[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]

Gun battery, 5-incIi, 4.7-inch, 4-inch, ammunition service 447. 448
<irill__" 447, 448
gun section 448
indication and identification of targets 133, 137, 523
inspection after firing 682
manning party, fire-controi system 519, 520
method of pointing 532
notes on the drill 447, 448
organization 446
pointing test 5-40
range-finding system 521—525
Gun battery, 3-inch, ammunition service 453-455, 457
cartridges for 453-455
drill 450, 452-457
emplacement officer : 450, 451
gun section 451
indications and identification of targets 133, 137, 523
inspection after firing 682
manning detail, fire-control system 519, 520
masking mount 67,456,457
method of pointing 532
notes on drill 453-457
organization 449, 451
pointing test 540
range-tinding system 521-525
Gun battery, 6-pounder, American Ordnance Company model 473
ammunition service 463-467, 472
anchoring carriage 468
drill 460-473
gun section 459
indication and identification of a target 133, 137, 523
inspection after firing 682
load and fire 462, 463
notes on drill 462-473
organization 458, 459
serving table 472
Gun commander, at inspection 625
barbette guns 378, 395, 462, 464
battery, 6-pounder 462, 464
definition 125
disappearing guns 378, 395, 402
examination for, scope 1004
responsibility of 845
Gun company, definition 126
manning tables 286
sections, detachments, and details 283
Gun cotton, cases for 956-960
color of 955
inspections at posts 962, 963
inspections by Ordnance Department 961
pacliing '
Qi-l
storage and care 952-960
Gun cotton, dry 964-968
handling of 967
primers 96g
rewetting 968
storage of 066
use of 964
Gun detacliments 283I_^
Gun details 283
(iun differences 127
(tun displacement 128
Gun platform 129
Gun pointer, definition 130
barbette guns 429. 415. 452, 461, 468, 470, 471
battery of secondary armament 522
battery, 6-pounder 468, 470, 471
Case I 531
Case II ggo
Case III 533
 INDEX. 225

[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]

Gun pointer,disappearing guns 379, 408, 419, 537
examination for, scope 1004
indication and identification of a target 485
metJiod of pointing 531-533
mortar battery 360, 361
pointing test 534-540
responsibility 335
target practice (service) 675
target practice (subcaliber) 639
Guns, automatic 156
care of 856-860,888
care of breechbloclts 872-876
definition 61
directing 101
habitual position of 860
machine 156
marking of 855
orientation of 527
painting of 851
paulins for 888
rapid Are 211
recoil cylinders 216, 849, 862, 869
semiautomatic 156
Gunners' instruction 984-996, 1000, 1003
attendance at 984
examination of 984-996, 1000, 1003
Guns and carriages, parts of, expenditure 848
Gun sections 283
12-inch, D. C 376
12-inch, barbette 426
10-inch, D. C 407
10-inch, barbette 436
8-inch, D. C 413
8-inch, barbette 439
6-inch, D. C 41S
6-inch, pedestal 443
5-inch, 4.7-inch, 4-inch battery 448
3-inch 451
6-pounder 459
chief of 285, 295-298, 302, 307, 368
formation of 295, 296
posting 307, 808

H.
Habitual position, guns 860
mortars 368, 861
Handling of explosives Chapter XIX
Headquarters, district 580, 581
post 287,599-601
Heating of magazines 910
Heliograph 725
Hoist, ammunition, care of 835, 836
definition 22
powder 192
shot 236
Hoist room 131
Hoop 132
Horizontal base system, description 189
gun battery, primary armament 487-497
indication and identification of targets, gun battery, pri-
mary armament 480-486, 509
indication and identification of targets, gun battery, sec-
ondary armament 521, 523
mortar battery 510
Hostilities, duties of district commander 588
Howitzers 61
226 INDEX.

[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]

I.

Identiflcation of a target, definition 133

gun battery, primary armament— 480-486, 509, 521, 523, 553-555
gun battery, secondary armament 521, 523
mortar battery 509
Illuminating searchlights 134, 700, 711, 712, 714
Improvised devices 316
In battery 135
In commission 136,832-834
Independent action 319, 543
Indication and identiflcation of a target, primary armament 133,
137, 480-486, 509, 553-555, 576, 577
secondary armament 137, 521, 523, 553-555, 576, 577
Indication of a target, battle command 576, 577
definition 137
fire command 521, 553-555
Indicator, traversing 258
wind component (see Wind component indicator) 270, 824-828
Indoor instruction 317, 984-987
Infantry maneuvers 303, 304
Information booth, manning detail 520
Inner defense zone 271
In service 138,832
Inspection, after firing 682
artillery (see Artillery inspection) Chapter XIII
artillery engineer 591
battery commander 31S, 624, 627
detonators 922
districtcommander 585
drains and sumps 843
dynamite in storage 931—934
explosive " D
" 943-946
explosives 899
firing mechanism 352
fuses and primers 950
gun cotton 961-963
loaded projectiles 983
mortar pits 362,626,628
of the battery 621-628
order of 622
ordnance officer 597
smokeless powder 973-979
the battery 621-628
Installation, changes in 316, 543,584,592
electric, care of 889
fire control 114,474
Instruction, detail for battle commander's stations 317
gunner's (see Gunner's instruction) 984-996, 1000 1003
indoor 317, 984-987
method of 337-353
observers ,320
Instructions, magazine 916
preliminary to target practice 647, 648, 658, 667, 684, 685, 885
Interior crest I39
Interior slope 140
Interior wall 141
Intermediate armament (see Gun battery, intermediate arma-
ment) 5,8,10
Interstate commerce law on shipment of explosives 886
Interval, firing II7, 401, 514, 516
observing jQy
.J.
.Tacket 440
Jump 143
K.
Keys of magazines goo
 INDEX. 227
[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]

Land attacks 1 go
Land front I4-,
Lands 144_ 221
Lanyard, for 12-inch gun, barbette carriage '
432
mortars 372
Lateral deviation 05,98
Law on shipment of explosives, interstate commerce S.SG
Laying 145
Leaf range scale, the 764
Lewis D. P. F., adjustment of 774-779
Limited fire carriage 67
Litmus-paper test 975-978
Line of departure 147
Line of direction 148
Line of impact 149
Line of shot 150
Line of sight 151
Load and Are, 12-inch gun, disappearing carriage :;;79, 385. 386, 301
12-inch gun, barbette carriage 431— l.-l".

6-inch gun, disappearing carriage 420

6-pounder gun 462,463
Loading, density of 93
Loading detachments 283
Loading platform 152
Loading position 153, 368
Loading projectiles 881
Loading tray 154
Load on fortification power plants 592
Location of a target 155
Longitudinal deviation 05, 99
Loose explosives 014
Lye, use of 854

M.
Machine guns 156
Machinery, care of 611
Main bore 50
Main chamber 190
Maintenance of apparatus G09
Maintenance of batteries 837
Maintenance of communications 602
Maintenance of searchlights 602
Maintenance of searchlight stations 610
Magazines, circulation of air 909
definition 157
for loaded projectiles oso
heating of ''10
instructions ''16
keys of 806
lights in 913
storage of gun cotton 952-960
temperature of 662, 910, 971
Manning details, gun battery, primary armament 475-479
gun battery, secondary armament .-ilO. 520

mortar battery .j05-508

Manning of a battle command '111
Manning parties, battle command .nS
battle commander's and fire commander's station 310, 5^5
emplacement, fire control 479
fire command 286, 287. 289. 291, 548-552
wine command 288, 290, 291, 559-563
searchlights ,'^,^~iS,?
Manning table " ^^^' -'^'
7^-.—,—J."
Manual of the piece, gun battery, 12-inch, disappearmg car-
riage .^79-405
gun battery, 12-inch, barbette carriage 13§~!?!
gun battery, 10-inch, disappearing carriage 408^11
228 INDEX.

[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]

Manual of the piece, gun battery 10-lnch, barbette car-
riage 436, 437
gun battery, 8-lncb, disappearing carriage 414, 415
gun battery, 8-lnch, barbette carriage 439, 440
gun battery, 6-inch, disappearing carriage 417, 419-424
gun battery, 6-inch, pedestal 442, 445
gun battery, 5-inch, 4.7-lnch, 4-lnch 447, 448
gun battery, S-inch 450, 452-457
gun oattery, 6-pounder 460—473
mortar battery 361-375
Marching maneuvers Chapter IV
Markers, range board 805
Marking, barrels for explosive "D" 937-941
dynamite packages 930
guns, mortars, and mortar pits 855
Masking mount 67
Masking mount, 3-ineh gun 67, 456, 457
Master electrician 611, 612
Master gunner 611, 616
Material, care of Chapter XVIII
damage to 844
fire control 115
for repair 115
Mean lateral deviation 98
Mean longitudinal deviation 99
Mechanics 336
at formation for artillery drill 296
Medical examination for rated positions 1002
Message, meteorological 160, 619, 670
Metallic cases, empty, care of 882
Meteorological message 160, 619, 670
Meteorological observations, trial shots 670
Meteorological observer 617-619, 670
Meteorological station 116, 610, 617-619
Method of fire control, mine command 564
Methods, improvised 316
Methods of pointing 531-533
Military preparations for defense of coast line 3
Militia 79
Mine cable. (See Cable.)
Mine command, assignment of officers 279
casemates, manning party 563
designation of 1817,
details 2SS, 290, 291
dismissal of 312
double primary station .^^eo
double secondary station 562
fire-control system 559—564
manning parties 288, 290, 291, 559-563
manning tables 286
method of fire control 584
property officer 558
searchlights 572. 713, 714
stations 116, 559-563
target practice, subcaliber 632 635
Mine commander, gunner's Instruction 984 '

rated men 202,1003

reports to battle commander 310
responsibility of 556,557
target practice 281
Mine companies, definition 162
manning tables '

286
organization of 1 283 284
Mine field '
103
Mine searchlights 572, 71,3 714
Mines, submarine 161
Misfires ——
Mine stations, details for
-
mortar battery
2S.s 200
'
'^oi
GrM',
yoo
651
3(jq
 INDEX. 229

„ ^„ army
Mobile
[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]
3
Modifications in fire control and drill I I 316, 543
Modifications in target practice regulations OSs
Mortar, adjustment of index 529
adjustment of quadrants 530
care of Si6-859, 861-SBS, 870-873
close breech 370
counter-recoil springs 8<J4-869
definition 61
drift correction 789
drill 361-375
fire 371, 372
habitual position of 861
lanyard 372
manual for 361-375
marking of 855
method of pointing 533
open breech 369
orientation of 529
painting of 851
plotting hoard 788-790
use of 7
Mortar battery, ammunition service 373-375
auxiliary horizontal base system 517
azimuth setter 38, 361-363
chief of ammunition service 373
close breech 370
cover post 87, 363-367
deflection errors 512
dismissal of 359
drill 361-375
elevation setter 105, 361-363
emergency system 517
emplacement officer 357, 358, 372
fire-control manning details 505-508
fire-control system 505-517
firing interval 514, 516
firing of 372
gun pointer 360, 361
horizontal base system 510
indication and identification of targets 509
Inspection of 302, 621-628
loading position 153, 368
misfires 360
notes on the drill 362-375
observing station 507
open breech 369
organization of 357
pit commander 125, 1T9, 334, 359, 626
pointing test 538
posting section 359
posts for inspection 362, 367
posts of cannoneers 362-367
powder detail 283, 375
predicting and firing 511-516
projectile detail 283, 374
service of piece 361-375
service of powder 365
vertical base system 517
Mortar companies, definition 164
manning tables 286
organization of 283
Mortar deflection board, description of 780
theory and use of ?-- 781, 789
Mortar detachments -83
Mortar details ,
283
Mortar pits, inspection of 362, 626, 628
marking of 855
Motors, gun carriage 398
Motor starter 835
230 INDEX.

[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]

Mount (see Carriage) 64
Mountain battery 61
Multiplying scale 768
Musicians at formation for artillery drill 296
Muzzle, definition 165
swell of 244
Muzzle velocity, definition .
166
powder chart 792-795
probable, for trial shots 814, 815
subcaliber 6Sa
weight of charge 796
N.
Name plates 852
Naming of batteries 14
Nayal attack , 1,2,3
Night drill, attendance at 699
battery 697, 698
battle command 697, 699
designation of 590
Are command 697, 699
object of 696, 697
tug 698, 699
Nitroglycerine, decomposition of 933
Normal use of searchlight 717
Notes on tlie drill, gun, 12-inch, D. C .S80-405
gun, 12-inch, barbette carriage 430-434
gun, 10-inch, D. C 409-411
gun, 10-inch, barbette carriage 436
gun, 8-inch, D. C 415
gun, 8-inch, barbette carriage 439-440
gun, 6-inch, D. C 420-424
gun, 6-inch, pedestal mount 442
gun, 5-inch, 4.7-inch, and 4-inch 447, 448
gun, 3-inch 453-457
gun, 6-pounder 462-473
mortar battery 362-375
O.
Observation of fire 675-678
Observers, battery commander 323
definition 167
examination for 1004
horizontal base system 487
Indication and identification of a target 480-486
instruction of 329
meteorological 617-619
selection of 326,327
test of 330
tide 020
Observing interval 168
Observing room 116
Observing stations, definition 169
detachments for 283
gun battery, primary armament 477
mortar battery, manning detail 507
Obturating primers 350
Obturator 55, 122, 170, 873
Occult 171
OiBcers, assignment of 274-277, 279-2S2
at formation for roll calls 301
side arms at drill 300
Oil holes 862
Oils 839, 842, 848
Open breech, gun, 12-ineh, 1888 mechanism 381
gun, 12-inch, barbette carriage 430
gun, 12-inch, 1895 mechanism 383
mortars 369
 INDEX. 231

„ . ,
[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]
Open sight 238
Operation of aeroscope 751
anemometer 752
atmosphere board 750
azimuth instrument 755
deflection board 7r.6-768
D. P. F 773, 779
mortar deflection board 781
plotting board, Are commander 791
powder chart 79-1,795
range board 808-815
searchlights 700-724
telautograph 741-748
telephone 72S-74U
telescope 82u
wind component indicator 828
Operators, searchlight 702-710, 721-724
telautograph 741-748
telephone 728-740
telephone, searchlight 702, 700
Order of inspection 022
Orders of Are 172, 544, 545
Orders relating to target practice 029, 60S
Ordnance Department, pamphlets and publications 847
supplies and their use 8S0, 840
Ordnance machinist 594, 595, 597
Ordnance material, pamphlets concerning 847
Ordnance officers, accountability r.Oi
inspections 597
repair shops 597
requisitions 597
responsibility 597, 833
Ordnance repair shops 597
Ordnance sergeant 892
care of property 892,894
Organization Chapter III
gun battery, 12-inch, D. C 376
gun batterv, 12-inch, barbette carriage 425_427
gun battery, 10-inch, D. C 406,407
gun batterv, 10-inch, barbette carriage 435^37
gun battery, 8-inch, D. C 412,413
gun battery, 8-inch, barbette carriage 438,440
gun battery, 6-ineh, D. C 416.418
gun battery, 6-inch, pedestal 441, 443,444
gun battery, 5-iQCh, 4.7-inch, 4-inch 440
gun battery, 3-inch 449, 451
gun 6-pounder
battery, 458, 459
mortar battery 357
Orientation and bore sighting Chapter VIII
Orientation, azimuth instruments 754
definition 173
gnus 527
mortars 529
plotting boards 782-785
table 174
Outer defense zone 271
Out of commission 832-834
Out of service 832
P.
I'ackage. dynamite 923
explosive "D" 935
fuses and primers 1(47
9.">1
gun cotton
smolteless powder 900
racking boxes, for projectiles 879
Packing, Garlock 802
I'acking stuffing boxes 871
Pad. adjustment of S73
232 INDEX.

[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]

Painting 850-855
barrels for Explosive " D " 946
carriages 852
guns and mortars 851
marking guns, mortars, and pits 855
name plates 852
projectiles 880
Paints 838-840, 842
allowance of 850
preparation of 850, 853
removal from counter recoil springs 868
removal from guns and carriages 854
Pamphlets, Ordnance Department 847
Parade, battery 46
Parade slope 176
Parapet, care of ; 843
definition 177
Paulins 888
I*ermanent fortifications 3, 4
Permanent installations, modifications of 316
Personnel, artillery district headquarters 581
fire control 115
Piling projectiles 878
rincb bars 395
Pipe, equalizing 109
Pit 178
Pit commander 125, 170, 334, 359
at inspections 626
Pit, mortar, marking of 855
Pit section 283
Plane of departure 180
Plane of direction 181
Plane of sight 182
Plan, general defense 123, 567—569
Planting and loading sections, divisions of 283
Planting detachments 283
Platen 758
Platen scale 758, 759
Platform, care of 843
gun 129
loading 152
truck 261
Plotter, auxiliary horizontal base system 499
definition 183
examination for 1004
horizontal base system 480
indication and identification of a target 481
mortar battery 511^ 513
responsibility of 3,S2
vertical base system 500
Plotting board, adjustment 782—785
definition lg4
description of 782
detachment 283
detail - •jo'j

mortars 788-790
numbering 78q
orientation 782-785
subcaliber 7^1, 790
subcaliber, mortar "
'
790
Plotting room, damage to 503
definition lyg
gun battery, primary armament, manning detail 47(5
mortar battery, manning detail 506
Point, directing 1 jqj
I'ointing 21, 68, 186.
531-533
method of _ 21,68,186,531-533
 INDEX. 233

[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]

Pointing test, gun battery primary armament 534-537
mortar battery 538
rapid-flre batteries 540
records of 536,330
Point of fall 187
Point of impact 188
Police, buildings and grounds 890, 891, 894
Position finder. (See Depression position finder.)
Position finding system 189
Position of guns, habitual 860
Position of mortars, habitual 368, 861
Post artillery engineer. {See Artillery engineer.)
Post commander 281, 598-601
care of armament 599
details made by 287, 599-601
efficiency of personnel 599
manning tables 286
nature of command 598, 599
responsibility of 556, 599
Post headquarters, detail of manning parties 287
Posting sections 307, 308, 359
Post manning tables 286
Post ordnance ofBcer. (Sec Ordnance officer.)
Posts, cover 363-367
87,
Posts, mortar battery, at inspection 362, 367
Post telephone switchboard 116
Post, the Chapter XII
Powder, blending 49,885
care of 885,911,912,970-979
delivery of for target practice 656, 673, 674
inspection of 973-979
-lots to be used 663,664
package, smokeless 969
poor practice due to 665
report of 665
sample bottles 975-978
samples of 974
service of 365,396,656,673,674
shipment of 886
storage and care of 885,970-979
storage cases 972
storage of 661, 662, 885
target practice 661-665, 673, 885
temperature of magazines 662, 910, 971
test, litmus 975-978
Powder chamber 50, 190
Powder charges, delivery at target practice '
656, 673, 674
handling, 12-lnch battery 396
weights of 796
Powder charts, construction of 793
description of 792,793
examples of use 795
object of 792
use of 794, 795
Powder chute 191
Powder detail 283
12-inch gun, D. C 405
mortar battery 375
Powder hoist 192
Powder hoist well 193
Power detachment 283
Power plants, access to 608
batteries 608
care of 605
construction and maintenance of 837
duties of engineers 614
duties of firemen 613
duties of master electricians 612
Increase of load 592
82615—09 16
234 INDEX.

[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]

Power plants, inspections of 62S
repairs to 592-594
Power sections, organization of 283
Practice. (See Target practice.) >

Precautions for safety, l5attery practice 647-658

battle command practice 687
Are command practice 684, 685
primers 352
salutes 693-695
Predicted point 194-196,371
Predicted time 195
Predictor 196
Predicting and firing, mortar batteries 511—516
Predicting Interval 194
Preliminary practice, subcaliber 632,633
Preparation of paints 850, 853
Preparations for inspection 621
Preparations for target practice 658, 667, 885
Pressure gauges 671, 672
Primary armament (see also Gun battery, primary armament). 6, 10
Primary stations, abbreviation and definition 39, 116, 197
fire command manning party 551
mine command manning party 559
Primers, care of 882,948,949
combination 352
definition 198
drill 346
guncotton 965
insertion of ^ 347
inspection of 950
obturating 350
package 947
precaution in case of failure 350
service 347-349
target practice 650,651
Priming charges 199
Probable muzzle velocity 814,815
Projectile detail, gun, 12-inch, D. C 283, 404
mortar battery 374
Pro.iectiles, care of 877-881, 080-982
delivery of, for target practice 673, ri74
dummy 394
energy of 108
filled and fused 980-983
inspection of 983
loading of 881
paclfing boxes for 879
painting of 880
piling of 878
preparation for target practice 666
removal from gun 653
storage of 080-982
target practice 653,666,673,877
travel of 255
Property officer, mine command 558
Property returns 846
Provisional installation modifications 316

Q-
Quadrant, adjustment of 530
definition 200
Quadrant elevation 104, 201
Qualification, as gunner, continuance of 1000
of rated enlisted men (see Rated enlisted men) 907-1004
Quartermaster Department, supplies 842
 INDEX. 235

[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]

R.
Raiding parties 3
Rammer detail, gun battery, 12-incli 391
Ramming projectiles, gun, 12-inch, barbette carriage 433
Ramp 202
Range, corrected 83
corrections 525, 678
danger 89
definition 203
deviations 100
differences 206, 528
searchlight 229
Range azimuth table 204
Range board, adjustment of, boards issued December 20, 1906,
and subsequently 813
boards issued prior to Deeemebr 26, 1906 812
corrections 678
correction scale 801
curves 802, 803
definition 205
general description 798—807
mariners '
805
nomenclature 797
operation 808-815
probable muzzle velocity from 814, 815
reference numbers 804
ruler 800
travel ruler 806, 807
Range corrections, target practice 678
Range finder (see Depression position finder j 94
definition 207
Range-finding station, manning details, secondary armament
(see also Fire-control station) 519, 520
Range-finding system, battery of secondary armament 520-525
Range keeper 208
Range officer 209
duties at drill 312, 325, 498. 000, 502
inspection 623
Range scale, calibration 60
Range setter, definition 210
gun battery, 12-inch 393, 400
Rapid-fire batteries, manning details 519, 520
mine command 17
pointing tests 540
range-finding system ri20-.")2.5
Rapid-fire gun 211
Rapid-fire gun carriage 67
Rated enlisted men, appointment of 292, 293, 1003
battle command 293
continuance of qualification as gunner 1000
eligible for examination 909
eligible list !i98-1001
examinations of 997-lUii4
medical examination 1002
qualification of 997-1004
scope of examination 1004
Rated positions, scope of examination 1004
Reader 331
Ready 212, 358
Rear slope . 213
Receiving table 214
Recess, ammunition 23
breech 56
truck 262
Recoil 213
Recoil cylinders, care of S49, S02
cleaning 809
definition 216
236 INDEX.

[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]

Record, attendance at artillery drill 314
pointing tests 536,539
Record practice, emergency conditions (subcaliber) (see also
Target practice, subcaliber) 632
normal conditions (subcaliber) 632
Records, artillery engineer 607
of fire commander, target practice 683
Reference numbers 90, 217, 804
Regulations, for target practice, modifications in 688
of boat service 589
Relay 218
Relocation 155
Removal of paint from counter recoil springs 868
Removal of primers 650
Repairs, engineer property 593, 594, 602
minor defects 609
to power plants 592-594
Reports, artillery engineer 607
defects in material 6s;;, 689, 844
during drill, practice or action > 322
powder 665
target practice : 082, 6S9, 690
Requisitions by ordnance officer : 597
Reserve ammunition 315
Reserve detail 283
Reserves, coast artillery 78,79
Reserve table 219
Responsibility, artillery engineer 605, 609, 610
battery commander 315,609,636,655,833
battle commander 566,567,654
district commander 566, 584-590
field o( Are 636, 654, 657
fire commander 541,543,654
gun commander 845
"mine commander 556, 557
ordnance officer 597, 833
post commander 556,599
tactical, definition 246
Restricted fire 172, 220, 545, 578
Retraction of gun 402, 421
ropes 402
Rifling 221,266
Rimbase 222
Roll calls 297
formation for 301, 302
Round 223
Roving light 224, 700, 707-710, 715, 717
Ruler, range board 800
Rules for using telautograihs 748
telephones 1 739, 740

S.
Safety, field of fire 636,654
Safety oflicer (J84
Salutes 691-695
precautions (or safety 693-095
Saluting interval 692
Salvo 225
Salvo point 226, 545
Salvo table 227
Sample bottles, powder 975-978
Samples of powder 974
Scope of examination, for gunners 994-996
for rated positions 1004
Searching with lights 710-714
Searchlight, battle command 572, 714
care of 72,'^
carbons for 724
classification of _ 70Q
 INDEX. 237

[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]

Searchlight, commands 720, 721
control of 720
definition, lis. 134, 224
designation 718
directing 716
fixed 110, 118, 700, 707, 715, 717
illuminating i:!4, 700, 711, 712, 714
indication of a target 577
maintenance of 602
manning parties for 70.3-706
mine 572, 713, 714
normal use of 717
roving 224, 700, 707-710, 715, 717
searching 710-712
sectors 709
service of the lights 700-724
standard 701
telephone operators for 702, 706
two lights working together 716
vessels, thrown on 719
watcher 706, 710
Searchlight area 228
Searchlight officer 274, 571-57S, 702, 710, 720
duties at drill 571-573, 710
Searchlight operator 702-710, 721-724
Searchlight, range 229
Searchlight station, abbreviation 116
maintenance 610
manning parties 703-706
Secondary armament (see also Gun battery, secondary arma-
ment) 5, 0, 10
abbreviation 116
Secondary station, abbreviation 116
battery manning party 475-479, 505-508, 519
definition 39, 230
fire command manning party 552
mine command manning party 561, 562
Second-class gunners. (See Gunner.)
Section, ammunition 283
Sections, chief of 285, 295-298, 302, 307, 308
formations of 295, 296
gun 376, 407, 413, 418, 426, 436, 439, 443, 448, 451, 450
posting 307, 308, 359
Sector, searchlight 709
Selection of observers .;26, 327
of telephone operators 728-732
Semi-automatic guns 156
Service at the emplacement Chapter VI
Service of ammunition, gun battery, 12-inch, disappearing car-
riage 403-405
gun battery, 12-inch, barbette carriage 434
gun battery, 10-inch, disappearing carriage 409
gun battery, 10-inch, barbette carriage 437
gun battery, 8-inch, disappearing carriage 414
gun battery, 8-lnch, barbette carriage 440
gun battery, 6-inch, disappearing carriage 424
gun battery, 6-inch, pedestal mount 444
gun battery, 5-inch, 4.7-inch, 4-inch 447, 448
gun battery, 3-inch 453-4.^5, 457
gun battery, 6-pouuder 463-467, 472
mortar battery 373-375
Service of the piece, general instructions 337-353
gun battery, 12-inch, disappearing carriage 376-405
gun battery, 12-lnch, barbette carriage 425^34
gun battery, 10-inch, disappearing carriage 406-411
gun battery, 10-inch, barbette carriage 435-437
gun battery, 8-inch, disappearing carriage 412-415
gun battery, 8-inch, barbette carriage 438-440
gun battery, 6-inch, disappearing carriage 416-424
gun battery, 6-inch pedestal mount 441-445
 238 INDEX.

[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]

Service of the piece, gun battery, 5-inch, 4.7-inch, 4-inch 446—448
gun battery, 3-inch 449-45T
gun battery, 6-pounder 458-473
mortar battery 357-375
Service of powder 365, 396, 656, 673, 674
Service of searchlights 700-724
Service of telautographs 741—748
Service of telephones 728-740
Service practice. (See Target practice.)
, Service primers 347-349
Serving table, definition 231
for 6-pounder-battery 472
Set forward point 196, 232
Shell, use of. 6
Shell room 233
Shell tracers 234
Shipment of explosives 886
Shot, use of 6
Shot gallery 235
Shot hoists - 236
Shot hoist well 237
Shot truclis 392
Shots, trial. (See Trial shots.)
Side arms, at drill 300
Siege artillery 61
Sight elevation 104, 239
Sights, definition 238
open 238
telescopic 238, 249, 821
Signaling, visual 602, 649, 725
Signal property, care of 893
Signals, at target practice 649
for service of piece 353
Signal station 116, 610, 727
supplies 841
Six-inch gun battery, disappearing carriage. {See Gun battery,
6-inch, disappearing carriage.)
Six-inch gun battery, pedestal mount. (See Gun battery, 6-inch,
pedestal mount.)
Six-pounder battery. (See Gun battery, 6-pounder.)
Slope 25
Slope, blast . 48
Slope, centering 50, 190
Slope, exterior 111
Slope, interior 140
Slope, parade 176
Slope, rear 213
Slope, superior 242
Smolteless powder (see Powder) 969-979
Speaking tube 725
Sponging, salutes 694
target practice 652
Springs, assembling of 867
cleaning and painting of 869
counter-recoil, preservation of 864-866
removal of paint from 868
Staff officers, assignment of _ 274
Stand fast 345
Standard searchlight 701
Starting motor 835
Station, base-end 30 hq
battery commander 44, 116, 321, 354^ 605
double primary H6, 560
double secondary 116 552
fire-control, abbreviations 116
fire-control, care of _ 610
Inspection of ~
~623, 628
meteorological 116, 610, 617-619
observing 116, I69
primary 39, hq 197
 INDEX. 239

[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]

Station, range finding. (Sec Fire-control station.)
searclilight 116, 010
secondary 39, 116, 230
signal 116, 610, 727
supplementary 39,116,243
tactical command : 272
tide 116. 610, 620
wireless 116.610
Storage and care of dynamite 924-934
Storage and careof explosive "D" 936-942
Storage and careof fuses and primers 948, 94P
Storage and careof gun cotton 952-960.966
Storage and careof smokeless powder 970-977
Storage batteries, care of 611
Storage cases, cartridge 883.884
for explosives ... 900-905
for smokeless powder 972
Storage of black powder 911. 912
Storage of detonators 918, 919
Storage of dry gun cotton . 966
Storage of explosives Chapter XIX
Storage of powder___^ 661, 602, 885
Storage of projectiles 980-982
Striking angle 240
Striking velocity 241
StuiHng boxes, removal of packing from 870
repacking of 871
Subcaliber ammunition. (See Ammunition.)
Subcaliber deflection board . 765
Subcaliber gun, adjustment of 633
Subcaliber practice. (See Target practice, subcaliber.)
Subcaliber practice plotting board 787
Subcaliber practice plotting board, mortar 788, 790
Subdivisions, remote stations, dismissal of 313
Submarine defenses 4
Submarine mines 161.
Superior slope 242
Supervision of electrician sergeants 613
Supervision of target practice 2.H1, 543
Supplementary stations 39, 116, 243
Supplies, Engineer Department 838
Ordnance Department s:!9. S40
quartermaster 842
signal 841
Supports, coast artillery 3, 19. 78, 80
Swasey, D. P. F., adjustment of 770-773
Swell of the muzzle 244
Switchboard, post telephone 116
Symbols and abbreviations, fire-control stations 116
T.
Table, delivery 92
Table, manning 159, 286
Table, orientation 174
Table, range, azimuth 204
Table, receiving 214
Table, reserve 219
Table, salvo 227
Table, serving 231
Tactical chain, units of 12
Tactical command 245
Tactical command, stations for 272
Tactical responsibility 246
Take cover 344
Targ 247
Target, definition 248
for trial shots 668
Identification of 133, 480^86, 509, 521, 523, 553-555
240 INDEX.

[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]

Target, indication of_-_ 137, 480^86, 509, 521, 523, 55.3-555, 576, 577
location of 155
relocation of 155
travel of 256
Target practice Chapter XIV
Target pi-actice (service), ammunition service 674
arbitrary deflection correction 675
attendance at 587
battery commander, safety ofiicer 684
battery 642-682, 689, 690
battle command 642, 644, 647-858, 686, 687-, 688
breechblocks 673, 679, 680, 682
cease firing 653
cleaning of bore and chamber 681
commence firing 673
delivery of powder charges 6.')6, 673,674
district commander 643, 658, 688
divisions of 630, 642
Are command 642-650,683-685
firing by electricity 651
flags and signals 649
gas check 680
gun pointer 675
inspection after firing 682
mine commander 281
misfires 650, 651
modification of practice regulations 688
observation of fire 675-678
orders relating to 629, 658
powder 661-665, 673, 885
precautions for safety 647-658, 684, 685, 687
preparations for 658-667, 885
pressure gauges 671, 672
projectiles for 653, 666, 673, 877
range corrections 678
records of fire commander 683
removal of primers 650
removal of projectiles 653
reports 682, 689, 690
responsibility for field of fire 636, 654, 657
sponging 652
supervision of 281, 543
time of 643
trial shots 667-672, 814, 813
Target practice (subcaliber), at home stations 641
battery 632-635
battle command 632, 635, 638
deflection 765
deflection board 765
determination of muzzle velocity 633
district commander 637
divisions of 632
emergency 632, 634
gun pointer 039
methods of fire control 638
normal condition 632
object of 631
preliminary 032, 633
record 632
responsibility, field of fire 036
time of 637
vi-hereheld 640
Telautograph, care of 741, 889
service ofj 741-748
Telephone operators, selection of 728—732
test of 729, 730
training of 7.35
Telephone operators for searchlights 702. 706
 INDEX. 241

[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]

Telephones, care of 735-738
test of 733, 734
Telephone service 728-740
Telephone switchboard 116
Telescope 819, 820
adjustment of 820
care of 819, 887
focusing of 820
repair of 887
Telescopic sight 238, 249, 821
Temperature of magazine 662, 910, 971
Ten-inch gun battery. (See Gun battery, 10-inch.)
Test, ammunition service 628
cable 596, 606
communications and mine cables 596, 605, 606, 734
litmus paper 975, 978
new devices and methods 316, 543
observers 330
telephone operators 729, 730
telephones 733, 734
Thermometers 617, 822
Three-inch gun battery. (See Gun battery, 3-inch.)
Throttling bar 250
Tide observer 620
Tide station 116,610,620
Time interval bell 251, 497
Time interval system 497, 823
Time of target practice 637,643
Time range board 252, 393
Time to load, gun battery, 12-inch, disappearing carriage 401
gun battery, 6-inch, disappearing carriage 423
Tracer, shell 234
Tracking 253
Training of telephone operators 735
Trajectory , 254
Travel of projectile 255
Travel of target 256
Travel ruler SOO, 807
Traverse 257
Traversing by electricity 399, 400
Traversing indicator 258
Trial shots, metorological observations 670
object of 259, 525, 669
pressure gauges 671
probable muzzle velocity 667-672, 814, 815
targets for 668
Training and examination of candidates for gunners and spe-
cial ratings Chapter XX
Tripping 390, 395
Trolley 260
Truck, detail, gun b.ittery 391
platform 261
recess 262
shot 392
without brakes 397
Trunnion band 264
Trunnions 263
T-square scale 763
Tube 265
Tug 586
Twelve-inch gun battery. (See Gun battery, 12-inch.)
Twist of rifling 266
Typical battle command 273

TJ.
Units of tactical chain 12
Unrestricted Are 172, 267, 545, 578
242 INDEX.

[Numbers refer to paragraphs.]

V.
Vane, wind 829-
Velocity, muzzle. (See Muzzle velocity.)
striking 241
wind 617, 618-
Vent 268, 681
Vertical base system, gun battery, primary armanent 500,501
indication and identification of a target by 482
mortar battery 51T
Visual signaling 602, 649, 725

W.
Walk, battery commander's 45
Wall, corridor 85
Wall, interior 141
War Department, authority for modifications in permanent
installation 31&
Washing bores 681,682
Watchers, searchlight 706, 710
Water front 269
Water tran&poi-tation 586
Weights of powder charges 796
Well, counterweight 86-
powder hoist 193
shot hoist 237
Wheeled carriage 67
Wind, azimuth and velocity of 617,618
Wind arc, the 762
Wind component indicator, definition 270-
object and description of 824-827
operation of 828
Wind corrections, gun battery, secondary armament 522^
Wind vane 829
Wireless communication r 725
Wireless stations 116, 610
Working parties 595-

Z.
Zone 271